Home

MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User`s Manual

1. Local station Local station Remote station Remote station the number of Remote station the number of the number of the number of occupied stations 1 the number of occupied stations 4 Master station occupied occupied Station number 4 occupied Station number 7 stations 2 stations 1 stations 2 g Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 3 g 000 OO00000000 0000 OOO000000 0000 JOOO000000 OOO OO0000000 Oco 000000000 Ocoy 000000000 The station does not become a data link SZ faulty station Local station Local station Remote station Remote station E a a 1 Remote station a 4 Master station poe a T g Station number 4 tthe nied of Station number 7 stations 2 stations 1 stations 2 Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 5 daa chabedd aiaandey rao b wen Sate 5 perenn nd O000 000000000 0o00 SQ0000 O00000000 iOOOT 000000000 OOF OA NOOO 000000000 Point When a slave station that has been set as an error invalid station is specified as a reserved station reserved station selection is prioritized If an error occurs in all the slave stations set as an error invalid station the ERR LED turns on 1 Setting method Set an error i
2. Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a watchdog timer error has occurred is stored SW0084 0 No watchdog timer error 684p 1 Watchdog timer error SW0085 Other station b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi b0 685 watchdog timer SW0084 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 biror SW0085 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 o swoo086 occurrence SWo0086 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 686p status SW0087 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW0087 Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 6871 Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether a fuse blown error has occurred is stored SWO0088 0 Normal 688p 1 Error SW0089 b15 b14 b13 b12 to a oneec epe aeea eTe fuse blown 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 O x SWO08A status a eee 68A SW008B 64 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SWO008B The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations 68B Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether the setting of switches of other stations during data link has been changed is stored SWO008C 0 No change 68C 1 Changed Swo008D b15 b14 b13 b12
3. b Parameter settings for a master station Number of Modules i v Boards Blank No Setting M Set a a a ne i s Lo Master Station Duplex Function x hat CC Link Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Detect Now Verify Mode Setting Ver 1 Mode v TXSpeed 156kbps T Link Scan Time Approx 16 44 ms fh r Stati D ar A eE Bel T Toa na enora Spaniel 5 a No Model Name Station Type ofSTA yd Setting v w 3 1 QueisT1N Standby Master Station Ver 1 1Occupied Station Single eA 2 2 A6SBT 64DAT Remote Device Station Ver 1 2 Occupied Station Single 2 3 4 Gen Intelligent Device Station intelligent Device Staton Ver 1 1 Occupied Station Single unt Total STAH 4 QUE1BT1IN uoljouny Jaysew Aqpueys GZ8 Aygeiiey weysks ey Bulroidw 7g c Parameter settings for a standby master station Number of Modules ft gt Boards Blank No Setting T Set Operation Setting Operation Setting Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Saree 147 d Program example e Control start relay when the master station is operating M10 e Control start relay when the standby master station is operating M11 a Sue B _ Con
4. Delectability Error code Aare A 5 A Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal i station station When connection to another station has been set the sending Check the station number of the Station number ron siete B782 aes destination station and the destination or change the setting O specification error f sending source station are the to connection to the host station same When data larger than 1k was being sent in transient Transient storage ran Wait for a while and send the B783 transmission an error has O O buffer error request again occurred in the transient storage buffer Access code setting A non existing access code or Set the correct access code or B801 F O O error attribute is set attribute A non existing access code was B802 Access code error d Use the correct access code O O used B803 Number of data points The number of data points is Set the number of data points o o error outside the range within 1 to 960 bytes A I R PITE Change the definition Attribute definition The attribute definition is invalid as Change the target station number error Or transient transmission was tti setting B804 Transient transmission performed although the target 9 O A Or check the function version of unsupported station station did not support transient oo i the targe
5. Local station or Local station or Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station intelligent device intelligent device al ele or remote or remote station station device station device station q e H i ooo i 3 i ooo O fm o O fim o 0000 0000000000 bad baad OOO DOOOOOOOS 3 ET A pag 1 A a le Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable a terminating resistor of 110Q used Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 900m 2 5Mbps 20cm or longer 400m 5Mbps 160m 10Mbps 100m SUONEOIIOadS SOUBWOIISd ZE OLL 48A 4UIT OD Souejsip aged Je9AO0 WNWIXEN Z Z E 29 3 2 3 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 00 Configure a CC Link system where the transmission speed and the cable length satisfy the following conditions 1 When a system is configured with a remote I O station and remote device station only Remote 1 O station Master station or remote Remote O station j or remote noonoo device station device station Remote 1 0 station or remote device station Remote I O station or remote device station bo gt A O000 00000001 O00 2 2 A Maximum overall cable dist
6. 1 Q NC RR NC Q Oe DA ee eS ii Q y gt t _ DB Fo pe IQ Q 2 a seg RESET RUN STOP RUN OD CY STOP 3 4 324 Connect the terminating resistor provided with the master local module between the DA and DB terminals on the terminal block of the master local module Before power on check the following e Module mounting status Input power supply voltage e The CPU module is set to STOP e The CPU module is not set to RESET Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master local module to any of A to E When setting the switch from A to E set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation L gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system To the next page 5 QJ61BT11N RUN W MST D E ON SD Flashing ERR OFF When the test is completed CPU module Master local module QJ61BT11N RUN MST E ON SD D Flashing ER O OFF CPU module Master local module QJ61BT11N RUN L RUN MST SMST E ON sD O CRD Flashing ERR L ERR OFF 2 Precautions a Cable connection Perform a hardware test to a master local module alone with cables disconnected Failure to do so may result in a failure of the test b CPU module sw
7. CPU module Master station Local station CPU module 1 Command G P RIRD T Buffer memory 2 Device Device 2 Receive buffer 2 1 The buffer memory specified by S 2 and S 3 of the station specified by S 1 or the device in a CPU module is accessed 2 The data that has been read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data that has been read after the device specified by D1 is stored and the device specified by D2 turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RIRD instruction The G P RIRD instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D2 turns on 178 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RIRD instruction Completion device D2 and Status display device at completion D2 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where th
8. O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station SW0160 The use prohibited status of the remote register is stored 760p 0 Usable 1 Use prohibited Sw0161 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bl b0 761H Remoteregister SW0160 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 use prohibited SW0161 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 O x x 7624 swo16s 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Sw0163 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 763 Reserved stations and final station number onwards are not targeted issi The result of a transmission speed test is stored SW0183 Transmission p 783 speed test 0 Normal O O x H result Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 swo184 The result of the transmission speed test for each station is stored 784p 0 Normal same transmission speed as the master station or no response from the module SW0185 1 Error different transmission speed from the master station 7854 Ti issi ee b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO speed tes SW0186 result for each ca O 7864 station ovens SW0186 SW0187 SW0187 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 787p 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 364 APPENDICES The timing of when data in link special registers SWs are updated differs depending
9. Signal direction Master local module CPU module Signal direction CPU module Master local module Input No Signal name Output No Signal name Xn0 Module error Yno Xn1 Host data link status Yn1 Xn2 Use prohibited Yn2 Xn3 Other station data link status Yn3 Xn4 Yn4 Xn5 Yn5 xe Yn6 o x7 Yn7 Xa Yn8 Xn9 Use prohibited Yn9 xa YnA XB YnB Xnc Ync XnD YnD E o XnE YnE o XnF Module ready YnF a5 re Use prohibited a X n 1 0 Y n 1 0 E XAET Y n 1 1 z Xma Y n 1 2 xm Y n 1 3 mya Y n 1 4 ms Y n 1 5 mne Y n 1 6 Xma Y n 1 7 Use prohibited X n 1 8 Y n 1 8 Xm Y n 1 9 O XHA Y n 1 A X n1 B Y n 1 B XD Y n 1 D XD Y n 1 D X ntE Y n 1 E O Xn Y n 1 F Point Do not turn on the Use prohibited signals of the I O signals for the CPU module Doing so may cause a malfunction in the programmable controller system 37 3 5 Buffer memory is memory to transmit data between a master local module and a CPU module List of Buffer Memory Areas Data can be read from or written to buffer memory areas by setting the parameters of a programming tool or using dedicated instructions Resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system returns data in buffer memory areas to default When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Availability in the table as explained
10. k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal j station station Please consult your local B419 to B41A System error i ai O O Mitsubishi representative An unsupported request was Check the request data and the B601 Request type error i O O received target station number Too many transient requests Transient request Wait for a while and send the B602 and B603 were sent to the corresponding O O overload error request again station i Transient transmission was Wait for a while and send the B604 Line test in progress O x performed during a line test request again Transient storage The transient storage buffer data Wait for a while and send the B605 buffer data failed to be i 3 O Oo was failed to be obtained request again obtained Please consult your local B606 System error I O O Mitsubishi representative Target station CPU The CPU module on the target B607 ee Check the CPU module O O error station is in error Transient transmission Transient transmission was Set the intelligent mode for the B608 target station mode performed to the AJ61BT11 or TER EA O O rget station setting error A1SJ61BT11 in the I O mode E B60C Please consult your local System error a O O B700 Mitsubishi representative Reduce the load placed on the transient transmission and oe perform the transmission again Transient t
11. No Name Application Sets the transmission speed and mode of the master local module Default 0 Set the same value of the transmission speed for all stations Mode atau spang Switch number setting Transmission speed 156kbps 0 Transmission speed 625kbps 1 Online Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 2 Transmission speed 5Mbps 3 Transmission speed 10Mbps 4 EEE Line test gt Page 86 Section 6 5 1 Transmission speed 156kbps 5 3 speed mode setting When the station number setting switches Transmission speed 625kbps 6 switch eines nee speed 2 5Mbps 7 When the station number setting switches A a ec are set at 1 to 64 Transmission speed 10Mbps 9 Line test 2 Transmission speed 156kbps A Transmission speed 625kbps B Hardware test 3 Page 324 Section 11 5 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 0 Transmission speed 5Mbps D Transmission speed 10Mbps E Setting not allowed F Used to connect a CC Link dedicated cable lt gt Page 77 Section 6 2 2 The SLD and FG terminals are connected inside the module 4 Terminal block Because a two piece terminal block is used the module can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block Before installing or removing the terminal block power off the module 5 Serial number Indicates the serial number on the rating plate display Point The settings of the station number setting switches and the transmission speed mode setting
12. Item Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO Data Link Faulty Station Hold or clear the input data i Hold Clear Setting Default Clear input data Refresh or clear compulsorily Case of CPU STOP Setting Refresh Clear compulsorily Default Refresh Operation Block Data Assurance per Disable or enable the setting i f Disable Enable Setting Station Default Disable the setting Number of Occupied 1 to 4 stations occupied Stations Default Occupied Station 1 i i Single Double Quadruple Octuple Expanded Cyclic Setting Default Single Master Station s Master Station Master Station Duplex Function j Master Station Duplex Function Master station Extension Base Type Master station Extension Base Local Station f Local Station Standby Master Station Standby Master Station Default Master Station Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode a Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode a Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Remote I O Net Mode Offline Default Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote I O Net Mode Offline Total Module Connected 1 to 64 Default 64 Remote Input RX refresh device Device name Select one from X M L B D W R and ZR Remote Output RY refresh device Device name Select one from Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Remote Register RWr refresh device Device nam
13. TEE A E E AA E S T E ane ee naa Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Remote I O station Station number 3 Occupies 1 station k ae in ee Y00 to YOF Y10 to Y1F Outputs RY RWw of the master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the standby master station By transferring the inputs RX RWr of the standby master station to the outputs RY RWw outputs to the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above L gt Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 Input of the standby master station Standby master station controlling Station number 1 0 Master station Remote Remote input RX output RY RX00 to RXOF bases apiece Nene emecm aaa Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station r 7 Remote I O station Station number 3 Occupies 1 station Inputs RX RWr of the master station are stored in outputs RY RWw of the standby master station By transferring the outputs RY RWw of the standby master station to the inputs RX RWr inputs from the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above gt Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 138 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Operation between the master station returning and the standby master station controlling data link Output from the standby master station Master station standby status Station number 0 gt 1 Occup
14. Master station Remote station intelligent Local station I O station gt z device station F Fe N en eas _ A k F ee a a ANA N 1 1 d S 1 i CPU module Master Remote i Remote j Local station CPU module 1 i station VO station amp device station 1 4 Intelligent 1 i I 4 device station 1 1 3 1 TA i x RX Ja El Rx Jit iif Rx Jit i RY Y 1 N i P took PA i D i Y RY RY N RY A RX X A i o i RWw R oe RWw Ss RWr i Ww i pod oi W 3 o 1 RWr gt of RWr ft RWw i Q i _ _ po j fe a D o b Non periodic communications transient transmission Data can be communicated when a request is issued unlike cyclic transmission Direct access to buffer memory areas and devices in other stations can be performed in transient transmission lt gt Page 173 CHAPTER 9 CPU module Master station Local station CPU module Command hH Hinstucton Device Write request D Device 1234H Terminating Terminating resistor resistor 17 2 Parameter settings and diagnostics using a programming tool a Parameter settings using a programming tool 1 This item is automatically set by the CC Link configuration window Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Please input the start I O No where the CC
15. 353 SMS s13 s1691 jeloeds yur Z E xIpueddy SMS suajsiBay jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Mode setting status is stored 0 Online remote net mode 1 Online remote I O net mode SW0060 Mode setting i 6604 a 2 Offline O H status i 3 Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test The current host station number is stored SW0061 Host station M ster stat Master station 6614 number i O 1 to 64 Local station The operation setting configured using the parameter is stored b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Ly Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station Valid only when b1 is 0 gt Master station duplex function 0 Master station duplex function disabled 1 Master station duplex function enabled gt Status of input data from a data link faulty station 0 Clear 1 Hold Number of occupied stations 00 Number of occupied stations 1 10 Number of occupied stations 2 11 Number of occupied stations 3 SW0062 Module 01 Number of occupied stations 4 O 662 operating status gt Master station local station start by dedicated instruction 0 Start by CPU parameter 1 Start by dedicated instruction m p Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case
16. 4 The master local module with the serial number first five digits of 09112 or later supports this function When using the master local module with the serial number first five digits of 09111 or earlier reset the CPU module 305 SI BPOD JON TELL s po9 JOU L Delectability Error code oe i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Reduce the number of standby BBCA Multiple standby Multiple standby master stations master stations on the same line 7 o master stations error exist on the same line to one Or check the line status Please consult your local BBD1 System error PERPE O O Mitsubishi representative Please consult your local BBD3 System error st eaten O O Mitsubishi representative A data link error has occurred on All stations data link Issue the request after data link BC01 all stations during a message O x error nay has started transmission Please consult your local BCO02 System error sh aae ak O x Mitsubishi representative The target station specified for the message transmission function is in any of the following status e No network parameter is set BC03 Message transmission The specified station No is not Check network parameters or o X target station failure the head station number target stations operations T
17. B1 1 B1 5 Slave station RD flashing Slave station Yes L ERR on I I I I I gt A2 1 A2 2 I I I I I Yes K A2 5 A2 7 i A4 1 A4 3 I l I I I t I l I I Slave station L ERR flashing B2 2 B2 3 tof tt syeyomo Buyjooysejqnos LLL Slave station RD on SD flashing Yes A2 3 A2 4 1 A2 8 A2 9 A2 10 A4 4 A4 6 Bee I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A2 5 A2 6 A2 9 A4 1 A4 2 A4 5 Be Bera B24 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item 4 To check error details a programming tool is required To the next page joo Buluwesboid e Buisn Buyooysajqnol Z LLL 273 ultipl stations repeatedly fail and recover Faulty station type Remote I O station Remote I O station cyclic data failure Vv Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting by the status logging L gt Page 275 Section 11 1 2 2 Are all RY outputs disabled C1 1 C1 2 Remote device station cyclic data failure End Remote device station ready signal of the re
18. Pee oe LFS F6 sF6 F7 F F9 s Navigation A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Program Setting POU Program 4s MAIN Local Device Comment Device Memory Device Initial Value View selection area Connection Destination Unlabeled TERM Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description ACPU A generic term for the following CPU modules AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 A1NCPU A2NCPU A2ZNCPU S1 A3NCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU A2ZUCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU AJ65BT R2 N A generic term for the CC Link system RS 232 interface modules AJ65BT R2 and AJ65BT R2N AnUCPU A generic term for the AZUSCPU A2ZUSCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 AZUCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU CC Link dedicated cable A generic term for a Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible and CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible C Controller module Built in Ethernet port QCPU A generic te
19. 220000000 eee 104 106 Station specific mode setting 105 Status difference between a master station and a slave station at an error n naasa uaaa 121 Status logging ssaa saaa a iaaa naaa d a 315 Stopping and restarting data link 320 SW tsei amna ENN a aa od a a 13 351 Synchronous mode n sssaaa anaana 163 System configuration s a aaa 69 T branch connection a a aaa saaa 79 T branch system configuration 79 Temporary error invalid station setting 168 Terminal block nannaa anaana naana 23 78 Terminating resistors 000 eee eae 76 Test after wiring 2200000 00 ceeaee 86 The order of connecting the cables 76 Tightening torque 00200 eee eee 78 Total Module Connected 98 Transient transmission 13 127 Transmission delay time 4 371 Transmission speed 2 0 0 0 cee eee eee 24 Transmission speed setting 85 Transmission speed test 0000 eee 90 Transmission speed mode setting switch 23 Troubleshooting by the CC Link diagnostics 271 Troubleshooting by the status logging 275 Troubleshooting common to modules 270 Troubleshooting flowcharts 268 Troubleshooting using a programming tool 271 Troubleshooting using LEDs 268 Troubleshooting when the RUN LED on the ma
20. 339 351 Link special relay SB 338 343 List of buffer memory areas 38 List of dedicated instructions 173 List of functions 000000 eee eee 34 List of I O signals 20200000 00 37 List of modes 0000 00 cee ee 43 Lists of problems 02000000 276 L ocal station sac acd adap baamece edb e a eles 14 Manual page organization 00000 12 Master station 000000 eee 13 Master Station Data Link Type 98 Master station duplex function 135 Master station duplication error canceling 172 Master station switching function 135 Master local module 200 13 17 Maximum number of connected modules 27 Maximum number of connected modules master station 0 0 ccc eee eee 24 Maximum number of link points per system 24 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 00 30 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 10 29 MELSECNETI H remote I O station 70 74 MOG iets a as eek ee e aa E apas See only Cee ee 43 98 Mode Setting 2 00000 eee 104 Model Name 0 00 cece eee ees 104 Module error logS 220000e eee eee 291 Module error XnN0 annaua anaana 326 Module Lista ovavsk ood eel ues BAe 106 Module ready XnF 200000 eee eee 327 Monitoring the host station other stations 311 418
21. below When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column O Can be used Cannot be used Address Availability Name Description Read write Master Local Reference Hexadecimal Decimal station station O Not available Parameter when a Page 328 0 to DFy 0 to 223 information Stores parameter settings Read only standby master Appendix 2 area station is 1 controlling the system Master station Stores the status of the data O input from slave stations 224 to Remote input P Page 331 E0 to 15Fy 354 RX Local station Read only Appendix 2 a Stores the status of the data 2 O input from the master station Master station Stores the status of the data Write only O output to slave stations Local station 352 to Remote output Stores the status of the data Page 31 1604 to 1DF 479 RY output to the master station Appendix 2 Stores the status of the data Read 2 O output to slave stations write Data received from other slave stations are also stored Remote register Master station PA Stores the send data to Write only O RWw e Master slave stations 480 to station For Local station Page 333 1E04 to 2DFy 735 data sending Stores the send data to the Appendix 2 Local station master station and other Read a 3 For data salve stati
22. function Station Master station duplex Standby Master function O O Station Data link start function using Master Station O O O a standby master station Duplex Function 3 Set the same mode as that of the master station in Mode 4 When Master Station Duplex Function has been selected in Type set the same settings as those of the master station in items other than Type and Mode Ex When Standby Master Station is selected in Type 1 0000 Start I O No Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Standby Master Station v Master Station Data Link Type ad Mode Remote Net Yer 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX 1000 Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input Rx Yer 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBO Special Register SW swo Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select w Scan Mode Setting X Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting CC Link Configuration Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas 142 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Precautions a The number of standby master stations One standby master station c
23. Cyclic transmission To the next page Cyclic transmission Standby master station Station number 1 The number of occupied stations 1 Standby status Cyclic transmission Standby master station Station number 1 0 1 Controlling 4 When the master station goes down and the standby master station starts to take in control of data link the station number of the standby master station becomes 0 135 uoun Jaysew Aqpueis z g Aygeiey weysks ey Bulroidw 7g Continued from the previous page l The master station in the normal state returns to the system operation The master station is on standby in case of the standby master station failure Master station 5 Station number 0 1 Standby master station The number of occupied stations 1 Intelligent device station Station number 0 Standby status Remote device station Station number 4 Controlling Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 2 rereeremeee So iD OO00000000 O OOOO COOCOOO0O ly LOL The number of occupied stations 1 Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission An error has occurred in the standby master station Data link is controlled by the master station Master s
24. RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH i RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH i 400EH RX 1EF to RX 1E0 i RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421EH RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421Ex to to Lo j to to to to 41FCH RXIFCF to RX1FCO 1 ot RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43FCH RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43FCH 41FDH RX1FDF to RX1FDO bt RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FDx RYIFDF to RY1FDO 43FDH 41FEn RX1FEF to RX1FEO rot RY1FEF to RY1FEO 43FEH RY1FEF to RY1FE0 43FEH to 4 i 43FFH i 43FFH sealy Aioway Jeyng Z xipueddy 341 11 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw and Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr These areas are used when the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected In the remote net Ver 2 mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw of all slave stations including a Ver 1 compatible slave station 5 Page 50 Section 3 6 4 3 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw in a Ver 2 compatible slave station lt gt Page 54 Section 3 6 5 3 a Storage location for each station The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 L gt Page 335 Appendix 2 4 Ex Remote device station Station No 1 the number of occupied
25. 107 sjieyep Bunjes ZE uonels 19 SEW 104 sBunjes sejoweleg Z 3 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Register the initial settings using a programming tool and reflect them to a remote device station using Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Initial Setting button 1 To Target Station No set the station number of the remote device station where the initial settings are configured Set the start station number instead if the number of occupied stations is two or more 2 Click the Regist Procedure button 3 Register the procedure for the initial settings in the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration window 4 Clickthe 4 button and close the setting window Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S Input Format ec x Execute Operational Condition Executional Condition Details of Execution Flag Execute Set New Same as Prev Set Set New ote Set New Set New ___ Target Station No No of Registered Procedures mm ma m m m Target Station No No of Registered Procedures N Set New 1 1 Regist Procedure Kel Set New 4 E Facar a 3 Regist Procedure edure Set New 4 Regist Procedur
26. BurwwesbosId JO SUCHNeDeld pOL Range of the Station No 2 station No 2 sending data RWr Range of the Station No 3 F station No 3 sending data RWw Range of the master station sending data to i i the station No 2 RWw Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 Station No 3 Point The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 Page 335 Appendix 2 4 231 10 2 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Remote Device Station This section describes an example of how to configure the initial settings for the remote device station and perform an analog input and digital output If an error occurs the error code of the remote device station is stored in the device of a CPU module 10 2 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system is used for explanation purpose Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode N QJ61BT11N QX10 QY10 X Y00 to X Y1F X20 to X2F Y30 to Y3F i 3 Module name Q20UDHCPU Start I O No pS eee ee Terminating resistor Terminating resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 1 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies Occupies 3 stations 3 stat
27. The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included QJ61BT11N EE ee Loo O QJ61BT11N Before Using the Product or Terminating resistor 1102 1 2W Brown Brown Brown x 2 for Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables or CC Link dedicated cables Ver 1 00 compatible Terminating resistor 130 1 2W Brown Orange Brown x 2 for CC Link dedicated high performance cables Ver 1 00 compatible 15 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 1 1 9 CC Link 16 CC Link is a system where distributed modules such as I O modules and intelligent function modules are connected using dedicated cables enabling a CPU module to control the modules Plant level information management CC Link IE Controller Network Among production lines Production control CC Link IE Field Network Within a line Equipment control CC Link Between a control panel and equipment 1 High speed communications On off information of I O signals and values can be smoothly exchanged at high speed This feature allows the configuration of a variety of systems 2 System with reduced wiring Because modules can be distributed in large equipment such as conveyor lines and machines a system with reduc
28. n2 O O O E D O n3 O O O gt 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written with Un 0 to FE three digits The station number of the intelligent device station 1 to 64 n1 re Random access buffer specification FFy 16 bit binary The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent device Between 0 and parameter n2 station specified by the master station or the offset value of the random 4 setting value access buffer Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which read data is stored w f Device specified device n3 Number of read points 0 to 4096 2 16 bit binary 4 The value that was set in the station information setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 2 No process is performed when 0 is set 197 ddly d 9 9 6 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIFR instruction Master station CPU module Master station Target station 3 0O00 eg O fmm o Command Device Automatic update buffer Communication starts when conditions are met Intelligent device station
29. 91 8 The test result is stored in Transmission speed test result SW0183 0 Normally completed Values other than 0 Error code Whether the transmission speed setting of the slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked using the following link special relay SB and link special registers SWs e Fora slave station excluding a standby master station Transmission speed test result for each station SW0184 to SW0187 e For a standby master station Transmission speed test result for standby master station SB0184 9 After checking the test result turn off Transmission speed test request SBOOOB 3 Timing chart of the link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs used in a transmission speed test Executed by the master local module a S gt Executed on the program Data link stop SB0002 OFA Transmission speed test request SB000B Transmission speed test accept status SB0185 Transmission speed test Transmission speed test completion status SBO186 OFF Transmission speed test result SW0183 Transmission speed test result for each station SW0184 to SW0187 Transmission speed test result for standby master station SB0184 Test result 92 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS For CC Link set parameters both for a master station and a slave station For a master station set the information abo
30. DFRO i tinstruction l instruction i wooo DFRO RWr00 i wo01 instruction RWr01 l W002 IA Rwro2 s 4 it I l i 1 l W003 I RWr03 i i i woo4 f i RWo4 N __ ze ARY E __s r o _ CPU ni a station ihe f Device 1 RA i Remote register i instruction i 4H Rwo0 a3 ee 28 a Neem RWro2 aS i i oO Rwr03 S l n lt Lo S J a j ca 53 8D D eA 153 8 3 Useful Applications of the Functions This section describes the useful functions of a master local module 8 3 1 Remote device station initialization procedure registration 154 function The initial setting of a remote device station which is performed on a program can be registered in advance using a programmable tool and can be saved by turning on the link special relay SB A program for the initial setting is not required For example in an AJ65BT 64AD settings such as A D conversion enable prohibit specification and Averaging process specification can be easily configured For a setting example using a programming tool refer to Page 232 Section 10 2 1 Number of initial settings registered a Number of remote device stations The initial settings of up to 16 remote device stations can be registered in one master local module Use a program to register the initial settings of stations after the 17th station b Number of initial settings registered per remote device station Up to 16 it
31. G RLPASET Un S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 D Command GP RLPASET eP RLPASET Un S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 D Applicable device r i Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device 2 i 2 File device function module Index Constant data System user s i Others register JO O device register ZO unco Bit Word Bit Word K H S1 O S2 O S3 O S4 O S5 O D O 1 Master station setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written aus Un a 0 to FE 16 bit binary with three digits oo Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device E PE 4 Within the range of the S2 2 Start number of the device in which slave station setting data is stored os f specified device n Start number of the device in which reserved station specification data Within the range of the 3 2 Device name is stored specified device 9 Start number of the device in which error invalid station specification Within the range of the S4 n data is stored specified device 8572 Start number of the device in which communication and automatic Within the range of the update buffer assignment data is stored specified device D Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of setting D 1 also turns on at an abnormal end Wit
32. Line test Whether a CC Link dedicated cable is properly connected and data link can be performed with slave stations can be checked Page 86 Section 6 5 1 Transmission speed test Whether the transmission speed setting of a slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked The station number of the slave station having a different transmission speed setting can be also checked therefore corrective actions upon a transmission error can be easily taken Page 90 Section 6 5 2 CC Link diagnostics The status of a CC Link system can be checked using a programming tool Unlike link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs the system status can be checked on a graphical window therefore corrective actions can be easily taken Page 311 Section 11 4 Hardware test The hardware in the master local module can be checked Page 324 Section 11 5 35 suoyoun4 Jo 3sI 5 Other functions Function Description Reference Remote device station initialization procedure registration function The initial setting of a remote device station that was performed on a program can be registered in advance using a programmable controller and can be saved by turning on the link special relay SB A program for the initial setting is not required Page 154 Section 8 3 1 Event issuance for the interrupt program A request for the interrupt to
33. Station wJ Station Station a Station z i No 1 gt vi No1 i Not i g w103 E 1E3H 483 i 1E3H 483 W103 i E ee ee ee Sl Pein a a a er Poe oe Mieco A E a aa EN a aa A e Gaa a i e a eee eed S 257 10 3 2 Settings for a master station 1 Settings for a master local module Set the station number and transmission speed of the master local module Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Station No 0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 2 Parameter settings by using a programming tool Connect a CPU module to a programming tool to set the parameters of the master local module _ gt Page 96 Section 7 3 1 Create a project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under Series Select Q20UDH under Type SX Project gt New 258 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting as follows Project window 2 gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Setting W Set 1 2 p Parameter Name _ lumber Start I O No Operation Setting 0000 ation Sel Occupied Station 1 z Type Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X p Data Link Faulty Station Setting Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode X Total Module Connected 1 0 T Hold Input Data Remote Input Rx 1000 f p Case of CPU STOP Setting
34. 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 0 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms 4 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried ew Bulsseooig yu eyeq y xIpueddy SUONONJJSU PS eoIpap zo aul Hulssedo0ig Ep xIpueddy 385 386 e G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 1671 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO02CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time gt Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 A 2 SL Target station sequence scan time Apply 0 when data is written to buffer memory in CC Link WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is the QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 16 1 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 O 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occ
35. 10 3 4 Checking the status of data link Power on the local station then master station to start data link When the LEDs are in the following states data link is being performed normally 1 LEDs on the master station QJ61BT11N RUN Ml HL RUN MST i S MST E ON SD Mf RD M Flashing 1 ERR L ERR OFF A The LEDs may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status 2 LEDs on the local station QJ61BT11N RUN W EL RUN MST S MST E ON SD E HRD I Flashing 1 ERR OLERR ape A The LEDs may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status 262 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 3 5 Program example This section provides a program example 1 Devices to be used The following table lists the devices to be used in the program example a Devices in the master station Device Description Module X0 Module error X1 Host data link status QJ61BT11N master station XF Module ready SW0080 0 Other station data link status station number 1 X20 Data send to the local station flag QX10 Y31 Output from RY1 in the local station QY10 Y3F Data link error flag station number 1 M100 Communication condition established flag X1000 to X101D Remote input RX0 to RX1D Y1000 to Y101D Remote output RYO to RY1D QJ61BT11N local station WO to W3 Remote register RWr0 to RWr3
36. Abnormal end i 1 E E E q a Status display device OFF Normal completion at completion o 1 scan d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIWT instruction is eight e Assignment of the send buffer The assignment of the send buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module ene When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempting to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 185 LMIe d 9 6 9 3 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to write 10 word data from the area starting from DO in the master station to the area starting from D1000 in the
37. Parameter receive status SB0077 Displays whether parameters have been received from the master station Host station switch change detection SB0078 Displays detected setting changes in the setting switches on the host station during data link Master station return specification information SB0079 Displays which of Master Station or Master Station Duplex Function has been set in Type in the network parameter window Host master standby master operation status SB007B Displays whether the host station is operating as a master station or a standby master station Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting status in case of programmable controller CPU STOP SB007C Displays the status of the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP configured by the parameter Dedicated instruction where an error has occurred Station number where an error has occurred Displays a dedicated instruction where an error has occurred Displays a station number where transient transmission is to be performed When the error is not a transient transmission error No Information is displayed Point Before opening the Error History window check the versions of the master local module and programming tool lt Page 399 Appendix 6 2 f errors frequently occur in the master local module HST LOSS may be displayed instead of
38. W Device batch monitor 1 Device Y1000 Monitor format Bit amp Word Display 16bit integer Value DEC T C set value Reference program o jit it Ki 32bit integer HEX MAIN C Word C Real number single precision C e C Bit Real number double precision s uiy s Jajawesed Z xipueddy Js doj n q X9 usn u yM z X pu ddy ASCII character _Stop monitor Device F EDC BA98 7654 43210 zi E 0000 0000 0000 0001 7 Option setup Y1010 o0o0o0 0000 0000 0000 o Y1020 0000 0000 0000 0000 o 1030 0000 0000 0000 0000 o Device test Y1040 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 oj Y1050 0000 0000 0000 0000 o Y1060 oo0o0 0000 0000 0000 o Close Y1070 oo0o0 0000 0000 0000 o 401 Appendix 7 3 CC Link diagnostics The CC Link diagnostics is operated in a different way from GX Works2 This appendix describes how to operate the CC Link diagnostics on GX Developer 1 Host station monitoring How to monitor the status of a host station is described below 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window Diagnostics lt gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master local module to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Start Monitoring button 4 Follow the subsequent instructions for monitoring CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics r Line Monitor Host station gt r Module Setting Host Station f Max 2
39. Yes Is the LED on the power supply module on Yes y Supply power to the power supply module Is the CPU module being reset The hardware of the power Yes Are the modules Yes supply module is faulty properly mounted Replace the hardware Y Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting common to modules L Page 270 Section 11 1 1 2 The overcurrent protection circuit has been activated Cancel the reset operation Check the current consumption of the mounted modules x Remove the modules and mount them again sq buisn Bupooys jqnoIL Lb LL syeyomo Buyjooysejqnos LLL 269 2 Troubleshooting common to modules Perform the hardware test C Page 324 Section 11 5 Was the hardware No test performed No Is the hardware test completed normally y Replace the target module If a master local module related error was not detected troubleshoot the CPU module with reference to the following Manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection 270 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 2 Troubleshooting using a programming tool 1 Troubleshooting by the CC Link diagnostics Connect a programming tool to the master station and execute the CC Link diagnostics Troubleshoot the problem with reference
40. 76 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 2 2 Wiring procedure Connect a CC Link dedicated cable to the terminal block of the master local module 1 Wiring procedure a Wiring diagram TT Terminating DA i 1 resistor DB White White I l TT it i 1 DB White 1 1 1 T ae 1 1 Terminating resistor DG Yellow 1 Yellow DG Yelow i SLD CC Link dedicated cable L CC Link dedicated cabl FG b Actual wiring diagram Terminating resistor Point Connect the terminating resistors between the DA and DB terminals Connect the shielded cables of a CC Link dedicated cable to the SLD terminal through the FG terminal Then ground the cables at both ends with a ground resistance of 100Q or less The SLD and FG terminals are connected inside No restrictions apply to the connection order of a master local module The cables need not be connected in the order of station number The star topology cannot be used Note however that the T branch connection can be used lt _ gt Page 79 Section 6 2 3 Tf ainpsooid Bui 7 29 Bul 79 78 2 Terminal block of the master local module a Solderless terminal Use a solderless terminal and wire specified in the following table Tighten a solderless terminal within the specified torque range Use
41. APPENDICES When a master local module is mounted on an extension base unit Constant KM3 x 10 File registers File registers KM2 x 10 R ZR ona R ZR ona KM4 CPU type memory card memory card are used are not used QO00JCPU 1 62 QOOCPU 1 57 Q01CPU 1 55 Q02CPU 1 02 0 08 0 5 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 98 0 06 0 2 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 98 0 06 0 2 QOOUJCPU QO0OUCPU Q01UCPU 1 02 0 2 Q02UCPU 1 02 0 05 0 2 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 90 0 03 0 14 Ex A calculation example under the following conditions is described Item Condition CPU module QO6HCPU Master local module The module is mounted on a main base unit and used as a master station Data RX 2048 points RY 2048 points RWw 256 points RWr 256 points SB 512 points SW 512 points are refreshed to areas other than a file register Number of refresh points Block guarantee of cyclic gt gt data per station function Denese 3 3 32 KX AA KM1 KM2x RRS sRWww RWr SW x wE Number of CC Link modules 1 xKM4 zg 3 0 Cal nat 2048 2048 512 5 0 22 0 00043x T 256 256 512 0 1 1 x 0 2 o 530 0 78416 7 0 79 ms 3 3 oO 391 b Remote net additional mode Formula aT KM1 KM2 x WE KM3 x aT RX RX2 RY RY2 RWw
42. CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES This chapter describes the part names of the master local modules 3 4 5 No Name Application RUN LED Indicates the operating status ON Operating normally OFF A hardware failure or a watchdog timer error has occurred L RUN LED Indicates the data link status ON Performing data link OFF Not performing data link MST LED Indicates whether the module is operating as a master station ON Operating as a master station OFF Operating as a local station or a standby master station in standby status 1 S MST LED Indicates whether the module is operating as a standby master station ON Operating as a standby master station in standby status OFF Operating as a master station or a local station The LED also turns off when a standby master station switches to a master station SD LED Indicates whether the module is sending data ON Sending data OFF Not sending data RD LED Indicates whether the module is receiving data ON Receiving data OFF Not receiving data 21 No Name Application Indicates the error status of the master local module The details of errors can be checked by using the following ERR LED i CC Link diagnostics _ 3 Page 311 Section 11 4 Detailed LED display status SW0058 gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Any of the follo
43. Master station Remote station Module power supply Stabilized 24VDC power supply CPU Master module station Power supply module Remote station Power supply module Module power supply a power supply 24VDC Remark ooo co ooo c econo When supplying power to multiple remote stations from one power supply select applicable cables and properly wire them to prevent a voltage drop caused by the power supply When a remote station has a receiving end voltage within the specified range for the remote station used it can be connected Stabilized power supply Remote station Remote station uoneinByuoy waysXs ay 10 suoNNedaldg E G eeeeoeveeeceaeneesceoevneseeeeeeseeseeneseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeseeeeeeneeeene se 73 74 2 Access to a station with the station number 64 a Access from other stations using a programming tool and GOT Access to a local station with the station number 64 cannot be performed from other stations Changing the station number to the one other than 64 allows access from other stations b Access to other stations using a CC Link system master local interface board Access to a local station and intelligent device station with the station number 64 cannot be performed from other stations Changing the station number to the one other than 64 allows access from other stations 3 When using a master local
44. Operation Setting 1 Parameter Name Occupied Station 1 ba Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Single zi Case of CPU STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station sey I Enable Setting Check the checkbox Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device Please select Read Model Name of Slave Station in Auto Detection of the connected device The start of data link may be slow after selecting the item Read Model Name of Slave Station uonels e007 pue uonels Jelsey e UBamieg suoeorunwwog Jo ajdwexg gO uone s anes yore u eyep 1 0AD jo AysHayu ay ainsse 0 ajdwexe weibold O S OL 265 2 Using a program Set an interlock in the remote I O RX RY Master station MO Y1000 X10090 AF HF BMOV DO w100 K4 SET Y1000 X1000 RST Y1000 Local station Station No 1 MO x1000 m TO BMOV WO D100 K4 SET Y1000 X10900 O AF RST Y1000 Send CPU Master Local CPU reques module station station module Send data W yE o j jei Kna E e E wanes 000 RWwO RWw0d Rn w1000 5 mg gmn ha z S L set Y1000 ia as S Lye ya S wo RWr0 K amp pwo e a Receive data W lt du Cyclic transmission a Auto refresh Turn on Send request MO in the master station Turn on Receive request MO in the local station Information in DO to D3 is transferred to W100 to W103 RWwo0 to RWw3 6 After t
45. Swo11C 71Cy Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 13 SW011D 71Dy Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 14 SWO011E 71Ey Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 15 The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is stored Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is stored Lower bit Target station number 362 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Remote device station initialization The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is sworie Procedure stored l l l l 71Fy registration Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is O x x execution stored individual Lower bit Target station number information target 16 A slave station that supports the CC Link Ver 2 mode is stored SW0140 0 Ver 1 compatible slave station 740p 1 Ver 2 compatible slave station SWw0141 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO 7414 Compatible CC SAI Link ver SWOI O x x SW0142 information SW0142 7421 Swo0143 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW0
46. When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer refer to Page 401 Appendix 7 eeeeeveeeseeeeveeeeeveeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 Memo CONTENTS SAFE INGPREGAWMIONS TIE ere T ee rw ene eter a ere pr ie nr ney Weer ecm ey 1 CONDIMONSORUSEIEO Ratt Ede D0 Cy Tira reese tee ee eee 5 INGER DU GATLON 2 cece cere meee ene Sees E RO Sot Oreste ome 6 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 2 0 0 0 cece eee ee eee 6 MANWAL PAGEIOR
47. _ gt Page 54 Section 3 6 5 3 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 Page 335 Appendix 2 4 The other contents are same as those for Remote Input RX described the above Same as Remote Input RX Same as Remote Output RY Same as Remote Register RWr Same as Remote Register RWw 99 sjieyep Bunjes ZE uonels sajseyy e 104 suas JoyowWeIeY Ey Item Description Setting range Special Relay SB Special Register SW Set the start device where SB and SW are transferred SB and SW can be automatically transferred to a device ina CPU module without using a program Blank or the following range e Device M L B D W R SB or ZR M B D W and SB for a MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote O station e Default Blank Blank or the following range e Device M L B D W R SW or ZR M B D W and SW for a MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Retry Count Set the number of retries when a communication failure occurs 1 to 7 Default 3 Automatic Reconnect
48. d Error invalid station specification data f Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Specify error invalid stations 2 0 Not specified 1 Specified 4 0 Specification of b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO to 1 to 64 User S4 3 stations 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Default value is 0 Not specified for all stations 208 4 2 Configure settings for station numbers up to the largest one set for the slave station setting data Set only the start station number of the module for a slave station that occupies two or more stations If both an error invalid station and a reserved station are specified for the same station the reserved station is preferentially specified CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations 85 0 Send buffer si Communication buffers 2 end buffer size S5 1 Receive buffer size Automatic update S5 2 buffer size Settings for the Oy no setting first station 404 to 10004 DE 0 word no setting oe eae 64 to 4096 words to of 1 to 26 User S5 77 stations Automatic update buffer Oy no setting 80 to 10004 Settings for the 0 word no setting 26th
49. i O x gess the device range for the device range of the target station acce connected target station A data link error has occurred in Data link error in all i all stations during access from Start the data link then issue the BC75 stations remote f O x the peripherals to the remote request device station access f device station Time check over has occurred Increase the time check time in Time check over oes during access from the the application of the request BC76 remote device station A O x ss peripherals to the remote device source or check operations of the acce station target slave station Please consult your local BC81 System error eA O O Mitsubishi representative Message transmission The message transmission result Correct the station number of the BC90 result read target read request was received from target station at the request o o module station number the station with an unacceptable source and execute the function error target station number again Set a longer Monitoring time Message transmission Timeout occurred in receiving setting SW0009 and execute the BC91 response receive message transmission response function again If the same error O x timeout error data occurs again check the target station and cables Please consult your local BD83 to BD84 System error net A O O Mitsubishi representative Hardware error A hardware error has been Please
50. i j Execute Data link stop SB0002 B311 Data link stop error executed to the station where i i f O O to the station performing data link data link had been stopped Forced master switching Start the data link of the standby SBOO0C was executed in a Standby master station master station then execute B312 system where no standby master ee O x absence error A Forced master switching station existed or the standby SBOOOC master station was down Forced master switching Start the data link of the standby SB000C was executed in a master station then execute B313 Error in all stations oe O x system where all stations were Forced master switching faulty SBOOOC Forced master switching TETI SB000C was executed to a Execute Forced master switching B314 Switching target error f x O station other than the master SB000C to the master station station While the master station was being switched to the standby Forced master station Correct the Forced master B315 MeS master station Forced master nae O x switching error ee switching SBOOOC setting switching SB000C was executed again Please consult your local B316 System error aa O x Mitsubishi representative The G P RLPASET instruction was executed to a module where Clear network parameter settings parameters had been set using a for the target module using a programming tool Network startup setting i programming tool then set the
51. 0 point RWr and RWw RWr RWw of remote I O stations 4 points per station 4 points per station move over forward Zero points setting for a reserved Not available Available Not available station Remote I O station points setting Not available Available Not available 4 RWr and RWw are not used for the remote I O net mode CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 How to set the mode Set the mode using the network parameter Page 97 Section 7 3 2 Page 115 Section 7 4 2 Page 213 Section 9 8 1 S PON Z YE s poy pue juewuBbissy 9 E 45 3 6 3 46 Remote net Ver 1 mode This mode is selected when a new CC Link system is configured When the system includes a Ver 2 compatible slave station select the remote net Ver 2 mode gt Page 48 Section 3 6 4 Master station Remote device station Intelligent device station Remote 1 O station Local station Remote net Ver 1 mode Ver 1 compatible Ver 1 compatible Remote net Ver 1 mode Station No 0 Ver 1 compatible area Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 RY Range of the master station sending data to the station No 1 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 2 Range of the master station sending data to i the station No 3 RWr Station No 1 Station Station No 3 RWw Range of the master station sending data to the station No 1 S
52. 3 The expanded cyclic settings do not match A 4 The CC Link compatible versions do not match 4 When the number of connected modules is smaller than or equal to the number of modules set using the parameter a mismatch error will not occur When a remote device station is actually connected and an intelligent device station has swoo09c been set using the parameter for example a 69C mismatch error will not occur 0 Normal SW009D 4 Hkh a m xample of a mismatch error 69D Loading param F eter consistency TER 5 O x x SWO009E status nstallation arameter 69E Remote device station Remote I O station Remote I O station Intelligent device station SWOO09F Remote device station 69Fy b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO 5 to 4 3 2 1 ree 0 Oo 1 to 20 19 18 17 2 2 x x N 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers x D O e Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations 3 2 later than that are excepted 3 a Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on This G amp item is checked and the result is stored only upon data link start and 5 n the update of a parameter S D SW00B4 The result of the line test 1 is stored S 6B4y 0 Normal T 1 Error x p SW00B5 6B5 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi b S H Line test 1 SW00B4 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 D result SWOOB5 32 31 30 29 t 20 19 18 17 i O a SWOOB6 2 a 6B6p SW00B6 48 47 46 45
53. Buffer memory Automatic update buffer memory 1 The automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the master station specified by Un is accessed 2 The data read after the device specified by D is stored b Timing of reading data The G P RIFR instruction reads data while it is being executed But the concurrent execution of the instruction from two or more locations is not allowed for the same intelligent device station c The number of allowable read points The maximum number of points that can be read by the G P RIFR instruction is 4096 d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIFR instruction is nine e Assignment of the automatic update buffer The assignment of the automatic update buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 198 3 Operation error CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs 5142 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be
54. Check the station number setting Correct the setting set for the faulty station oe Is the transmission speed Set the value same as Transmission A2 2 Bug value correctly set for the Check the transmission speed that set for other s p faulty station stations Online status Is the CC Link interface of the A2 3 o f f Check the faulty station Set it online slave station faulty station online e Are the network parameters Check the network parameters of for CC Link such as the the CPU module on the master A station number of stations and station using the programming Correct the network cannot perform station information tool parameter data link correctly set Format the CPU Check SW0068 SW0069 Does the master station module memory then SW0070 SW0071 SW0072 F Parameter have no error write the network A2 4 SW0074 to SW0077 SW0098 to setting e Are the network parameters parameters for a network other than CC Link correctly set SW009B SWOOSC to SW009F and SW0144 to SW0147 Are the settings correct Automatic CC Link startup Check if values are not set in the intelligent function module switch setting Disable the intelligent function module switch setting of the programming tool 278 To the next page CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Are there no disconnection Check
55. I f 1 W10F i i 1EFH 495 RWw3 1 ia peal 1 ae l I ae I W110 Station Station S88 station W113 No 4 r No 4 1F3 wd No 4 f Le ht __ 1F3H 499 it fe __ RWw7 W114 A 1F4H 500 1 RWw8 1 nl E Eoi 1 i lt 3 i l 1 W117 1F7H 503 RWwB CPU module Remote station Remote register Device Module name a Data name RWw W100 RWw0 A D conversion enable prohibit specification W101 RWw1 CH 1 to 4 input range setting W102 RWw2 CH 5 to 8 input range setting W103 RWw3 Average processing specification 3 W104 RWw4 CH 1 average time number of times setting Re Re W105 RWw5 CH 2 average time number of times setting ie m AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN L o W106 RWw6 CH 3 average time number of times setting ow 3 oo W107 RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting 3 a Qs W108 RWw8 CH 5 average time number of times setting 3 Q W109 RWw9 CH 6 average time number of times setting ie 3 o W10A RWwA CH 7 average time number of times setting 5 39 W10B RWwB CH 8 average time number of times setting W10C RWw0 CH 1 digital value setting a ies Ww10D RWw1 CH 2 digital value setting 2 W10E RWw2 CH 3 digital value setting g pe W10F RWw3 CH 4 digital value setting v W110 RWw4 CH 5 digital value setting D W111 RWw5 CH 6 digital value setting 2 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN op W112 RWw6 CH 7 digital value setting v W113 RWw7 CH 8 digital value setting S D W114 RWw8 Analog output enable disable setting a W115
56. L oi F W17 2F7H 759 RWrB CPU module Remote station Remote register Device Module name Ran Data name wo RWr0 CH 1 digital output value w1 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value W2 RWr2 CH 3 digital output value W3 RWr3 CH 4 digital output value w4 RWr4 CH 5 digital output value oo NN w5 RWr5 CH 6 digital output value m AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN o x W6 RWr6 CH 7 digital output value Ms 5 W7 RWr7 CH 8 digital output value 3 z e ws RWr8 Error code 8m 28 w9 RWr9 a3 53 to to Reserved v z o 2 WB RWrB 5S WC RWr0 CH 1 check code S WD RWr1 CH 2 check code y WE RWr2 CH 3 check code a 0 WF RWr3 CH 4 check code 5 w10 RWr4 CH 5 check code n W11 RWr5 CH 6 check code AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN w12 RWr6 CH 7 check code 2 W13 RW r7 CH 8 check code 3 W14 RWr8 Error code 2 B W15 RWr9 o po to to Reserved s O w17 RWrB z iw oO lt O 0 o 5 239 d Remote register RWw Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 408 Appendix 8 1 2 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote register Device Station number Module name g Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw w100 1E0 480 RWw0 W101 1E1y 481 RWw1 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W102 1E24 482 RWw2 w103 1E3y 483 RWw3 W104 1E44 484 RWw4 W105 1E5y 485 RWw5 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W106 1E6y 486 RWw6 W107 1E7y 487 RWw7
57. N Q MST EED a roiu feito ete od aes 21 Multiple CPU system 005 70 Network parameter setting sheet 409 No of Registered Procedures 108 Non periodic communications transient transmission Parana ne re ae NC EROS ee OPER E ee 17 Number of connectable modules 70 Number of initial settings registered 154 Number of Modules 00000005 97 Number of occupied I O points 25 Number of Occupied stations 101 Number of occupied stations local station 24 Occupied Count 000000 eae 107 Operation example 00005 59 Operation of the standby master function 135 Operation Setting 04 97 101 Operational Condition 0005 109 Other station data link status Xn3 326 Packing list 00000 00a 15 Parameter information area 328 Parameter Name 000000000 101 Parameter setting list 94 Parameter setting method 93 Parameter settings 0000000000 93 Parameter settings by using a programming tool 93 Parameter settings by using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET instruction 93 Parameter settings for a local station 114 Parameter settings fora master station 96 Parameter settings for a standby master station 114 Partmames nite oA eed b
58. Process upon normal completion i completion of dedicated instruction y Perform process for abnormal Process upon abnormal end of 1 end dedicated instruction Set G P RIRD instruction FF TF FO SOT i RSI Mie J executing flag to OFF END 180 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 3 G P RIWT The G P RIWT instruction writes the specified points of data to the buffer memory areas of the target station or the device in the CPU module of the target station Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIWT GRiwT un S81 2 Command GP RIWT i c Jorm n 8 82 Applicable device Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device j s File device function module Index Constant data System user i Others register JO O device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H S1 O S2 O Z D O 1 Setting data ee o Device Description Setting range Data type w Q Un Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written 0 to FE 16 bit binary T with three digits D TES Within the range of the z S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored pa specified device Device name Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which data to be written is stored S A specified device D D
59. Switch2 Blank Set the mode for a master local module Mode setting Remote net Ver 1 mode 00004 Sula e Remote net Ver 2 mode 0200 e Remote net additional mode 01004 Set the Case of CPU STOP Setting and Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device for a master local module When Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device is 0 and Case of CPU STOP Setting is 0 01004 When Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device is 0 and Case of CPU STOP Setting is 1 03004 When Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device is 1 and Case of CPU STOP Setting is 0 2100 When Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device is 1 and Case of CPU STOP Setting is 1 2300 switchs b15b14b13b12 b10 b9 b8 b7 bO ojo Joltofo J1 olto o EE of CPU STOP Setting 0 Refresh 1 Clear compulsorily gt Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device 0 Not read the model name of the slave stations 1 Read the model name of the slave stations Switch5 Blank 4 It can be set for the master local module with a serial number first five digits of 09112 or later 2 It can be set for the master local module with a serial number first five digits of 17012 or later 214 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Point Set the switch 3 and switch 4 within the range listed in the above table If a value outside the range is set or no value is set the G P RLPASET instructi
60. Yer 2 Remote Input Rx Ver 2 Remote Output R Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Special Register SwW Pinker Couimk Number of Modules Blank No Setting IV Set b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the w w buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a z i different refresh device for each station or for other purposes g D Q e Ver 1 compatible area 2 5 gt 3 2 v Address va Item Reference ae Hexadecimal Decimal so E0 to 15Fy 224 to 351 Remote input RX D G Page 331 Appendix 2 2 3 160 to 1DFy 352 to 479 Remote output RY a 1E0 to 2DFy 480 to 735 Remote register RWw Page 333 Appendix 2 3 2E0 to 3DFy 736 to 991 Remote register RWr e Ver 2 compatible area Address Hexadecimal Item Reference Decimal 4000p to 41FFy 16384 to 16895 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX 4200y to 43FF4 16896 to 17407 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY Page 341 Appendix 2 10 4400 to 4BFFy 17408 to 19455 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw 4C00 to 53FFy 19456 to 21503 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr Page 342 Appendix 2 11 53 54 3 Storage locations of RX
61. to 36 35 34 33 D SW00B7 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 SW00B7 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 2 6B7 The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations The result of the line test 1 or line test 2 is stored SWOOB8 6B8 Line test result 0 Normal x x oO H Values other than 0 Error code _ Page 293 Section 11 3 2 359 Number Name Description Availability O Yes x No Online Master station Local station Offline SW0110 7101 SW0111 7114 SW0112 712 Swo0113 713p SW0114 714p 360 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 1 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 2 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 3 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 4 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 5 The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is stored Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is stored Lower bit Target station number APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description
62. 1 e Disable setting not checked e Enable setting checked Default Disable setting not checked 101 sjieyap Bunjes ZE uolels 19 SEW e 104 sBunjes sejoweleg 2 2 Station Information Setting a When the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is checked There are two ways to set the parameters Set the parameters by automatically detecting the system configuration and e Select modules in Module List and drag and drop them to List of stations Remark ecco ecco For how to operate the CC Link configuration window refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common COCCOOEEEEOEEEHOCOEEEEEET EEO OE OHH EEE EEE EEOC E HELE ECO OO EEEEOEOECE Set the parameters by automatically detecting of the system configuration The time of setting parameters can be reduced by automatically reading information of slave stations connected to the master local module The following lists how to set parameters by automatically detecting the system configuration 1 Check if the station number of slave stations is correctly set 2 Turn on the slave stations first and turn on a master station 3 Open the CC Link configuration window Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt CC Link Configuration Setting button 4 Information of the system configuration obtained from the master local module is reflected to the CC Li
63. B317 The parameter setting was O x mode error i network parameters using the changed without powering off G P RLPASET instruction and on the programmable controller system or resetting the gt Page 213 Section 9 8 1 CPU module The master station duplication TE error canceling instruction was Do not execute the instruction B31A Data link in progress j O x executed while data link had during data link already been started S a Turn on Data link stop SBO002 Transmission speed The transmission speed test was ae B31B then Transmission speed test O x test execution error executed during data link request SB000B 296 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code ore f Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal A station station Please consult your local B31C and B31D System error een O O Mitsubishi representative Status logging start Logging was started while logs B31E Delete the logs then start logging O O error were being deleted B31F Status logging clear Logs were deleted during Stop the logging then delete the o error logging logs O Logging was executed or logs Set the remote net mode then Status logging mode B320 invalid were deleted in the remote I O start the logging or delete the O O invali net mode logs Please consult your local B321 System erro
64. ERDS1TJ111 Manufactured by Panasonic Corporation 19 2 Communication specifications for a T branch connection The following table lists the communication specifications upon T branch connection For those not listed below refer to the performance specifications 3 Page 24 Section 3 2 Item Specifications Remark Transmission speed 625kbps 156kbps 10M 5M and 2 5Mbps cannot be used A cable length between terminating resistors Maximum length of the main line 100m 500m The length branch line length of a T branch cable is i not included Maximum length of the branch line 8m A total cable length for each branch i Overall branch line length 50m 200m A total length of all branch cables Maximum number of connected modules on the branch line 6 modules per branch The total number of connected modules depends on the CC Link specifications Connection cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable e CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables manufactured by different companies can be used together CC Link dedicated cables Ver 1 00 compatible manufactured by different companies cannot be used together e CC Link dedicated high performance cables Ver 1 00 compatible cannot be used T branch terminal block connector e Terminal block A commercially available terminal block Connector An FA connect
65. KM3x R2CRESE RWw RWr SW ms aT Link refresh time RX Total number of remote input RX points refreshed in the master station local station RY Total number of remote output RY points refreshed in the master station local station RWw Total number of remote register RWw points refreshed in the master station local station RWr Total number of remote register RWr points refreshed in the master station local station SB Total number of link special relay SB points refreshed in the master station local station SW Total number of link special register SW points refreshed in the master station local station aE Time that file register R ZR data on a memory card is transferred only when used n Point Add aE only when refreshing the data to the memory card file register Addition is not required when refreshing the data to the standard RAM and extended SRAM cassette file registers KM1 Constant Yysejel UI pp xXipueddy awl Bulsseooig U1 eyeq y xIpueddy Master station The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station QO0JCPU 0 83 QOOCPU 0 68 Q01CPU 0 66 Q02CPU 0 58 0 51 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 24 0 22 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 22 QOOUJCPU QO0OUCPU
66. O station Stati beri Error invalid station Reserved station tauon n mber occupies 1 station occupies 1 station Local station occupies 1 station Lasvdty d 9 8 6 1 Create a project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under Series Select Q20UDH under Type WO Project gt New Series a dwexe Hum s Ja awesed ajdwexe wesbold 1 96 Type Project Type Language 213 2 Open the I O Assignment tab of PLC Parameter and configure the settings as follows XW Project window lt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter 2 gt I O Assignment tab Q Parameter Setting PLC Name PLC System PLCFile PLCRAS Boot File Program SFC Device 1 0 Assignment Multiple CPU Setting Serial Communication IO Assignment 1 Switch Setting Intelligent w QI61BT11N i Intelligent v QJ61BT11N Detailed Setting Intelligent Intelligent B2Points Intelligent 22Points Intelligent 32Points QU61BTLIN s 3 Open the Switch Setting for I O and Intelligent Function Module window by clicking the Switch Setting button and configure the settings as follows O Click the _Switch Setting button Switch Setting for 1 0 and Intelligent Function Module Input Format HEX S shea intei Josen ees iteig Jo ieTN rleo intligent____ oa16T11N C a eea peie femin oo f 0 Switch Description Switch1 Blank
67. Page 256 Section 10 3 1 2 W100 to W103 Remote register RWw0 to RWw3 b Devices in the local station oS w w Device Description Module a m Ux X0 Module error 3 5 ao x1 Host data link status QJ61BT11N local station 5 i XF Module ready g 9 X21 Data send to the master station flag QX10 EJE Y30 Output from RYO in the master station QY10 5 M100 Communication condition established flag X1000 to X101D Remote input RX0O to RX1D sia Y1000 to Y101D Remote output RYO to RY1D QJ61BT11N master station 2 oO WO to W3 Remote register RWr0 to RWr3 3 Page 256 Section 10 3 1 2 S W100 to W103 Remote register RWw0 to RWw3 z n oF p a a e QO u 7 a 263 2 Program example 1 Create the following program on a programming tool e Program for the master station Confirmation of the data link status xO XOF x1 SW80 0 y 1 H 1 AF Mc NO M100 SW380 0 Y3F NO__ M100 Control program X1001 Y31 X20 1000 MCR NO END Program for the local station Confirmation of the data link status xo XOF x1 0 4 1 H 1 Mc NO M100 NO__ M100 Control program X1000 5 1 H Y30 X21 iON 9 rR NO END 264 Data link is normal Data link error Control program using data received from a local station Program of creating data se
68. QO00JCPU 0 91 gt gt 55 QO0CPU 0 83 2 E Q01CPU 0 79 x xX AA Q02CPU 0 48 0 32 0 5 gt g co O2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO2PHCPU 5S i a Q 19 zQ 0 43 0 14 0 2 A QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU a gt Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 43 0 14 0 2 H F a Q9 QOOUJCPU QO0OUCPU Q01UCPU 0 33 0 2 3 2 Oo 2 QO02UCPU 0 33 0 05 0 2 a o Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 36 0 04 0 14 5 D 393 When a master local module is mounted on an extension base unit Constant KM3 x10 File registers File registers KM2 x10 R ZR ona R ZR ona KM4 CPU type memory card memory card are used are not used QOO0JCPU 1 62 Q00CPU 1 57 Q01CPU 1 55 Q02CPU 1 02 0 08 0 5 Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 98 0 06 S 0 2 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 98 0 06 0 2 QOOUJCPU QO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 95 0 2 QO02UCPU 0 95 0 05 0 2 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 90 0 04 0 14 Ex A calculation example under the following conditions is described Item Condition CPU module QO6HCPU Master local module The module is mounted on a main base unit and used as a master station Data RX 1024 points RX2 896 points RY 1024 points RY2 896 points RWw 128 Number of refresh points points RWw2 128 points RWr 128 points RWr2 128 p
69. RLPASET Varies depending on a CPU module lt gt Page 69 Section 5 2 1 Default Blank The section of the current page is shown The station information is not set in the CC g 2 ja 3 ES ES F 3 a g q 3 5 g g Set the station Select it when graphically configuring Station information Link configuration window not checked information inthe CC Setting by referring to the network map display area for Gx The Station information is set in the CC Link Link configuration configuration window checked Works2 only gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 a Default The station information is not set in the CC Link configuration window not checked window lt shows reference pages Point To change the settings for a master station or a slave station stop data link at the master statio page 317 Section 11 4 5 Point Pshows notes that require attention When change the settings for a slave station change the settings for the master station accordingly shows setting or _ _ _ stations operating examples to operate the CC Link configuration window refer to the following Remari shows useful LA shows reference inet n information manuals 4 The mouse operation example is provided below Menu bar XZ Online 2 gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC
70. RX Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 407 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Device Station number Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal X1000 to X100F EO 224 to 1 AJ65BTB2 16T X1010 to X101F Ely 225 to X1020 to X102F E24 226 RX0 to RXF 2 AJ65BTB1 16DT X103 to X103F E34 227 to 4 In the AJ65BTB1 16DT the first eight points are used for input and the last eight points are used for output RXO to RX7 are used for input in the AJ65BTB1 16DT In a CPU module X1020 to X1027 are actually used AJ65BTB2 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT output module combined module Remote I O station Remote I O station CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 Buffer memory 1 i 1 1 i Device Remote input RX 4 x1000 eae E0H 224 Po 1 1 I 1 1 o T E 17 Station y ly Station H 1 l 1 eee OT ae a Los 1 oo 1 1 l i riya f Na Remote input RX j ee 1 1 i i i i j 1 r 1 X1020 a i Station RXO X1027 K RX7 X1028 No 2 Device actually used by the remote I O station j 1 I j I j I 1 I i l X101F 1 I i 1 I 1 i i I I il i 1 60 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION e Remote output RY Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Pag
71. SW ERR 1 Switch setting error M S ERR 1 A master station has already existed in the same line PRM ERR 1 Parameter data error TIME ERR 1 The data link monitoring timer has timed out LINE ERR 1 A cable is disconnected or the transmission path has been affected by noise 156K 1 The transmission speed is 156kbps 625K 1 The transmission speed is 625kbps 2 5M 1 The transmission speed is 2 5Mbps 5M 1 The transmission speed is 5Mbps 10M 1 The transmission speed is 10Mbps TEST 1 The offline test is being executed SO Not used S1 Not used S2 Not used 3 H W SW Information The following table lists information displayed under H W SW Information UONeWOJU 3JeMpJIEH ZY LL R Q O lmi pe J Item Description 2 J STNo x 10 The value set using the station number setting switch x 10 a STNo x 1 The value set using the station number setting switch x 1 MODE The value set using the transmission speed mode setting switch 3 STNo The station number of the module Q S STN The standby master station number set in the parameter 0 no standby master station o specified x N B RATE Transmission speed setting MODE Mode setting status CONFIG Module operating status SW0062 323 11 5 Hardware Test A master local module is individually tested to check whether it normally operates 1 Performing the hardware test
72. SWO008C to SWOO8F SB0090 5E9 b0 Host line status Whether the line to the host station is normally operating is stored OFF Normal ON Error disconnected 349 sqs sAejai jeloads yu Le xipueddy SMS suajsiBey jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a transient transmission error has occurred in other stations is stored OFF No error ON Error SW0094 to SW0097 SB0094 Other stations Even when the transient transmission is retried using a transient transmission dedicated instruction the error will be detected O O x 5E9p b4 status Depending on the link refresh timing SB0094 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other stations transient transmission status SW0094 to SW0097 Whether the master station is normally performing Master station eee SB0095 ENN or transient transmission is stored ransient transmissi 5E94 b5 OFF Normal Q status ON Error The result of the line test 1 or line test 2 is stored SB00B4 Standby master orr Nonii z Nor 5EBu b4 station test result 2 a ON Error The use prohibited status of the remote register is stored OFF Usable ON Use prohibited The status information is stored in SW0160 to SW0163 SB0160 Remote register use o x x 5F6p
73. Status of a remote device station intelligent device station local station and standby master station when operating as a local station Remote device station intelligent device Local station standby master station operating station as a local station Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote Renee Remote Remote z s emote A i input output register register input register register output RY RX RY RWw RWr RX RWw RWr When the programmable controller CPU of the master station is set to STOP at Continue 4 Continue Continue Clear Continue Continue Continue an error data link continued When the programmable controller CPU of the local station is set to STOP at an Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue 2 Continue Continue error data link continued Data Link Clears the receive areas Faulty Clear Clear When data link Station from other Holds the for the enti Setting of All point stations i A tee ee Indefinite pomis indefinite Indefinite R SROS Hold system is programming off Holds the from other stopped OLE local P PET receive areas stations station from other setting stations Clears the receive area from the Data Link Clear remote I O When a PARS Faulty station having a communication Station communication failure such as Setting of a A i failure i power off Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue C
74. a Retry processing time of the first station BT x 200 R x retry count setting value 178 5 e With a transient request R 13 2 NI x 4 8 NW x 9 6 180 ss e Without a transient request 5 5 R 13 2 NI x 4 8 NW x 9 6 Ai a B Retry processing time of the second and subsequent stations 3 BT x 200 P x retry count setting value 178 5 ze P 10 8 S F Return processing time added only when there is a faulty station 3 BT x 243 1 210 8 x number of automatic return modules 1 ST 2 2 3 a 3 367 Ex When the transmission speed is 10Mbps in the following system configuration It is assumed that there is no faulty station transient transmission and retry in this example Master station Station number 1 1 Remote I O station Station number 2 2 Remote device station OQ000 O00000000qQ OOO OQQQOQOOOO0O0 Station number 8 3 Local station Station number 4 3 Intelligent device station r M 3 3 000 6 co Pt mmo 2 C000 JOOOCO0000 Ly Docood OOOOO0000 Station number 12 1 Remote I O station 368 1 Th
75. and Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWOOOB e Availability of Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWOOOB lt gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWOOOB is applicable to the following dedicated instructions O Applicable x Not applicable onion Station where dedicated instructions are executed Master station Local station G P RIRD O O G P RIWT O O G P RISEND O x G P RIRCV O x G P RIFR x x G P RITO x x G P RLPASET x x G P RDMSG x x No retry is performed if the target station is disconnected at the execution of the dedicated instruction e Timing of the settings Set Monitoring time setting SWO0009 and Dedicated instruction retry count setting SW000B before executing dedicated instructions e Version of a master local module Before using the retry count setting check the version of the master local module gt Page 399 Appendix 6 2 174 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 2 G P RIRD The G P RIRD instruction reads the specified points of data from the buffer memory or the device in the CPU module of the target station Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIRD G RIRD Un S D1 D2 Command GP RIRD GPRIRD Un S D1 D2 Applicable device Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device
76. b11 test request i ON Requested Forcibly transfer data link control from the standby master o station during data link control to the master station that SB000C Forced master Standby 5E0 b12 itchi stands by for system down of the standby master station x x S n qi ears OFF Not requested master ON Requested station only Perform an initial process using the information registered by the initialization procedure registration using a Remote device station mi atool rogramming tool eee Leura es aes is on the remote I O and remote regist O x x i i the remo nd remote registers 5E0p b13 procedure registration 3 are stopped to be refreshed instruction i OFF Not instructed ON Instructed The status of communications between the master local SB0020 Moaie sia module and CPU module is stored o o o u us 5E2 b0 OFF Normal ON Error Whether the data link restart instruction has been SB0040 Data link restart accepted is stored o o x 5E4y b0 acceptance OFF Not accepted ON Accepted Whether the data link restart instruction has been SB0041 Data link restart completed is stored o o 5E44 b1 complete OFF Not completed ON Started Refresh instruction Whether the refresh instruction at standby master SB0042 acknowledgement switching has been accepted is stored o x x 5E44 b2 status at standby OFF Not executed master switching ON Accepted Refresh instruction Whether the refresh instruction at stan
77. bO OFF Online O O O ON Mode other than online SB0061 The station type of the host station is stored 5E6 b1 Host type OFF Master station station number 0 O O x H ON Local station station number 1 to 64 Whether the host station has been set as a standby Host standby master te SB0062 aisen master station is stored ation settin 5E6 b2 fail OFF Not set 9 9 9 information ON Set The status of the data link faulty station setting configured Input data status of a SB0065 hostdata linkta lt for the host station is stored ink fau 5E6y b5 i Y OFF Clear 2 e station ON Hold The number of occupied stations of the host station is SB0066 stored 5E6 b6 Number of occupied SB0066 SB0067 Number of host 4 i i stations x O x occupied stations SB0067 1 OFF OFF 5E6y b7 2 OFF ON 3 ON ON 4 ON OFF Whether the switch has been correctly set is stored SBOO6A See iai OFF Correct wit ing status 5E6 b10 g ON Setting incorrect An error code is stored in O O O SWOO06A 346 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether the parameters have been correctly set is stored O SB006D Parameter setting OFF Correct Forth SE6 y b13 status ON Setting incorrect An error code is stored in station 7 SW0068 number 0 only Whether data link with other stations is
78. can return Parameter checking test Yes Yes No No E2PROM Yes Yes Parameters of a CPU module 395 NILLLELOPO e UM LLLEOLOP SL W LLLELOr SL v ue Buloejdes ueym suonnedeid G xipueddy s jnpow JeuONIpes wos BoUdIEYIG G xIpPueddy 2 Dedicated instructions a A 1S J61BT11 The following dedicated instructions of an A 1S J61BT11 cannot be used in a master local module Instruction Description RLPA Set the network parameter RRPA Set the auto refresh parameter b A 1S J61QBT11 The following dedicated instructions of an A 1S J61QBT11 cannot be used in a master local module Instruction Description CCL CCLEND Register a mail box for dedicated instructions for an intelligent device and remote device SPCCLR Issue an interrupt instruction to the dedicated instructions for an intelligent device SPCBUSY Read the status of a remote station SEND Send data a message to a specified station QnACPU RECV Read data a message sent using the SEND instruction READ SREAD Read word device data of a target station QnACPU into the host station WRITE SWRITE Write data from the host station to word device data of a target station QNACPU REQ Send a transient request such as remote RUN STOP to other stations for execution 3 Condition setting switch A master local module does not have a condition setting switch Configure settings that used to be set usin
79. however data are stored into RX and RWr 2 Input and output of a local station Data can be input from all slave stations Data can be output from a local station only to the master station Areas are assigned in the order of station number a Data input to a local station Data in RY and RWw of other stations are stored into RX and RWr of a local station Data in RX and RWr of other slave stations are stored into RY and RWw of local stations b Data output from a local station Data stored in RY and RWw the area in the host station for data sending are stored into RX and RWr of the master station 3 6 2 Modes This section describes the modes of a master local module 1 List of modes Select the mode according to the system used CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Mode Application Connectable slave station Reference Remote net Ver 1 mode e To configure a new system only with Ver 1 compatible slave stations Ver 1 compatible slave station Page 46 Section 3 6 3 Remote net Ver 2 mode e To configure a system including a Ver 2 compatible slave station e More points are used compared to the remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net additional mode e To add a Ver 2 compatible slave station to an existing Ver 1 system using the program of the Ver 1 system Ver 1 compatible slave station and Ver 2 compatible slave station Page 48 Section 3 6 4 Page 51 Section 3 6 5 Remote I
80. module oO P o g n 3 n n Transmission speed i o Mode Switch number gt setting L D Transmission speed 156kbps 0 2 n Transmission speed 625kbps 1 2 Online Transmission speed 2 5Mbps a Transmission speed 5Mbps Transmission speed 10Mbps Transmission speed 156kbps Line test gt Page 86 Section 6 5 1 j E When the station number setting switch is set at 0 Transmission speed 625kbps Line test 1 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps When the station number setting switch is set at 1 to 64 Transmission speed 5Mbps Line test 2 Transmission speed 10Mbps Transmission speed 156kbps Transmission speed 625kbps Hardware test gt Page 324 Section 11 5 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps Transmission speed 5Mbps Transmission speed 10Mbps nim Ol QO Ww FS oO Ni om om A vN Setting not allowed 85 6 5 6 5 1 Test After Wiring Line test Whether a CC Link dedicated cable is properly connected and data link can be performed with slave stations can be checked A line test is executed in the master station 1 Using a programming tool CC Link Diagnostics Vt ster ST Intell ST iti Sait Monitor _ Stop Monitor Return to the original Display all Connecting Station Inf Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information w Bae ST Ech tation Used L
81. parameter modules parameter The station number set using the station number setting switches Change the parameter setting of of the standby master station the master station or change the differs from that set in Standby station number using the station Standby master station j Sct ah Master Station No of the number setting switches of the B39A specification error x O network parameter for the master local station or standby master installation status f f station or the station set in station then reset the CPU Standby Master Station No of module on the local station or the network parameter for the standby master station master station is a local station B39B Reserved station All stations are set as a reserved Correct the reserved station O M specification error station specification A station other than an intelligent device station is set as the station Specify the standby master type of the station set in Standby i station as an intelligent device f Master Station No of the ji Standby master station station B39C network parameter for the master O x setting error tian Set the same mode for the master station station and the standby master The mode setting of the master i i station station differs from that of the standby master station Zero points are set for a reserved station in the remote net Set the remote net Ver 2 mode 0 point setting error e B39D additional mode
82. q I 1 fh 7 station sending data to Sagn I S ea Station i the station No 1 1 i No 1 i i RY ft No 1 i acer e Station 1 i p Station the station No 2 i l 1 l No 2 1 i i No 2 I 1 l 1 1 am ot 1 rf RWr 1 Stati i 1 Range of rot 1 1 q Stati 1 ation TE MUCROUMM Jade caapebeecaeescecocedaecaeserseesenesy 1 ation I No 1 1 No 1 i j i te j No 1 I ding dat 7 1 4 Station i i Tee 1 i 1 i 4 Station k i No 2 oa zx A No 2 1 1 1 1 to RWw 1 or RWw i i ZZ f h RWw D 1 1 1 Q i as 2 AREAS iz Station it a j i Station i on No 1 4 No 1 4 E poo No 1 I i 1 1 1 i I L 1 o 1 1 1 Station 1 1 1 i 1 Station No 2 i i j i i No 2 1 1 l 1 l 1 1 Ver 2 compatible RX i 1 1 1 1 1 i RX Ver 2 compatible ay area A 1 i d i d i Range of 1 1 area Station ee ee A A ee OER cicon D Station i No 3 t oi od d Now ff No 3 1 i i i sending data Station I ad d f d 1 I Station Li CP Pe EC i 2 iil No 4 4 i f i F R i i Oo No 4 2 1 taj 1 RY ff ff RY 4 RY ry 5 1 1 1 te 1 he z PA EE ff 1 ot 1 ot Station 1 fi Station t ation No od 1 ot p d No 3 S o No 3 r ERG i 1 1 1 1 1 tee Range of the I ation sending data to 1 te station No 4 y 2 i ation No 4 1 r d i d i 1 1 ly sending data 9 I i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i RWr f 4 ty ane i RWr R 1 1 1 ange oi i Station co ae cee ne B E tne station fly Station r Hers i i ARE 5 K i No 3 1 1 1 i Station 1 i 1 i Go Station N
83. t Ver2 modes rx aa saline a at cheer we Mees Rh Ss Oe eS aga 48 3 6 5 Remote net additional mode snaa ssas eee eee eee aee 51 3 6 0 R mote l O net Modes 25 220 cca tem pitas sone Ea Awe te brine ale tse 55 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 57 4 4 Op ration Example sns os seh a eve eal ode ekg Seta be eens es wal athe ls 59 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 69 5 1 CC Link System Configuration eet teens 69 5 2 Configuration of the System Where a Master Local Module is Mounted 70 5 2 1 Connectable modules and the number of connectable modules 70 5 2 2 Applicable programming tools 0 0 0 0 ene 71 5 3 Precautions for the System Configuration sassssarr ararnar rnern nrn 72 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 75 6 1 Installing the Module 0 2 eet tenn teens 75 623 WING oon s a hohe ae d aeaa na oh UI a Da td ch ae dA od ade oh ols Me US ell 76 6 2 1 Preparation before Wiring 0 0 surian narren annann nrnna nananana 76 6 2 2 Wiring procedures cs 5 94 08 4 bs ale HW AS da anaran neunana RG Oh dae dni dla as 77 6 2 3 T branch conmection gt cic cdot Bag ae Wee See sha ae Paa a at eral odes Baa ete 79 6 3 Station Number Setting 2 0 0 tte e teens 82 6 4 Transmission Speed Setting 0 00 een nen ee enn eens 85 a Test After WING zirenetara We hae aon Saeed ss Bee ad A aO ey See BR ee ee Ba apient 86 65 1 Line testea
84. the station No 2 No 2 i s No 2 3 Range of the rt I hee station 11 Range ofthe 3 I sending data to T stal ton Ae I the station No 3 it pened care q g gt Data sent from the master station Area where data is sent to other stations n gt Data sent from slave stations 4 RWr and RWw are not used for a remote I O station Note however that buffer memory areas are occupied depending on the mode of the master local module _ gt Page 46 Section 3 6 3 to Page 55 Section 3 6 6 Point Buffer memory RX RY RWr and RWw addresses differ depending on the mode of the master local module Page 46 Section 3 6 3 to Page 55 Section 3 6 6 Ina local station data in RX and RWr of other slave stations are stored into RY and RWw and data in RY and RWw of other stations are stored into RX and RWr Areas where data is input and output are reversed 41 42 1 Input and output of the master station Data can be input to and output from all slave stations Areas are assigned in the order of station number a Data input to the master station Data in RX and RWr of all slave stations are stored into RX and RWr of the master station In a local station however data in RY and RWw of a local station are stored into RX and RWr of the master station b Data output from the master station Data stored in RY and RWw of the master station are output to RY and RWw of all slave stations In a local station
85. 0 Normal mode CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 2 4 Checking the status of data link Power on the remote station then master station to start data link When the LEDs are in the following states data link is being performed normally 1 LEDs on the master station QJ61BT11N RUN E WLRUN MST E sD M S MST MRD ERR L ERR E ON I Flashing 1 OFF 4 The LEDs may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status 2 LEDs on the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN POWER e RUN L RUN L ERR O TEST O ON O OFF 247 yul eyep JO snyeys y BurjoeyD v Z OL UONeIS 29149 S OWSY E pue UO EIS 19 Se UBEMIEg SUOI EDIUNWWOD Jo ajdwexg ZOL 10 2 5 Program example This section provides a program example Write a program to the CPU module in a master station 1 Devices to be used The following table lists the devices to be used in the program example Device Description Module XO Module error x1 Host data link status XF Module ready SB000D Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction QJ61BT11N SB005F Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SW0080 0 Other station data link status station number 1 SW0080 3 Other station data link stat
86. 1 Remote register RWw Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 4 gt Station number 4 Remote output RY Output Station number 1 Station number 1 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register Remote register Remote register RWr RWr RWr Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 j4 Rema al Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 4 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 eeren Areas where the setting is configured for whether data are refreshed or compulsorily cleared Only remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the setting SRS Areas refreshed regardless of the setting Remote input RX and remote register RWr RWw are refreshed even if the switches on the CPU modules in the master station and local stations are set to STOP regardless of the setting Point If the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP with Clears Compulsorily set a compulsory output to a slave station cannot be performed on a programming tool by using a device test or other methods The setting is enabled even if RY is refreshed using an intelligent function m
87. 1 Other station data link status station x1 Host data link status Sw0080 1 number 2 XF Module ready xo XOF X1 SW80 0 i H 1 1 f Mc NO Mo J NO MO Communication program with the station No 1 MCR NO J xo XOF xi SW89 1 J a 1 1 H Mc Nt M1 J N1 Mi Communication program with the station No 2 MCR N1 2 Refresh devices to be set Set the refresh devices without overlaps with the following Refresh parameters of modules on the network I O numbers used for an I O module and an intelligent function module e Auto refresh settings of an intelligent function module e Auto refresh using a multiple CPU shared memory S y Number of Modules 1 _y Boards Blank No Setting I Seti 8 E rt A Start I O No 0000 O Operation Setting Operation Setting a Type Master Station X Sk Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Q Mode H Remote Net Ver 1 Mode X uv Total Module Connected 1 2 la Remote Input RX Q Remote Output RY 5 Remote Register RWr 3 Remote Register RWw 5y Ver 2 Remote Input RX Q Yer 2 Remote Output RY Refresh device Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register R Ww Special Relay SB Special Register 5W Retry Count 3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop v Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous m Delay Time Setting 0 Station Information Setting CC Link Configuration Setting Remote Device Station Initi
88. 1 101D T 1614 Y101D Point The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station b Remote register RWr RWw Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 408 Appendix 8 1 2 CPU module Master station Slave station s Buffer memory address F Remote register Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw wo 2E0y 736 RWw0 wi 2E1y 737 RWw1 1 QJ61BT11N W2 2E2y 738 RWw2 W3 2E3y 739 RWw3 2a w w ae CPU module Master station Slave station 2 S Buffer memory address Remote register g E Device Station number Module name ao Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw 26 0 w100 1E04 480 RWr0 ae v z W101 1E1y 481 RWr1 e 2 1 QJ61BT11N D w102 1E24 482 RWr2 S n W103 1E3 483 RWr3 D z 2 CPU module Master station Local station CPU module 5 E a a i Device i Buffer memory i Buffer memory i i Device i n i Remote register RWr i Remote register RWr i i i wo 2E0H 736 2E0x 736 wo e Station Station Station Station i Not C No 1 i Eoo A O Nod i S w3 E 2E3H 739 i 2E3H 739 1 w3 i v pi 1 i a i l Remote register RWw Remote register RWw W100 1 gt 1E0H 480 T_ 1E0H 480 W100 i 9
89. 1 station D r eee station number 3 w Reserved station specification data 3 M300 ai z Mov H4 D50 Reserved station specification D station number 3 D o Error invalid station specification data S M300 Error invalid station specification a Mov He D69 station number 2 2 Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data 3 M300 i i First station number 1 local station D Mov ki00 D19 Send buffer 100 word Ba MOV K100 D71 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word MOV KO D72 First station number 1 local station Automatic update buffer 0 word 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14x for station No 20 To the next page 215 Parameter registration data link startup M300 LGP RLPASET u10 DO D10 D50 D60 D70 M301 Process at completion of the G P RLPASET instruction M301 RST M300 M302 _ AF SET SB3 SET M310 M302 i Perform abnormal completion process Parameter setting change Parameter change instruction M500 SB6E E r n SET SB2 SB45 2 RST SB2 RST SB3 SB45 z MV SET M303 G P RLPASET instruction Control data M303 _ MOV KO D100 MOV K9 D101 MOV K3 D102 MOV K3 D103 MOV KI D104 MOV KO D105 MOV KO D106 RO o D107 Slave station setting data M303 1 MOV H2101 D110 MOV H102 D111 MOV H103 D11
90. 1 x m 1 Rd SM x t LS x m Rd SM x n LS x 2 x m 1 SM LS x 2 x m 1 Max value SM x t LS x m Rd SM x t LS x m Rd Rd Rd When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and the expanded cyclic setting is Double Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 1 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 1 5 20 3 x 1 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 1 5 33 5ms 30 5ms 1 5 33 5ms 1 5 30 5ms Viacval 20 x 1 3 x 2 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 20 3 x 2 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 x value 1 5 42 5ms 1 5 30 5ms 1 5 42 5ms 1 5 30 5ms 376 APPENDICES 4 Master station lt gt local station Ver 1 compatible slave station a Master station RX lt local station RY master station RWr lt local station RWw This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a local station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a master station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM
91. 10 2 2 Settings fora master station s a s nasr cece eens 242 10 2 3 Settings for a remote device station 0 0 snaran rrarena eraan 246 10 2 4 Checking the status of data link 0 0 006 00 ccc eee eee ee 247 10 257 Program examples d irern nn hab cake Seed ea Ee haat dete vines 248 10 2 6 Program example when the initial setting is configured only on a program 252 10 3 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Local Station 255 10 31 System configuration rse iae sii eena ee aaa a A E de lead cies 255 10 3 2 Settings fora master station s on cece teens 258 10 3 3 Settings for a local station 0 0 eee eee ee eens 260 10 3 4 Checking the status of data link soc sresti snaar a nani eenia cette eens 262 10 3 5 Prograniexample iseni i aa ea ea oie Ea teen Beene he Ah 263 10 3 6 Program example to assure the integrity of cyclic data in each slave station 265 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 267 11 1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts a aasa aaua eect eee tenets 268 11 1 1 Troubleshooting using LEDs 00 ccc eee eens 268 11 1 2 Troubleshooting using a programming tool aasan enaena raare 271 11 2 Lists ofProblemsi 2 ene ee ee eae alas ea ee eagle eh eee 276 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station 00000000 cee cece 276 11 2 2 Problems due to cyclic data error 2 6 eee eee es 284 11 2 3 Problems due
92. 128 lt 2048 a2 b2 c2 d2 a4 b4 d4 a8 b8 c8 d8 Total number of Ver 1 compatible slave stations occupying one station and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying one station with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Total number of Ver 1 compatible slave stations occupying two stations and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying two stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Total number of Ver 1 compatible slave stations occupying three stations and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Total number of Ver 1 compatible slave stations occupying four stations and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying four stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying one station with the expanded cyclic setting of Double Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying two stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Double Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Double Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying four stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Double Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying one station with the expanded cyclic setting of Quadruple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying two stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Quad
93. 16 x 1 067 SM WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 O 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES 2 Local station lt gt local station a Local station local station The time between a local station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from another local station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt e G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 1671 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms A OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO2CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time lt 3 Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 SL Target station sequence scan time Apply 0 when buffer memory data in CC Link is read WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 lt gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SW000B lt gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000
94. 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 5FAH 1530 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1 1A0 5FBy 1531 1BF 1BE 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1B0 SFCy 1532 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 105 104 103 1C2 1C1 1C0 5FDy 1533 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 1D7 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 1D1 1D0 SFE 1534 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1E4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1E0 5FFy 1535 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1FO 338 APPENDICES 6 Link special register SW This area stores word data indicating the data link status Buffer memory addresses 6004 to 7FF correspond to link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF 3 Page 351 Appendix 3 2 7 Random access buffer This area stores data to be sent to other stations The data are read and written by transient transmission 8 Communication buffer This area stores sending receiving data when transient transmission communications using a communication buffer is performed with a local station standby master station and intelligent device station The communication buffer sizes of these stations are set using the network parameter gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Ex Communications using the communication buffer Master station Local station first station CPU
95. 492 to 495 544 to 547 596 to 599 648 to 651 700 to 703 1FO to 1F34 is 2244 to 2274 y 2584 to 25B4 y 28Cy to 28F a 2COy to 203 496 to 499 548 to 551 600 to 603 652 to 655 704 to 707 1F4 to 1F7y is 228 to 22By m 25Cy to 25Fy ie 290 to 2934 m 2C4 to 2C7 500 to 503 552 to 555 604 to 607 656 to 659 708 to 711 4 1F8 to 1FB z 22Cy to 22Fy a 260 to 2634 fe 2944 to 2974 5o 2C8 to 2CBy 504 to 507 556 to 559 608 to 611 660 to 663 712 to 715 8 1FCy to 1FFy 21 2304 O 233y 34 2644 O 2674 47 2984 to 29B 60 2CCy to 2CFy 508 to 511 560 to 563 612 to 615 664 to 667 716 to 719 7 2004 to 2034 F 234 to 2374 ie 2684 to 26B4 Ja 29Cy to 29F zi 2D0 to 2D34 512 to 515 564 to 567 616 to 619 668 to 671 720 to 723 i 204 to 2074 238 to 23By 55 26Cy to 26Fy 35 2A0y to 2A34 a 2D4 to 2D7 516 to 519 568 to 571 620 to 623 672 to 675 724 to 727 i 208 to 20By zA 23Cy to 23Fy i 270p to 2734 A 2A4y to 2A74 E 2D8 to 2DB 520 to 523 572 to 575 624 to 627 676 to 679 728 to 731 B 20Cy to 20F4 Be 240 to 2434 45 274p to 2774 gi 2A8 to 2ABY z 2DC to 2DF 524 to 527 576 to 579 628 to 631 680 to 683 732 to 735 m 210 to 2134 p 244 to 2474 i 2784 to 27By A 2AC to 2AF4 528 to 531 580 to 583 632 to 635 684 to 687 _ a 334 APPENDICES 4 Slave station offset size information In the remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net add
96. 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Point When all bits are off an initial process is performed in all the stations set in the remote device station initial setting of the network parameter suoljoun 3y Jo suonealddy jasn 8 3 Configure the initial setting by turning on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD During the initial process in the station number 3 other stations station numbers 1 5 and 7 continue the control uolouny uonessibes ainpsooid uoNezieniul UoNe s 399p ajowsay Eg 155 5 Precautions a Processing time Because one step is executed per link scan more setting items extend the processing time further than that of when a program is used b While Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Data in the remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw stops to be refreshed c Handling of signals that are required to be always on such as CH O Conversion enable flag of an AJ65BT 64RD3 4 Turning off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD after the initial process is completed turns off all the RY signals that have turned on while the initial procedure registration is performed To prevent this use a program to turn on signals that are re
97. 9 stopped i station setting Clears the receive area from the Clear remote I O station When a 2 having a Continues communication Pale Link Faulty communication operation of Continues Station Setting of fail operation of failure such as allure i areas other By external ower off occurs a programming Continue anha areas other Cenal All points off 3 aremote i o tool for master Holds the receive retote VO than the remote 7 gt station setting area from the j I O station station Kad remote I O station station having a communication failure Clears the receive area from the remote device TETA Clear station having a Holds the Continue Continue comiruhicatisi Data Link Faulty Comimuni stion receive area Not affected Not affected Station Setting of from the by the by the failure such as failure f pe Sane outer off occurs a programming i Continue Continue remote device communication communication 7 stennote tool for master Holds the receive station having a status of the status of the device station station setting area from ihe communication remote device remote device Hold remote device failure station station station having a communication failure 121 10113 ue je UONe S BAeIS e pue LONe sS Ja Sep e UGEMJeg uY SNIS FZ Master station standby master station operating as a A 4 s op E Remote I O station master station Data link status 7 R
98. After connecting the terminating resistors check the following If the modules are properly connected Voltage of the input power supply If the switch on the CPU module is set at STOP e If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET Point Use terminating resistors supplied with the modules 63 ajdwexy uonesedo t 5 Set the station number and transmission speed using the switches on the master local module C gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 The transmission speed should be 156kbps Station No 0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 6 Set the station number and transmission speed using the switches on the AJ65BTB2 16T and AJ65BTB1 16DT ete wee ee ee ee ew ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee Transmission speed 156kbps Station No 1 et i i Ea Transmission speed 156kbps MITSUBISHI Station No 2 Point Set the station numbers not used for other modules Pay extra attention when a module with the number of occupied stations of two or more is connected lt gt Page 82 Section 6 3 Set the same transmission speed on all the connected modules gt Page 85 Section 6 4 64 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 7 Power on
99. Background Color Legend Reserved station Temporary error invalid station Error invalid station Error Information x Error A warning Connection Icon m Connecting station T Bridge module connection Point Update of the number of errors warnings in Diagnostics Result Only the number of errors warnings that occur in the system of the module selected in the module list diagnostics target selection area is updated during monitoring To view the latest number of errors warnings of other modules click the a button to update the module list 313 SUONE S JOUJO UOHE S SOY OU DUHOPUON pY LL ZSUOM X9 BursnN sosouBbeig yuUIT O9 LL 11 4 2 Executing the line test obtaining the transmission speed setting For how to execute the line test and obtain the transmission speed setting refer to the following e Line test gt Page 86 Section 6 5 1 e Obtaining the transmission speed setting gt Page 90 Section 6 5 2 314 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 3 Status logging Data link status of all stations is logged If multiple stations repeatedly fail and recover or stations following a specific station do so the location of the error cause such as poor cable connection and noise can be easily identified With RAM Flash ROM selected the first 45 logs after logging start are stored on the flash ROM Logs stored on the flash ROM can be checked
100. Block Data Assurance per Station Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr Wo I Clears Compulsorily We 5 Remote Register RWw oo Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device Ver 2 Remote Input RX Please select Read Model Name of Slave tion of the Ver 2 Remote Output RY Station in Auto Detection Ver 2 Remote Register RWr connected device The start of data link may be slow after selecting the item Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBO T Read Model Name of Slave Station Special Register SW swo Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Ca oe Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop X Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous X Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting CC Link Configuration Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas I tinas A StetionNo Mode Name Station Type v N ka CC Link Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Detect Now very ist x Mode Seting Ver iNode z xSpeed _ 1seibpe Lrk Scan Time Approx T5 ms Select CC Link Find Module My Favorites ar Remote Station Inteligent Buffer Selection vord Points STA Send Auto Verson of STA Ocapied 0 0 Host Station
101. CSV file click the Save button To read the saved CSV log file and display the contents under Log List click the Read button c Deleting logs 1 To delete logs in a master local module click the ClearLog button If the Clear Log button is clicked with RAM Flash ROM selected the logs stored on the flash ROM will also be deleted While the logs on the flash ROM are being deleted do not power off the master local module 2 Precautions a Starting logging Logging will not start in the following cases e Logs stored on the flash ROM have not yet been fully deleted error code B323 e RAM Flash ROM has been selected and 45 logs have already been stored on the flash ROM error code B324 e The cumulative number of times that logs are stored on the flash ROM has exceeded 100 000 times error code B325 b Log storage areas and the number of storable logs The following log storage areas are available RAM area equipped in the module Up to 95 logs e Flash ROM area equipped in the module Up to 45 logs e Hard disk on GX Works2 personal computer Up to 5000 logs To store 96 or more logs maximum 5000 logs keep GX Works2 connected even after logging is started If the number of logs stored in the RAM area has exceeded 95 with GX Works disconnected the stored log will be overwritten from the oldest one Hulbbo snes E H LL ZSHIOM XO Busy soysouBbeiq 4UIT OO HLL 317 11 4 4 Creating a check
102. D E ON SD I Flashing ERR D OFF 6 After the line test 2 is completed the L RUN LED or When the test is completed MST LED on the master station turns on e When the test is completed QJ61BT11N L RUN LED ON RUN Ml ML RUN MST I CJSMST E ON MST LED Flashing SD E MRD LJ Flashing e When the test is not completed ERR LERR OFF MST LED ON ERR LED Flashing The error code is stored into Line test result SWOO0B8 When the test is not completed error on all the stations cS Page 293 Section 11 3 2 QJ61BT11N RUN E L RUN MST E S MST E ON SD RD D Flashing ERR L ERR OFF 89 6 5 2 Transmission speed test Whether the transmission speed setting of a slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked The station number of the slave station having a different transmission speed setting can be also checked therefore corrective action upon a transmission error can be easily taken Point Before using this function check the versions of the master local module and programming tool gt Page 399 Appendix 6 2 1 Using a programming tool GX Works2 only asa a 1 Open the CC Link diagnostics window on GX CC Link i sep Mentor a Works2 iol XO Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics Mm 2 Double click Loop Test on t
103. DB of terminal resistor Please check it when you confirm it 5 Grounding FG Terminal Grounding of FG terminal of each station Please check it when you confirm it System Configuration Station No Station Type Number of Occupied Stations Length of Cable yeays yoouo e Huneal PP LL ZSHIOM XO Busy soysoubeiq 4uIT OO HLL Describe the installation status to 6 System Configuration when it is not set up in each station 319 11 4 5 Stopping and restarting data link How to stop and restart data link of a master local module is described below During a debugging session the master local module does not receive data from other stations and does not send data of the host station 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Select a master local module where data link is to be stopped and restarted on the top of the window CC Link Diagnostics P CC L 1 n k Monitoring Stop Monitor Board No 2 1 0 0020H QJG1BT11N Select the applicable module 3 Double click Stop Data Link on the bottom of the window The data link of the master local module stops If Stop Data Link is not displayed on the bottom of the window click the related Eunctions gt gt button on the bottom left corner of the window Link Scan Time Max 3ms Min 2ms Current 3ms Related Functions lt lt Legend Close LEES
104. Data Link Status Start Data linking a Module No gt 1 Action Status Link Scan Time eci z Master Station Ver 2 mode CC Link Minimum f2 ms Normal C 1 0 Address Switching Status MasterStation Curent 2 ms rc Using Loop CH 0 Line status Normal CH 1 Line status E Loop Test Loop Type Network Test Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station Close Item Description Host Station Displays the station type and mode of the host station Note that the mode is not displayed when the master local module is in the remote net Ver 1 mode Data Link Status Displays the data link status of the host station Action Status Displays the operating status of the host station Switching Status Displays whether the master station or standby master station is controlling data link Line Monitor N i Host Using Loop Displays the line of the master local module used station CH 0 Line status CH 1 Line status Displays the line status Loop Type Displays the line type of CC Link Link Scan Time Displays the maximum minimum and current value of the links can time Loop Test button Executes a line test gt Page 404 Appendix 7 3 Monitoring other station button Monitors other stations 3 Page 403 Appendix 7 2 Module Setting Specifies the master local module to be monitored on the CC Link diagnostic
105. Device Station number Module name Remote I O RX RY 2 Hexadecimal Decimal a X1000 to X100F E0 224 RXO to RXF S 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X1010 to X101F E14 225 RX10 to RX1F 2 X1020 to X102F E2 226 RX20 to RX2F z 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN D X1030 to X103F E34 227 RX30 to RX3F ki X1040 to X104F E44 228 RX40 to RX4F H 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN v X1050 to X105F E54 229 RX50 to RX5F fal X1060 to X106F E64 230 RXO to RXF S 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN S X1070 to X107F E7 231 RX10 to RX1F 0 D X1080 to X108F E8 232 RX20 to RX2F 3 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 9 X1090 to X109F E94 233 RX30 to RX3F ea i X10A0 to X10AF EAH 234 RX40 to RX4F lt 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 8 X10B0 to X10BF EBuy 235 RX50 to RX5F N a 233 The assignment by each signal of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 Station No 4 No of occupied No of occupied CPU module Master station stations 3 stations 3 Buffer memory i i i i Device Remote input RX Remote input RX X1000 E0H 224 RX00 l 1 1 1 X101F P E1H 225 ler _ RX1F ines Station Station E2n 220 Station ie X103F J Not E34 227 M No1 RxoF i x1040 E4n 228 RX40 X105F E5H 229 RX5F Remote input RX X1060
106. E oj z S 8 zi ajl g Oo o g a 3 a Parameter 1Count None Stop Continue None Standby Master Station Se PLC Down Drive Specificat Error Invalid Station None Station Information Written in the system configuration GX WORKS2 Dedicated Instruction FROM TO Instruction Startup by Buffer Memory Y6 Startup by E2PROM Y8 Only QnA A FX Series Auto Refresh Dedicated Instruction FROM TO Instruction a 2 uv amp Z g e 3j oj 3 5 2 2 a d a ol 3 wn n u y g 2 S Q ei n amp i a 7 Parameter Setting 8 Link Start Method 9 Link Data Access Transmission Speed 10M 5M J2 5M 625k 156kbps 2 Linked Station Connected Count 1Count The details have been described Station Type Remote I O Station 0Count Remote Device Station 0Count Intelligent Device Station 1Count 3 Number of Occupied Y Number of occupied stations of each station Please check it when you confirm it ICC Link Version Ver 1 Ver2 Expanded Cyclic Setting 1Times 2Times 4Times 8Times Transmission Speed 10M 5M 2 5M 625k 156kbps Transmission Cable Cable Type O o z o fe a cy z w 3 ie Transmission Distance Total Extension Distance m Inter Station Distance Distance between Shortest m 4 Terminal Resistor Resistance Value 1100hm 1300hm JNot Exist Connected Terminal Connection between DA
107. Ethernet port QCPU 05 13 c C Controller module nnna aaaea 13 Cables rel neo sie ana r I LA dere owt teeth 76 Case of CPU STOP Setting 101 CGSLInk oe tc ae adele Phe deed wh Red eee band 16 CC Link dedicated cable 13 33 CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible 76 CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible 0000 0 eee 76 CC Link diagnostics using GX Works2 311 CC Link system configuration 69 CC Link versions 1 rosaria eee 415 Combination of the modes 00000 44 Communication buffer 339 Communication specifications for a T branch CONMECHION cre osx hs oo bale ped yea ebm 80 Conditions of use for the product 5 Configuration of the system where a master local module is mounted ee00000 70 Connectable modules 00000 ee eee 70 Connection cable 1 0 0 0 ees 25 Countermeasure against an incorrect input 73 Creating a check sheet 0 318 Cyclic data assurance 00005 150 Cyclic transmission 13 125 F G H Datalink coarro nerna 4 a4 a pee bee 644 vated 13 Data Link Faulty Station Setting 101 Data link processing time 366 Data link start function using a standby master station bb ha yan dace nthe dy Anabiaredh ad hada a nrAnds cated 135
108. Is Refresh instruction when Check if Refresh instruction Turn on Refresh instruction Data cannot be i oup tio D4 1 Refresh changing parameters by the when changing parameters when changing parameters utput from ia instruction dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction SB0003 on SB0003 is on SB0003 Were Initial data processing Has the initial setting completion flag RYn18 and Perform the initial data completed Initial data setting request process flag RYn19 turned off Check if Remote device station initialization Has the remote device procedure registration station initialization instruction SB000D is off A f A remote Change the registration procedure registration Check Remote device device station ae ea e Eruh completed station initialization does not 7 e D5 1 Initial setting procedure registration become ready RXn1B remains off instruction result SWOO5F Is the initial setting for the remote device station correct Check the parameter Check the program Correctly configure the initial setting for the station Has the initial setting been enabled Check if Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD has been turned on using a program Turn on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD and check that the initial setting is ena
109. LS Link scan time SL Master station sequence scan time Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 2 SL x k 1 SM x n x 2 LS SL x k 1 SM LS x 2 SL SM xn x 2 LS SL SM x n LS x 3 SM x n x 3 LS Max value SM LS x 3 SL SM x n x 3 LS SL SL x k 1 SL x k 1 Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 2 20 x 1 x 2 3 20 3 x 2 10 20 x 1 x 2 3 10 10 x 1 1 46ms 10 x 1 1 63ms 36ms 53ms ee ad 20 x 1 3 x 3 20 x 1 x 3 3 20 3 x 3 10 20 x 1 x 3 3 10 x Value 10 x 1 1 49ms 10 x 1 1 83ms 39ms 73ms 377 oul Aejap uolssiuusues Zp xipueddy ew Bulsseoojg JU eyeq y xIpueddy b Master station RY local station RX mast
110. MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL SERIAL _130120000000000 B Pre ttt rt errr reer 1 i t Relevant regulation standards PEO ETE E ete eee rae l MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN 415 SUOISJE A YUIT OD OL xipueddy Appendix 11 External Dimension Diagram UL a s Ea pH 2y ea P E 416 INDEX Symbols of STA Occupied 0 20000 eee eee 105 0to9 32 bit data integrity assurance 153 A AGP fac iae ie katte a Bee i a Be 13 Added functions 000 eee eee eee 399 AJ65BT R2 N aa o2s an a s cats tase aa 13 ANUGPU sasa ick a a Sie Babee a 13 ASSIGNMENT as eeneg arri dda Sg dno end Sie Wl eee 41 Assignment sheet 000000005 407 Asynchronous mode 000005 163 Automatic CC Link startup 159 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 100 Automatic return 0 ee 128 Automatic update buffer 0 340 Available functions of CPU modules 397 B Basic model QCPU 0 0c eee ees 13 Block data assurance per station 101 150 B fe memo acts oana ee eed aa hdd de wea 13 Buffer memory address 0200000 13 Buffer memory areaS 00000 ee eee 328 Built in
111. Master station ai QSIBTLN Local station Vert MB FUSIBTI1 Master Local Module HD QULBTLIN Master Local Module HE L25CPU BT Master Local Station Function L250Pu P8T_Master Local staton Functen mmf LIGIBTI1 _ Mastes Local Module QJEIBTIIN 3 Click the End button to terminate the setting 4 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started Online lt gt Write to PLC lt mn or power off gt on 259 uone s 19 Ssew e 10 SUYOS Z O uones e907 pue uones Ja seyy e uaamag SUOHeDIUNWWOD Jo ajdwexg EOL 10 3 3 Settings for a local station 1 Settings for a master local module Set the station number and transmission speed of the master local module lt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Station No 1 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 2 Parameter settings by using a programming tool Connect a CPU module to a programming tool to set the parameters of the master local module _ gt Page 96 Section 7 3 1 Create a project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under Series Select Q20UDH under Type SX Project gt New 260 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting as follows Project window 2 gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Number of Modules 1 _ Boar
112. Number of modules occupying four stations Condition 2 16 x A 54 x B 88 x C lt 2304 QWPI 2aQ 7 Number of remote I O stations lt 64 Number of remote device stations lt 42 Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 27 s jnpowu p uuo jo s qunu wWNnWIXeN pze SUONeoIOadS 0ULewIOJ d ZE 2 Remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode The table below lists the maximum number of connected modules of when a system is configured only with Ver 2 compatible slave stations For the modes refer to Page 43 Section 3 6 2 64 modules of a remote I O station remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station can be connected in total for one master station Note however that the following conditions must be satisfied Item Number of modules Condition 1 a a2 a4 a8 b b2 b4 b8 x 2 c c2 c4 c8 x 3 d d2 d4 d8 x 4 lt 64 Condition 2 a x 32 a2 x 32 a4 x 64 a8 x 128 b x 64 b2 x 96 b4 x 192 b8 x 384 c x 96 c2 x 160 c4 x 320 c8 x 640 d x 128 d2 x 224 d4 x 448 d8 x 896 lt 8192 Condition 3 K a x 4 a2 x 8 a4 x 16 a8 x 32 b x 8 b2 x 16 b4 x 32 b8 x 64 c x 12 c2 x 24 c4 x 48 c8 x 96 d x 16 d2 x 32 d4 x 64 d8 x
113. O net mode e To configure a system only with remote I O stations Remote I O station Page 55 Section 3 6 6 4 This mode cannot be selected for a local station 43 S PON ZIE s po pue yu wufissy 9g 44 Ver 2 compatible 1 remote output RY I a Combination of the modes of a master local module The table below lists the combination of the modes of the master station and local station in a master local module O Data link can be performed x Data link cannot be performed Mode of a local station Mode of the master station Remote net Ver 1 Remote net Ver 2 Remote net additional mode mode mode Remote net Ver 1 mode O x Remote net Ver 2 mode oO O x Remote net additional mode oO O O 4 In a standby master station data link can be performed only when the mode is the same as that of the master station 2 Although a local station in the remote net Ver 1 mode cannot perform data link with a Ver 2 compatible slave station the status of the Ver 2 compatible slave station is stored in Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 for the local station as well as that for the master station When the master station is normally performing data link with the Ver 2 compatible slave station Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 for the local station indicates 0 Normal Note that cyclic data in the Ver 2 compatible slave station will become 0 i
114. Online Master Local Offline station station Remote device station initialization SWw0115 procedure 7154 registration execution individual information target 6 Remote device station initialization SW0116 procedure 716p registration execution individual information target 7 Remote device station initialization The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is procedure stored registration Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is O x x SW0117 717 7174 execution stored individual Lower bit Target station number information target 8 Remote device station initialization SW0118 procedure 718 registration execution individual information target 9 SMS s13 s1691 jeloads yur Z E xIpueddy SMS suajsiBey jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Remote device station initialization swo119 procedure 7194 registration execution individual information target 10 361 Number Name Description Availability O Yes x No Online Master Local station station Offline SWO011A 71Ay Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 11 SW011B 71By Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 12
115. Quadruple e Octuple Default Single Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure the integrity of cyclic data for each slave station gt Page 150 Section 8 2 6 1 Disable setting not checked Enable setting checked Default Disable setting not checked 118 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 Interrupt Settings Project window lt gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter gt CC Link 2 gt Interrupt Settings button 1 in Interrupt Settings window set the conditions on which a master local module issues the interrupt to a CPU module 2 Click the End button and close the setting window Interrupt Settings Module 1 Input Format DEC v Channel No Connection No Word Device Setting Value Device Code Detection Interrupt Device No Method Condition RX 0001 Edge Detect ON RWr 150 Scan Completed 0004 Level Detect Unequal 4jajajajajajajajaja jajajajajaja aida a lala fa ala lala tala jajaa Detection Method Item Description Setting range DEC q Input Format Select the input format of Word Device Setting Value HEX Default DEC n o Device Code Es Set the device for the interrupt condition Coy Device No 2 5 a Interrupt Condition Select the timing of the interrupt detection for the device set to Device Code and Device No Word Device Setting Value
116. RWw9 CH 1 to 4 output range setting D fo W116 RWwA CH 5 to 8 output range setting 3 W117 RWwB HOLD CLEAR setting a D lt 0 2 Si 241 10 2 2 Settings for a master station 1 Settings for a master local module Set the station number and transmission speed of the master local module Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Station No 0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 2 Parameter settings by using a programming tool Connect a CPU module to a programming tool to set the parameters of the master local module _ gt Page 96 Section 7 3 1 Create a project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under Series Select Q20UDH under Type ZX Project gt New 242 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting as follows Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Number of Modules 1 z Boards Blank No Setting M Set Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station 1 _ p Data Link Faulty Station Setting _ Expanded Cyclic Setting T Hold Input Data Enge z p Case of CPU STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station I Clears Compuisorily IF Enable Setting Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device Please select Read Model Name of Slave Station in Auto Detection of the The start of data link may be slow af
117. RY RWr and RWw The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 L gt Page 335 Appendix 2 4 4 Precautions a To use the remote net additional mode for a local station Set the master station to the remote net additional mode CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 6 Remote I O net mode This mode is selected when slave stations are remote I O stations only Compared to other modes transmission delay time of cyclic transmission can be shortened In addition the master local module can operate with less setting Master station Remote I O station Remote O station Remote I O net mode Ver 1 compatible Ver 1 compatible r Station No 0 StationNo 4 StationNo 2 Ver 1 compatible i l 1 1 i area RX 1 1 A 1 1 1 F Range of sie T 1 AEETI the station i o No 1 RX 1 1 1 i i EAC LEGI d Range of i 1 Station 4 the station 1 1 No 2 1 1 No 2 I 1 sending data 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RY 1 1 1 1 1 i A 1 Station sending data to eras i the station No 1 o 1 RY 1 1 1 Range of the master F 1 1 station sending data to 3 Station I the station No 2 No 2 1 1 i i Area where data is sent to other stations gt Data sent from the master station gt Da
118. Result of Find Module Output Error details are displayed if settings are not configured properly b When the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is not checked 1 Set Mode and Total Module Connected in the Network Parameter window and open CC Link 2 Station Information window button Input setting values W Project window gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Station Information 3 When completing the setting close the CC Link Station Information window D End button CC Link Station Information Module 1 Receive Sede _ essed Station 1 v a o s No Setting v single occupied Station 1 pons hy No Setting A Intelligent Device Station of Station Type includes local station and standby master station Default Check End Cancel Item Description Setting range The order of the slave station is displayed before the slash Station No The start station number of the slave station is displayed after the slash Station Type Select the station type of the slave station Set the same type of the slave station actually connected Select Intelligent Device Station for a local station or standby master station Varies depending on the mode set to Mode Expanded Cyclic Setting Select the expanded cyclic setting for the slave station The setti
119. SOY 9U DUHOPUON LH LL 311 1 Display contents of the CC Link Diagnostics window Item Description Diagnostics Result Displays the number of errors and warnings that occur in the master local module Module list diagnostics target selection Lists master local modules The number of errors and warnings is also displayed The diagnostics target can be changed by clicking a module icon Updates the list ane gt Switches the displayed modules in units of eight modules Lists the icons of stations that configure a CC Link system In the Detail Display mode the 24th or later stations are displayed by clicking the Next gt gt button The display status can be switched by clicking the Display All and Detail Display buttons In the Display All mode information on all stations can be viewed in one window The icons can be freely located by drag and drop Station list To display the icons in the order of station number click the Return to the original button 0 5 Master ST Intell ST es inl st Pret st Fost intel St lt a 2 o Th ae las Move the icon by Wo drag and drop Connecting Station Information Displays the station number of the connected station host station Selected Station Information Displays the information such as a station numbe
120. Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 User 1 2 nee ONG Set 00044 0004 User Attribute code 1 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory 4 User S1 4 Number of read points Specify the number of read data in word units 1 to 480 2 User bi For details refer to the manual for the intelligent device station from which data are read 2 The value indicates the maximum number of read data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the intelligent device station or within the receive buffer area setting range set by a parameter b Interlock signal storage device i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range RY Request device 0 to 127 User S2 0 b15 to b8 amp b7 to bO 0 RY Set 0 to the upper eight bits 0 User RX Completion device 0 to 127 User 62 1 b15 to b7 to bO Rwr Error code storage device ts RWr RX If the error code storage device does not exist set EE User FFy 0 The host station completes the process by checking b15 to bO the contents of one device RXn S2 2 Completion mode 1 The host station completes the process by checking 0 1 User the contents of two devices RX
121. Special Relay 5B Special Register SW Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Station Information Setting _ Interrunt Settinas Interrupt Settinas Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Clear Item Description Setting range Number of Modules Select the number of master local modules number of modules to be mounted on one base unit Do not include the number of master local modules that are set using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET Varies depending on a CPU module User s manual for the CPU module used Default Blank Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window Checking this item is not necessary for a local station or standby master station Start I O No Set the start I O number of a master local module in units of 16 points Within the range of I O points of the CPU module Default Blank Operation Setting Set the operations to be performed at an error or when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP gt Page 118 Section 7 4 2 1 Type Select Local Station to use
122. This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations during data link for maintenance or for other purposes 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master station to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Start Monitoring button 4 Click the Moritoiing other statin button 5 Select the line of the station where the temporary error invalid station setting is configured or canceled Then click the Setting Cancel button CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station Ver1 Intelligent 1 Normal 4 Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For current cursor station Start Monit Stop Monitoring Close Point Ifthe Setting Cancel button cannot be clicked check that the master station has been selected in Module Setting While configuring the setting do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 5E4y and 6034 to 607p Do not configure or cancel the temporary error invalid station setting using a program and other peripherals at the same time The temporary error invalid station setting may not be normally configured or cancelled APPENDICES Appendix 8 Setting sheet This appendix pr
123. W108 1E84 488 RWw8 w109 1E94 489 RWw9 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W10A 1EAy 490 RWwA W10B 1EBy 491 RWwB W10C 1ECy 492 RWw0 Ww10D 1EDy 493 RWw1 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W10E 1EE 494 RWw2 W10F 1EFy 495 RWw3 W110 1FOy 496 RWw4 w111 1F1y 497 RWw5 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W112 1F24 498 RWw6 W113 1F3y 499 RWw7 W114 1F4 500 RWw8 W115 1F5y 501 RWw9 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W116 1F6y 502 RWwA W117 1F7y 503 RWwB 240 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING The assignment by each data of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 Station No 4 No of occupied No of occupied CPU module Master station stations 3 stations 3 Buffer memory 1 py i i 1 Device f Remote register RWw Remote register RWw I W100 1EOH 480 1 RWw0 i i l 1 T l i 1 i 1 i i 1 W103 Io 1E3H 483 l RWw3 1 a Sas 1 ae aa 1 miz ar ih i Li W104 Station __ Station 1E4484 Station PW4 i gt Ihe 4 1 i w107 N01 o bet 1E7487 Net RWW i W108 E 1E8H 488 i RWw8 i j A i A I 5 oi 1 1 1 i Log 1 I 1 W10B i 1EBH 491 RWwB Remote register RWw 1 1 1 W10C E 1ECH 492 RWw0 l A z m f s l 1 1
124. a O x transmission or remote device one station at the same time Execute the message BC58 transmission function again ws With the message transmission If the same error persists the Message transmission function abnormal data were master module or remote device O x handshake failure received station may be faulty Please BC59 consult your local Mitsubishi representative Please consult your local BC5A System error eee O Mitsubishi representative With the message transmission Abnormal response Check the operation of the target BC5B function an abnormal response i O x received i remote device station was received Execute the message transmission function again o With the message transmission If the same error persists the Message transmission BC5C to BC5F i function abnormal data were master module or remote device O x handshake failure received station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The message transmission function was executed Invalid number of simultaneously for five or more BC60 messages that were remote device stations Execute four requests or less at o T simultaneously The message transmission the same time transmitted function was executed simultaneously for five or more intelligent device stations Number of concurrent The peripherals sent requests to execution error the remote device station Execute four requests or less at BC70 i 3
125. a UL listed solderless terminal and a tool recommended by the manufacturer of the solderless terminal for processing Solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire Model 3 Temperature Tightening torque range Diameter Type Material i name rating 1 25 3 0 42 to 0 58Nem 22 to 16AWG Stranded Copper 60 C or higher b Screws and tightening torque The table below lists the screws of the terminal block and the tightening torque Screw type Tightening torque range Terminal block screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58Nem Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89Nem 3 Wiring check Connect the master station with the slave station Check whether the slave station is turned on and off by turning on and off the device of the master station gt Page 59 Section 4 1 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 2 3 T branch connection This section describes how to connect CC Link dedicated cables in T branch 1 T branch system configuration The following is a system configuration in T branch T branch terminal block connector Local station Remote O station Remote device station Intelligent device station Branch line Branch line Main line Master station 1 Branch line Remote O station Remote device station Remote O station Remote device station Remote O station
126. again it returns as a standby master station Master Station Duplex e When only the standby master station Function is started up it starts data link as a master station e Master Station e Master Station Duplex Function e Master station Extension Base 2 Default Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start is displayed The setting is not required Select the mode of a master local module lt _ gt Page 43 Section 3 6 2 to Page 55 Section 3 6 6 e Remote Net Ver 1 Mode e Remote Net Ver 2 Mode e Remote Net Additional Mode Mode If the mode is selected in the CC Link configuration window for e Remote I O Net Mode the station information setting the mode selected in the CC Link Offline configuration window is automatically set Default Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Set the number of modules to be connected to a slave station including a reserved station Total Module HS ee lt F If Set the station information in the CC Link configuration 1 to 64 Default 64 Connected window is checked the setting is automatically input by configuring Station Information Setting 98 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw are transferred By setting these items RX RY RWr a
127. and 311 336 and 337 EA and EBy is 1044 and 1054 3 11E and 11F4 a 1384 and 1394 1524 and 1534 234 and 235 260 and 261 286 and 287 312 and 313 338 and 339 7 EC and ED 20 106 and 1074 33 1204 and 1214 46 13Ay and 13B4 59 154 and 155H 236 and 237 262 and 263 288 and 289 314 and 315 340 and 341 EE and EF z 1084 and 1094 a 1224 and 123H a3 13Cy and 13Dy S 1564 and 1574 238 and 239 264 and 265 290 and 291 316 and 317 342 and 343 5 FOy and Fiy 3 10Ay and 10By 3z 1244 and 1254 ia 13Ey and 13Fy a 1584 and 1594 240 and 241 266 and 267 292 and 293 318 and 319 344 and 345 40 F2y and F34 93 10Cy and 10D 36 126 and 127 49 140 and 1414 62 15Ay and 15By 242 and 243 268 and 269 294 and 295 320 and 321 346 and 347 41 F44 and F54 oA 10E and 10F 37 1284 and 1294 50 1424 and 1434 63 15C and 15D 244 and 245 270 and 271 296 and 297 322 and 323 348 and 349 i F6y and F74 gg 1104 and 1114 jg 12Ay and 12By si 1444 and 145 s 15E and 15Fy 246 and 247 272 and 273 298 and 299 324 and 325 350 and 351 5 F84 and F94 3 1124 and 1134 b 12Cy and 12Dy m 1464 and 1474 B O 248 and 249 274 and 275 300 and 301 326 and 327 331 sealy Aioway Jeyng Z xipueddy b Remote output RY Station number Buffer memory address Station number Buffer memory address Station number Buffer memory address Station number
128. area Value Description Station No 1 RWr size 64 401 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 2 RWr offset 4C00y Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RWr size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RWr offset 4C40 Start buffer memory address of RWr in the station number 3 Station No 3 RWr size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWr in the station number 3 Station No 4 RWr offset 4C40 Start buffer memory address of RWr in the station number 4 Station No 4 RWr size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWr in the station number 4 337 sealy Aiowsy Jeyng z xipueddy 5 Link special relay SB This area stores bit on off data indicating the data link status Buffer memory addresses 5E0 to 5FFy correspond to link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF gt Page 343 Appendix 3 1 The following table lists the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5E0 to SFFy and link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF Address b145 b14 b13 b142 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 5E04 1504 F E D 0 B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5E1 1505 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 5E2 1506 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 5E3 1507 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 5E44 1508 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48 47 46
129. b4 e Temporary error invalid acceptance status SB0048 5E4 b8 Temporary error invalid complete status SB0049 5E4y b9 e Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 5E74 b6 e Multiple temporary error invalid station specification SW0003 6034 e Temporary error invalid station specification SW0004 to SW0007 604 to 607p e Temporary error invalid station specification result SW0049 6494 Temporary error invalid status SW007C to SW007F 67Cy to 67Fy Temporary error invalid station specification canceling Temporary error invalid canceling request SBO005 5E0 b5 Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgement status SBO04A 5E4 b10 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status SB004B 5E4 b11 Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 5E74 b6 e Multiple temporary error invalid station specification SW0003 603p Temporary error invalid station specification SW0004 to SW0007 604 to 607p Temporary error invalid station specification cancel result SW004B 64B Temporary error invalid status SW007C to SW007F 67C to 67F 168 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 8 Data link stop restart Data link of the host station can be stopped or restarted using a programming tool or SB SW This function is used to temporarily stop data link for maintenance or other purposes If data link of a master station is stopped data link i
130. bO hibited stat PERDOI ProNoited graiis Depending on the link refresh timing SB0160 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Remote register use prohibited status SW0160 to SW0163 The result of the transmission speed test to the standby a master station is stored Transmission speed i SB0184 OFF Normal same transmission speed as the master test result for standby O x x 5F8y b4 station or no response from the module master station r D ON Error different transmission speed from the master station Whether Transmission speed test request SB000B has SB0185 Transmission speed been accepted is stored E x 5F8y b5 test accept status OFF Not accepted O ON Accepted Whether a transmission speed test has been completed is SB0186 Transmission speed stored x 5F8 b6 test completion status OFF Not completed O ON Completed 350 Appendix 3 2 Link special registers SWs APPENDICES Data are stored in SW0000 to SW001F using a program whereas data are automatically stored in SW0020 to SWO1FF Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Availability in the table as explained below e When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station co
131. by the dedicated instruction SB0003 Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop complete SB0045 G P RLPASET instruction direction device ON Complete device i ON Status display device of i Abnormal end at completion yA l scan Al When all the stations are faulty End End End End End End End Program pr cess process process E process process process process Refresh start Return to system process Data link start G P RLPASET instruction completion Refresh stop Data link stop Host data link status X01 Refresh instruction when changing parameters by the dedicated instruction SB0003 Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop complete a SB0045 a G P RLPASET instruction direction device Lasvdty d 9 8 6 Complete device SS s Status display device at completion wae 1 scan 4 Return to system 7 211 212 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the i
132. devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 179 9 2 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to read 10 word data from the area starting from D1000 in the local station station number 1 to the area starting from DO in the master station when XO is turned on in the following system configuration e Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F e Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW e M12 is the G P RIRD instruction executing flag Master station Local station CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RIRD request source Host station RIRD request target Target station XO M12 SW80 0 tt AF IF MOV KI Dio Mov H405 D102 Control data setting MOV K1000 D103 J MOV K10 Di4 e G RIRD U4 D100 DO MO J Dedicated instruction execution i Set G P RIRD instruction SET M12 executing flag to ON mo Perform process for receive Process upon completion of eM completion __ ______ f reception M Perform process for normal
133. error parameter parameter Number of automatic A value other than 1 to 10 is set B394 return stations setting in the number of automatic return Set the value within 1 to 10 O x error parameter stations parameter Please consult your local B395 System error E O x Mitsubishi representative Station number The station number is already in B396 already in use error use in the station information Set a unique number O x parameter parameter 298 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code are 3 3 A Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal A station station The station information parameter setting does not meet the following condition 16 x A 54 x B 88 x C lt o A 2304 Station information A The number of remote I O Set parameters meeting the B397 setting error a i O x stations condition described to the left parameter B The number of remote device stations C The number of intelligent device stations including local stations A value other than 1 to 4 is set as Number of occupied i the number of occupied stations PP B398 stations setting error K j Set the value within 1 to 4 O x in the station information parameter parameter Number of connected A value other than 1 to 64 is set B399 modules setting error in the number of connected Set the value within 1 to 64 O x
134. flag X107B RX1B Remote READY X107C RX1C to to Reserved X10BF RX5F 235 uoneinbiyuoo Wa skS p ZOL UONeIS 99149 s OWSY E pue UOIEIS 19 Se UBEMIEg SUONeEDIUNWWOD Jo ajdwexg ZOL b Remote output RY Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 407 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Device Station number Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal Y1000 to Y100F 1604 352 RYO to RYF 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1010 to Y101F 1614 353 RY10 to RY1F Y1020 to Y102F 1624 354 RY20 to RY2F 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1030 to Y103F 1634 355 RY30 to RY3F Y1040 to Y104F 1644 356 RY40 to RY4F 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1050 to Y105F 1654 357 RY50 to RY5F Y1060 to Y106F 1664 358 RYO to RYF 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y1070 to Y107F 1674 359 RY10 to RY1F Y1080 to Y108F 1684 360 RY20 to RY2F 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y1090 to Y109F 1694 361 RY30 to RY3F Y10A0 to Y10AF 16Ay 362 RY40 to RY4F 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y10B0 to Y10BF 16By 363 RY50 to RY5F The assignment by each signal of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 No of occupied Station No 4 No of occupied ___ CPU module Master station _ stations 3 ___ Stations 3 ___ a Buffer memory l a 1
135. gt Page 311 Section 11 4 CC Link Diagnostics Start Monitor Stop Monitor m EMaster ST i Intell ST Return to the original Prev Next Display All Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information m Connecting Station Master station 0 Data Link Status Data linking MasterST Operation Status Normal Master Station Switch Master station FA Used Line CH 0 CH 0 Side Line Status Normal CH 1 Side Line Status Line Type Twist Single Bus Link Scan Time Max 2ms Min 2ms Current 2ms Related Eunctions lt lt Legend Close 5 amp amp B Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link Sheet 3 CC Link Ver 2 compatible module Since the master local module is a CC Link Ver 2 compatible module the number of points per system can be increased up to 8192 for RX RY and the number of words is up to 2048 for RWr RWw On a station basis the number of points can be increased up to 896 for RX RY and the number of words is 128 for RWr RWw A CC Link Ver 2 compatible system can be larger than a CC Link Ver 1 compatible system sainpoy jeoo7Jelsey Z Ex Maximum number of points of the remote input RX and remote output RY CC Link Ver 2 8192 points CC Link Ver 1 2048 points 19 4 Prevention of a system failure a Continuation of commu
136. hardware test a O O detected Mitsubishi representative e Check if the terminating resistor provided with the master local module is connected between the DA and DB terminals and A hardware communication execute the hardware test BA14 Error hardware test a O O circuit error has been detected again If the same error persists after taking the above action please consult your local Mitsubishi representative A hardware error has been Please consult your local BA15 Error hardware test ane O O detected Mitsubishi representative Check if the terminating resistor provided with the master local module is connected between the DA and DB terminals and A hardware communication execute the hardware test BA16 and BA17 Error hardware test ae O O circuit error has been detected again If the same error persists after taking the above action please consult your local Mitsubishi representative BA19 Corresponding station The target station of the line test Check the cables and the target o y error cannot be communicated station A communication failure has BA1B Error in all stations occurred in all stations during Check the cables O x execution of the line test 1 304 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code ore f Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal A station station Please consult your local BA1E t
137. i Device Remote output RY Remote output RY Y1000 it 160H 352 RY0O i td 1 1 bod 1 1 t i i Y101F it 161H 353 RYIF i 1 ay i f a 1 he eyo i I 1 RY20 i Y1020 Station Station 1624 354 Station 5 1 Y103F No1 p r mm 1634 355 1 No 1 RY3F i Y1040 i 164H 356 RY40 1 1 s E M N 1 1 1 i 1 i bod I og 1 Y105F ra 165H 357 RY5F Remote output RY i 1 1060 it 166H 358 i RYOO 1 oa 1 oi z l 1 oa 1 i I r 1 Y107F bod 167H 359 RY1F 1 fe Fz log Fy aes 1 I 1 i es H I Yaso Station station 4280 ____i_s tation P2 y4o9F No 4 i o NCA 169 y 4 NOs aF l L2 a LLL 169H 361 ER RYSF Y10A0 ei 16AH 362 ro RY40 I tot DE 1 Y10BF 16BH 363 i i RY5E E eee tee eee ae DS tactic st sateen E EEr CPU module Remote station Remote output Device Module name 7 Signal name RY Y1000 RY00 to to Reserved Y1017 RY17 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1018 RY18 Initial data processing completion flag Y1019 RY19 Initial data setting request flag Y101A RY1A Error reset request flag 236 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CPU module Remote station Device Module name Remote output Signal name RY Y101B RY1B to AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN to Reserved Y105F RY5F
138. if the SD LED and RD LED oe ae ai Correct the wiring short circuit incorrect wiring on the faulty station are flashing poor connection and coexistence of different When faulty stations occur cables 3 Do a transmission distance seguentially to one end onithe s transmission path check cables Correct the wiring station to station distance transmission cable and FG connected to faulty stations close A2 5 Cable or other terminal grounding meet the tothe masterstation parts specifications Check if terminating resistors are connected to the both ends in the POE CC Link system Connect terminating Are terminating resistors i resistors to the both c nnected Check if a station with built in ends in the CC Link terminating resistor is connected system other than at both ends in the CC Link system Are modules on the faulty station Power on the module Is the power on and is the on Power supply for j i A2 6 Sor applied voltage within the Apply the voltage communications wi 5 Is the applied voltage within the a re specified range a within the specified A station specified range range cannot perform Ss data link Keep the transmission cable away from the Check if the transmission cable is power cable Keep a away from the power cable distance of 100mm or more is recommended Is the transmission cable free Check if the FG terminal is A2 7 Noise from noise grounded separately from the Ground
139. is set at STOP RESET RUN STOP RUN CO C STOP CD QU61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST SD RD ERR LERR STATION e No oE QU61BT11N RUN LRUN NST SMST SD RD ERR LERR STATION No If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET If all the stations are connected with CC Link dedicated cables 2 Set the station number setting switches on the master station to 0 3 Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master station from 5 to 9 When setting the switch from 5 to 9 set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation CF Page 21 CHAPTER 2 4 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system 87 S89 U17 1 S 9 BUI J YY S L G9 88 QJ61BT11N RUN i LIL RUN MST D LIS MST SD RD ERR JL ERR E ON Flashing OFF When the test is completed QJ61BT11N RUN i HEL RUN MST O SMST SD E CORD ERR LERR E on Flashing OFF When the test is not completed error on all the stations QJ61BT11N RUN O MST E SD ERR i E ON DL Flashing OFF The line test 1 is started During the test the MST LED on the master station flashes After the line test 1 is completed the L RUN LED or MST LED on the master station turns on e When the test is completed L RUN LED ON
140. link stops Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous Delay Time Setting 0 Station Information Setting Refer to Page 160 Section 8 3 3 1 c a Operation Setting Item Setting details Data Link Faulty Station Setting Clear the input data Case of CPU STOP Setting Refresh Block Data Assurance per Station Disable the setting 159 dnyeys yur 09 oNewolny E E g suoljoun au Jo suopeaddy injesq eg b Refresh device setting e QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU CPU module side Direction Master station local station side X1000 to X17FF lt RX0O to RX7FF Y1000 to Y17FF gt RYO to RY7FF W1E00 to W1EFF con RWr0 to RWrFF W1F00 to W1FFF gt RWw0 to RWwFF SB0600 to SBO7FF lt SB0000 to SB01FF SW0600 to SW07FF lt SW0000 to SW01FF e Basic model QCPU Basic model QCPU side Direction Master station local station side X400 to X7FF lt RXO to RX3FF Y400 to Y7FF gt RYO to RY3FF W600 to W67F lt RWr0 to RWr7F W70 to W77F gt RWw0 to RWw7F SB0200 to SBO3FF lt SB0000 to SB01FF SW0200 to SWO3FF lt SW0000 to SW01FF c Specification of a buffer memory size for an intelligent device station in the station information setting Item Setting details Send buffer 64 words Receive buffer 64 words Automatic update buffer 128 words 2 Default parameter settings when CC Link is automatically starte
141. local station station number 1 when XO is turned on in the following system configuration e Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F e Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW e M13 is the G P RIWT instruction executing flag Master station Local station CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RIWT request source Host station RIWT request target Target station X0 M13 SW80 0 7 it r g AF MoV K Diol MOV H405 D102 J Control data setting Mov K1000 D103 J MOV K10 D104 LG RIWT U4 D100 DO Mo J Dedicated instruction execution Set G P RIWT instruction E LSE mye executing flag to ON MO Perform process for receive _ Process upon completion of Hi 1_ completion reception My Perform process for normal Process upon normal completion 1_ completion of dedicated instruction MI Perform process for abnormal Process upon abnormal end of i LON Ms ete ces ee dedicated instruction RST M13 J Set G P RIWT instruction executing flag to OFF END 186 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 4 G P RIRCV The G P RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with the intelligent device station and reads data from the buffer memory areas of the specified intelligent device station The instruction is available for modules that have a handshake signal
142. module CPU module Buffer memory G P RIRD Receive buffer for the first station 1 The buffer memory in the local station or the device in the CPU module is accessed 2 The data specified in the control data is stored in the receive buffer for the first station sealy Aioway Jeyng Z xipueddy Master station Local station first station CPU module CPU module 4 Buffer memory gt Send buffer Device S P RIWT for the first station 4 3 The data to be written to the buffer memory in the local station or to the device in the CPU module is stored in the send buffer for the first station 4 The buffer memory in the local station or the device in the CPU module is accessed 339 9 Automatic update buffer This area stores data automatically updated when transient transmission communications using the automatic update buffer is performed with an AJ65BT R2 N The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT R2 N is set using the network parameter lt gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Ex Communications using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 N first station CPU module Buffer memory Automatic update iF Automatic G P RIFR update buffer Automatic update 2 for the first D k station buffer memory 1 The automatic update buffer for the first station is accessed 2 Th
143. module in a MELSECNET H remote I O station In a MELSECNET H remote I O station an event issuance for the interrupt program and dedicated instructions cannot be used 4 When using a master local module in a redundant system For the precautions refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 Installing the Module 1 How to install the module The precautions when a master local module is handled from the time it is unpacked until it is installed are described on this page For more details on the module installation refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection 2 Handling precautions The following are the precautions for when a master local module is handled Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module case and terminal block since it is made from resin Do not remove the printed circuit board of each module from its case Doing so may cause a failure in the module e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Solderless ter
144. modules the number of modules and base units applicable to the master local module refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used Note the following when the master local module is used with a CPU module Some restrictions apply to the version of a CPU module depending on the functions of the master local module used Check the version of the CPU module in the appendix of this manual gt Page 397 Appendix 6 Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Mount a module within the number of I O points for the CPU module If the number of slots is within the available range the module can be mounted on any slot D ooo occ When using a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module eeeeeseeeeeeevnee eee eceoeeoeeeeeeeeeeae eee ecee eee eaeeeeeeeee eee eee eae eee 2 Connecting a master local module ina MELSECNET H remote I O station For the MELSECNET H remote O station the number of modules and base units applicable to the master local module refer to the following Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network Note the following when the master local module is used with the MELSECNET H remote 1 0 station Some res
145. occurrence of noise is reduced ee transmission speed Repair or replace the Failure of a slave Do slave stations normally Replace modules on the faulty B2 4 module on the faulty station operate station and check for operation stati ion 283 UONE S SAR S e JO UOROSUUOOSIP 0 ENP SWA GOlg pZ SWI GOld JO SSI LL 11 2 2 Problems due to cyclic data error 1 Problems due to cyclic data error in a remote I O station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Check if the devices have i AE Correct the device setting been set within the range Check if no device overlaps with ones used in programs Have refresh devices RX or in other networks RY SB and SW been Note that the number of Set the devices so that they correctly set in the network points of 8 point or 16 point do not overlap with ones parameter I O modules per station is 32 used in programs and in points fixed except the other networks case when the remote I O station points setting is configured Refresh data Are the auto refresh to C1 1 refresh devices using the area Check the program network parameter and the 5 Cyclic data Check the refresh devices Execute either of the refresh refresh process using a cannot be set in the network processes program Un GO or read written f parameter FROM TO instructions executed at the same time Check the program Acce
146. of the specified device because the device change may not be recognized syrejap Bunjes ZEZ uolels Jejsep 104 sBunjes sejoweleg Z lex A request for the interrupt is issued by turning on RX10 UO Since change of RX10 may not be read H L PLS G225 0 this cannot be specified as interrupt condition When the interrupt cannot be performed If the changing time of the device used for the interrupt condition is shorter than the transmission delay time the device change cannot be detected e When using data for an interrupt program When an interrupt program is being executed RX RY RWr RWw are not auto refreshed to the device of a CPU module Therefore directly access to the buffer memory of a master local module by using Intelligent function module device Un GD e When data link is faulty a request for the interrupt to a CPU module is not issued 113 7 4 Parameter Settings for a Local Station and Standby Master Station This section describes the parameter settings when a master local module is used as a local station or standby master station 7 4 1 114 1 Point Setting method Open the Network Parameter window from a programming tool SX Project window lt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt CC Link Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 Boards Blank No Setting TT Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window
147. procedure registration instruction SBOOOD 5E0y b13 e Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5E 5E5y b14 e Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F 5E5 b15 b Link special registers SWs Link special registers SWs related to the remote device station initialization procedure registration are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses e Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 6144 to 617p e Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SWOO5F 65F e Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 1 SW0110 710 to Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 16 SW011F 71Fy 7 Replacement of a master local module in failure When replacing a master local module in failure with a new master local module do not use a module with a serial number first five digits of 08031 or earlier If a module with a serial number first five digits of 08031 or earlier is used by mistake and the specification of remote device station to be initialized is performed each station operates as listed below Master station remote device P Operation station The setting of Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 is Master sta
148. reasons such as power off to continue the data link in a normal station The automatic return function allows data link to be automatically performed again when the slave station that has been disconnected from data link returns to the normal state Using these functions prevents the entire system from going down when one station goes down Because no process is required for a return time between an error and a return can be shortened Continues data link excluding faulty stations Master station Recovering from the error Master station Point If a cable is disconnected data link cannot be performed because the terminating resistors are also disconnected The ERR LED turns on Master station Local station Local station Remote station Remote station g g 0000 000000000 0000 000000000 a m Doood GO0000000 Doood GO0000000 ua _ Disconnection 128 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Setting method a Setting the slave station cut off function No setting is required in the master local module b Setting the automatic return function Set the number of slave stations that can be returned per link scan in Automatic Reconnection Station Count of the network parameter gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 Ageiley weysks y Bulroidw 7g UIN JOJ ONEWO Ne pUe JJO Nd UONEJS SARIS Z S 129 8 2 2 Setti
149. reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system When the reflection is completed data link is automatically started at master local modules Point To change the settings for a master station or a slave station stop data link at the master station _ gt Page 320 Section 11 4 5 When change the settings for a slave station change the settings for the master station accordingly 96 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 7 3 2 Setting details Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 Boards Blank No Setting Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window TSS Master station SE Master Station Data Link Type O TCYS Net vers Mode po Po ESS po OO comse See E A _ oatiytine seting OOOOoooooooooy y a e S c 1 This item is automatically set by the CC Link configuration window Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Setif itis needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Please input the start I O No where the CC Link is connected in 16 point unit prea ese Mepegemm cer ex es const 7 Item Description Setting range Select the number of master local modules number of modules to be mounted on one base unit that are set using a Number of Modules programming tool Do not include the number of master local modules that are set using the dedicated instruction G P RLPAS
150. remote net additional mode In the system configuration of the program example the assignment is the same as that in the remote net Ver 1 mode except for buffer memory addresses of data storage locations L gt Page 48 Section 3 6 4 Page 51 Section 3 6 5 a Remote I O RX RY Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 407 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station f Buffer memory address Remote I O Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RX RY X1000 to X100F E0y 224 RYO to RYF 1 QJ61BT11N X1010 to X101D E1y 225 RY10 to RY1D CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address p Remote I O Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RX RY Y1000 to Y100F 1604 352 RX0 to RXF 1 QJ61BT11N Y1010 to Y101D 1614 353 RX10 to RX1D 256 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CPU module Master station Local station CPU module Device 1 Buffer memory Buffer memory f Device Remote input RX Remote input RX Io i boy X1000 TS meme Station E _ X1000f Station i No 1 gm No 1 Moo a No 4 XD oii l Elh 1 X101D i i i ie Remote outp Remote output RY I i Li 1 i 1000 Station Station Station 160 1000 Station No 1 E No 1 No 1 i No 1
151. scan time of a CC Link system How to calculate the link scan time of when a master local module is in the remote net mode and remote I O net mode is explained 1 In the remote net mode LS BT 27 NI x 4 8 NW x 9 6 N x 30 ni x 4 8 nw x 9 6 TR ST EX RT F us BT Constant transmission speed Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BT 51 2 12 8 3 2 1 6 0 8 NI Last station number in A B and C The number of occupied stations is included but a reserved station is excluded The value should be multiples of 8 A Last station number in a remote I O station B Last station number in a remote device station The number of occupied stations is included C Last station number in local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations The number of occupied stations is included NW Last station number in B and C The number of occupied stations is included but a reserved station is excluded The value should be multiples of 8 Last 1 to 8 9 to 16 17to 24 25to32 33to 40 41to48 49to56 57 to 64 station No NI NW 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 N Number of connected modules A reserved station is excluded ni a b c A reserved station is excluded a Total number of stations occupied by a remote I O station b Total number of stations occupied by a remote device station c Total number of stations occupied by l
152. set Operation Setting Case of CPU STOP Setting Can be set Can be set Block Data Assurance per Station Can be set Cannot be set Master Station Can be set Can be set e Master Station Duplex Function Type Master station Extension Base spear Sion Can be set Cannot be set e Standby Master Station e Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Can be set Can be set Mode Remote Net Additional Mode ae Remote I O Net Mode Can be set Cannot be set settings Refresh device auto refresh Can be set Cannot be set Retry Count Can be set Can be set Automatic Reconnection Station Count Can be set Can be set Standby Master Station No Can be set Cannot be set PLC Down Select Can be set Can be set Scan Mode Setting Can be set Can be set Delay Time Setting Can be set Can be set Station Information Remote Station Points Can be set Cannot be set Setting Other than the above Can be set Can be set Remote Device Station Initial Setting Can be set Cannot be set Interrupt Settings Can be set Cannot be set Number of modules that can be set 1 1 Parameter change while a CPU module is set to RUN Cannot be changed Can be changed 14 For the number of modules that can be set refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used 219 dwex Bunjes 1 z wesed ajdwex weibolg 4 86 Lasvd1y d 9 8 6 220 b Network parameter of a programming tool e Do not use a programming tool to set network parameters for the modules wher
153. set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw Ver 2 compatible area of a master local module are transferred 1 Number of refresh points All points for the start station number to last station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station are automatically assigned Page 51 Section 3 6 5 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 _ gt Page 335 Appendix 2 4 The other contents are same as those for Remote Input RX described the above Same as Remote Input RX Same as Remote Output RY Same as Remote Register RWr Same as Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Special Register SW Set the start device where SB and SW are transferred By setting these items SB and SW can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a program Blank or the following range e Device M L B D W R SB or ZR M B D W and SB for a MELSECNETH H remote I O station e Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R SW or ZR M B D W and SW for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H
154. sheet A check sheet which is useful for performing troubleshooting is created through a wizard and with reference to the Open Field Network CC Link Troubleshooting Guide 1 Operating procedure 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window XW Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Double click Create Check Sheet on the bottom of the window If Create Check Sheet is not displayed on the bottom of the window click the _ Related tunctions gt gt button on the bottom left corner of the window Related Functions lt lt Legend Close Loop Test Status Logging Double click the icon 3 The Check Sheet Creation Wizard window appears Check Sheet Creation Wizard Check Sheet Creation Wizard Using this wizard enables you to create a check sheet of system configuration and settings which users must grasp before CC Link trouble shooting This wizard consists of the Following procedures 1 Wizard format selection 2 Master station information check Master type check Master version check Module mount status check Mode check Parameter setting check Link data access method and transmission speed check 3 Linked station information check Connected linked station count check Occupied station count check CC Link version and transmission speed check 4 Transmission cable check 5 Terminal resistor check 6 Grounding method check 7 Check sheet creation lt Back 4 Configure sett
155. shel aie eee 21 Serial NuMbeP ys 400 5 45 a ataei a we eed Ves 413 Serial number display 0 23 Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window 55 97 102 106 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station Phe Dt ais Motch E E E ED NEES 321 Setting of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master Station deaa aar an ala inca iat Oke nis Pan oad Le 130 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station 020000 eee eee 131 Setting Sheet 0 aeietapiocd hod bho araa aA 407 Slave station 0 0 0 ce ee 14 Slave station cut off 0 0 0 0 0000000008 128 Slave station offset size information 335 U Special Register SW 22005 100 Special Relay SB 2020005 100 Specification of remote device station to be initialized go NE Aude ahh atta dS Andi ani dips sin ash a oe TAA ele 155 Specifications 2000 eee eee 24 Standby master function 135 Standby master station 2 2 0 0 0 eee 14 Standby Master Station No 100 Stat VO Nosene pepe ag eda Ada ered 97 Station Information Setting 100 102 Station information setting sheet 411 Station NOn ae eo Bed aaa won dese eet so 104 106 Station number setting 82 Station number setting switch 22 Station Type
156. start station number of the Invalid station n lt Example of when a station module B38D specification error O x number other than the start Do not set a station number not parameter i i station number is set gt set in the parameter For a module that occupies 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 a bit corresponding to a station number other than the station number 5 is on PRN The total size of the Communication buffer o communication buffer set in the PERR B38E assignment error ie Set the total size within 4k words x station information parameter parameter has exceeded 4k words F The total size of the automatic Automatic update update buffer set in the station a B38F buffer assignment Set the total size within 4k words O x information parameter has error parameter exceeded 4k words Standby master station A value other than 1 to 64 is set B390 specification error in the standby master station Set the value within 1 to 64 O x parameter specification parameter Number of retries A value other than 1 to 7 is set in a B391 setting error Set the value within 1 to 7 O x the number of retries parameter parameter Operation specification A value other than 0 and 1 is set B392 when CPU is down in the operation specification Set 0 or 1 O x error parameter when CPU is down parameter A value other than 0 and 1 is set Scan mode setting i B393 in the scan mode setting Set 0 or 1 O x
157. station 128 to 4096 words S5 75 Send buffer size S5 76 Receive buffer size Automatic update S5 77 buffer size The default values are send buffer size 404 receive buffer size 404 and automatic update buffer size 80 4 4 Configure settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting data starting from the smallest station number 2 The total size of the communication buffers must be within 10004 4096 word Specify the size of data to be communicated plus seven words for the communication buffers sizes Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end 3 The total size of the automatic update buffer must be within 1000 4096 word Specify the necessary size for each intelligent device station as the automatic update buffer size Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end Lasvdty d 9 8 6 209 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RLPASET instruction CPU module Master station Command G P RLPASET Network parameter Execution result 3 Data link start gt The network parameters set in S1 to S5 are transferred to the master station specified by Un The master station analyzes the settings of the network parameters UNa If the network parameter settings are correct the data link is started 4 The device specifie
158. station and reconnected both of the master station and standby master station will perform master operation because the right of controlling data link is transferred to the standby master station therefore communications cannot be normally performed By powering off the master station and reconnecting the terminal block and powering on the master station the master station is reconnected as standby master station operation therefore communications can be normally performed f The status of an LED when the right of controlling data link is transferred to a standby master station When the master station goes down and the standby master station starts to take in control of data link the ERR LED on the standby master station flashes The station number of the standby master station is changed from the one set in the parameters to the station number 0 and the standby master station is regarded that it is uonounj saysew Aqpuels S Z g Ayqey wejsks ey Bulroidu 7g not connected Data link is normally performed To prevent this situation set the standby master station as an error invalid station g Number of points and range of devices to back up data using a program The number of points and range of devices where data from a master station station operating as a master station to a standby master station station operating as a standby master station are backed up using a program vary depending on the system h If an error is d
159. supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station QOOJCPU 1 05 QOOCPU 0 86 Q01CPU 0 80 Q02CPU 0 75 0 68 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU oto 538 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 28 QOOUJCPU QOO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 88 0 85 QO02UCPU 0 55 0 43 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 18 0 16 392 APPENDICES Local station 1 The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station QOO0JCPU 1 27 QOOCPU 1 04 Q01CPU 0 93 Q02CPU 0 94 0 87 02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU a eer 3 an 0 38 A QOOUJCPU QO0OUCPU Q01UCPU 0 91 0 85 Q02UCPU 0 73 0 60 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 19 0 17 4 A Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU cannot be set as a local station e KM2 KM3 KM4 Constant The value is the same regardless of execution of the block guarantee of cyclic data per station When a master local module is mounted on a main base unit Constant KM3 x 10 File registers File registers KM2 x 10 R ZR ona R ZR on a KM4 CPU type memory card memory card are used are not used
160. the following time If the time exceeds the one listed below a timeout error occurs in each o w w Ae os station sc o gt Transmission speed Sequence scan time au O 5 0 10Mbps 50ms So 5Mbps 50ms N a 2 5Mbps 100ms S S gt 625kbps 400ms 5 is 0 156kbps 800ms 8 5 98 ao Sa b When an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is connected as a local station in the synchronous mode Pay attention to the following notes when an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is connected as a local station in a system with a QJ61BT11N as a master station e When an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is connected as a local station adjust the sequence scan time of the local station side so that the sequence scan time of the CPU module in the local station becomes longer than ST For ST refer to Page 366 Appendix 4 1 e When an A 1S J61BT11 is connected as a local station use XnC as an interlock of the FROM TO instructions on the local station side Point When an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is connected as a local station in a system with a QJ61BT11N as a master station using the asynchronous mode is recommended To use the synchronous mode pay attention to the notes described above 163 3 Setting method Select the asynchronous mode or synchronous mode in Scan Mode Setting of the network parameter gt Page 96 Section 7 3 1 4 Data flows in the asynchronous mode and synchronous mode Data flows in the asynchronous mod
161. the modules Ex Setting the station numbers 1 to 3 number of occupied stations 3 as reserved stations lt Reserved station gt Slave station Slave station Master station Number of occupied stations 3 Number of occupied stations 2 Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 4 Station No 5 Station numbers set for the modules Point if an empty station number is set without setting a reserved station the station is detected as a faulty station in Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 The station numbers need to be consecutive but wiring does not need to be performed in the order of station number 82 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 How to set the station number in the master local module 1 Set the station number using the station number setting switches on the master local module CF Page 21 CHAPTER 2 QU6IBT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST Set the tenth digit of the station No using this switch ERR LERR Set the unit digit of the station No using this switch 2 Resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system reflects the set station number 3 Ifthe ERR LED is on or flashing check if the station number is not used for other stations ERR LED Description The station number 0 is already in use Check the station number of the stati
162. the status immediately before the error occurrence may be displayed under Intelligent Module Information For a master local module the following information is displayed Item Description Host station operation status Displays the operating status of the host station Host data link status Displays the data link status of the host station Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 Displays data link status of each station 0 Normal 1 Data link error Line status SW0090 Displays line status Master station information SB0070 Displays data link status Standby master station information SB0071 Displays whether a standby master station exists Scan mode setting information SB0072 Displays the setting status of the scan mode 291 S8PO9 JOB YOSYO O MOH L E LL s po9 JOU EL 292 Item Description Operation specification when CPU is down status SB0073 Displays the operating status if a CPU module goes down set by the parameter Reserved station specified status SB0074 Displays the status of the reserved station setting configured by the parameter Error invalid station specified status SB0075 Displays the status of the error invalid station setting configured by the parameter Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 Displays the status of the temporary error invalid station setting
163. the system 8 Set the parameters on the master station using a programming tool Create a project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under Series Select Q20UDH under Type W Project gt New Series ocru Q mode Type o20u0H X Project Type simple Project v T Use Label Language adder v L oe 9 Open the Network Parameter window and check the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window On GX Works2 only Project window gt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Check the checkbox Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules v Boards Blank No Setting Start I O No Operation Setting Type Master Station Data Link Type Mode 10 Select 1 for Number of Modules Set the field to 1 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules A Boards Blank No Setting V Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window Ca 3 Op ing Master Sta Link Type aia OUT Total Madila Cannertead 1 65 ajdwexy uonesiedo t 66 11 Configure the settings as follows When using GX Developer refer to the section When the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is not checked gt Page 106 Section 7 3 2
164. the terminals GND terminal of the power separately system re Take noise reduction Reduce the transmission speed measures and check if the frequency of ak Reduce the occurrence of noise is reduced ict transmission speed Repair or replace the Failure of a slave Do slave stations normally Replace modules on the faulty A2 9 f module on the faulty station operate station and check for operation station Check if the standby master AR Reboot the system so Isn t the standby master station is not set as a station Standby master i i that the master station A2 10 station controlling the data controlling the data link by the station link CC Link diagnostics of the master station will control the data link To the next page 279 UONE S SARIS e JO UONOBULODSIP 0 ENP SWA GOld L Z LL SWI GOld JO S SI ZL Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Data link cannot be performed in the entire system occasionally Cable or other Are cables and connectors Check cables between the master A3 1 securely connected and do f Correct the wiring parts Ate station and slave stations they meet specifications Check if the sequence scan time is within the allowable range Isn t the sequence scan time 10Mbps 50ms Set the asynchronous Parameter f A3 2 stii long in the synchronous 5Mbps 50ms mode or reduce the set
165. to 36By PA 39Cy to 39Fy si 3D0y to 3D3 768 to 771 820 to 823 872 to 875 924 to 927 976 to 979 io 304 to 3074 33 338 to 33By 4g 36Cy to 36Fy a6 3A0 to 3A3y 52 3D4y to 3D74 772 to 775 824 to 827 876 to 879 928 to 931 980 to 983 ji 308 to 30B4 54 33Cy to 33F4 a7 370 to 373 50 3A4y to 3A74 ay 3D8 to 3DBy 776 to 779 828 to 831 880 to 883 932 to 935 984 to 987 p 30Cy to 30Fy 35 340 to 3434 ss 374 to 3774 5i 3A8 to 3ABy a 3DCy to 3DFy 780 to 783 832 to 835 884 to 887 936 to 939 988 to 991 i3 310 to 3134 oe 344 to 3474 a6 378 to 37By by 3ACy to 3AF o o 784 to 787 836 to 839 888 to 891 940 to 943 333 seaiy Mow Jeyng Z xipueddy b Remote register RWw Buffer gt Buffer Buffer Buffer h Buffer Station TE Station ne Station ae Station aaa Station ene number y number S number y number y number a address address address address address n 1E0p to 1E34 i 214 to 2174 Bis 2484 to 24B4 j 27Cy to 27Fy ba 2B0 to 2B34 480 to 483 532 to 535 584 to 587 636 to 639 688 to 691 gt 1E4 to 1E7y is 218 to 21By i 24Cy to 24Fy ie 280 to 2834 2 2B4y to 2B74 484 to 487 536 to 539 588 to 591 640 to 643 692 to 695 4 1E8 to 1EBy i 21Cy to 21Fy S 250p to 2534 jj 284 to 2874 e 2B8 to 2BBy 488 to 491 540 to 543 592 to 595 644 to 647 696 to 699 4 1ECy to 1EFy 17 2204 O 2234 30 2544 O 2574 43 2884 to 28B 56 2BCy to 2BFy
166. to b3 b2 bi b0 68D Other station Swoosc 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 switch change SWO008D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 O SWO08E status swoosE 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 SEH SWOO8F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 SWOO8F 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 68Fy Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted swo090 a ne a is stored ine status Norma x x 690 1 Data link disabled disconnected 357 SMS s13 s1691 jeloeds yur Z E xIpueddy SMS suajsiBey jeloeds u7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a transient transmission error has occurred in other stations is stored 0 No transient transmission error Swo0094 s D 1 Transient transmission error 6941 b15 b14 b13 b12 to Swo0095 16 15 14 13 to transient status SW0097 64 696p 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers sw0097 Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 6974 Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Even when the transient transmission is retried using a dedicated instruction the error will be d
167. tool Eight characters Data Link Faulty Station Setting Case of CPU STOP Setting Select whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station lt _ gt Page 121 Section 7 5 Page 131 Section 8 2 3 Select whether to refresh or clear compulsorily output sending data to a slave station when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP lt gt Page 121 Section 7 5 Page 133 Section 8 2 4 e Clear input data not checked e Hold input data checked Default Clear input data not checked e Refresh not checked e Clear compulsorily checked Default Refresh not checked Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device Select whether or not to read the model name of slave stations with the connected device autodetection function To read the model name of the slave stations with the connected device auto detection function refer to the following e iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual Do not to read the model name of the slave stations not checked e Read the model name of the slave stations checked Default Do not to read the model name of the slave station not checked Number of Occupied stations Expanded Cyclic Setting The settings are not required when a master local module is used as a master station Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure the integrity of cyclic data for each slave station lt _ 5 Page 150 Section 8 2 6
168. transmission a Set Continue in PLC Down In the message transmission 2 Select to execute the message function a stop error in the CPU Age module has beemdetecicd transmission while the stop error has occurred in the CPU module Increase the value for Monitoring With the message transmission ae ee eee time setting SW0009 If the error function a communication occurs again check the request timeout has occurred ee destination module and cables Data link stop SB0002 s i ee ya Stop data link after completion of executed during the message Bas O x sees message transmission transmission es Set Continue in PLC Down In the message transmission 7 Select to execute the message function a stop error in the CPU aie p module has been detected transmission while the stop error has occurred in the CPU module Execute the message transmission function again With the message transmission If the same error persists the function abnormal data were master module or remote device O x received station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 307 SI p09 JOM ZT ELL s po9 JOU L Error code Delectability k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Multiple peripherals tried to A access the same message Perform the processes one by BC57 Multiple requests error
169. used for the instruction is specified ido When the number of read points n3 is set beyond the setting range When the station number specified by n1 does not exist 199 Ysly d 9 96 9 6 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to read 10 word data from the offset value 1004 of automatic update buffer in the master station 400 in the intelligent device station to the area starting from DO when XO is turned on in the following system configuration e Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F e Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RIFR request source Host station i Automatic Automatic to m update buffer update bufferi 5 Dedicated instruction execution E GP RIFR U4 K1 H100 DO K10 END 200 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 7 G P RITO The G P RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the target station The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RITO H _crto n m v 0 m Command GPRITO _ eRT a H Applicable device r Link direct I
170. x 1 3 x 2 20 x 1 3 x 2 20 3 x 2 10 36ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 10 10 x 1 1 46ms 10 x 1 1 46ms 36ms 20 x 1 3 x 3 20 x 1 3 x 2 20 x 1 3 x 2 10 Max value 20 3 x 3 10 39ms 10 x 1 1 49ms 10 x 1 1 46ms 36ms 378 APPENDICES 5 Master station lt gt local station Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station RX lt local station RY master station RWr lt local station RWw This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a local station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a master station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time SL Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up m Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchron
171. 143 The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations 7431 Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether a CC Link version matches between the parameter settings and the modules on slave stations is stored 0 Normal 1 Mismatch error Example of a mismatch error SW0144 aH Installation Parameter Ver 2 compatible remote device station Ver 1 compatible remote device station SW0145 745p CC Link ver Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station installation para o swo146 Meter matching b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bl bO gasp SPUS SW0144 15 44 143 to 4 3 2 4 Sw0145 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 swo1a7 swor4s 34 aT swo147 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted The mode set to a system is stored SW0148 Parameter 0 Remote net Ver 1 mode o O x 7484 mode 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net Ver 2 mode The mode set to the host station is stored SW0149 Host parameter 0 Remote net Ver 1 mode 7494 mode 1 Remote net additional mode o S 2 2 Remote net Ver 2 mode 363 SMS s13 s1691 jeloeds yur Z E xIpueddy SMS suajsiBay jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejay elseds yu xIpueddy Availability
172. 1BT11N QX10 QY10 Start O number X Y00 to X Y1F X20 to X2F Y30 to Y3F Peete ee ee a Terminating resistor AJ65BTB2 16T output module AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote I O station Remote I O station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 ajdwexy uonesiedo 17 Terminating resistor 59 2 Plan the device assignment Point The status of a device assignment can be checked on GX Works2 by setting information of a slave station on the CC Link configuration window on GX Worksz2 lt gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 a Miew gt Docking Window gt Device Reference Master Local Start I O No e Stave Station List C Link Device List F Display Detailed Configuration Informati Display Option CSV File Output Remote Input RX A Remote Output RY a Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw a Target STA Host STA Target STA Target STA Host STA Target STA EU Explanation Perea STA ee Explanation a Explanation Re real STAt oe Explanation i 1000 va wron powa 1001 Y1 RYL RW v1002 Y2 RYZ RWW2 RxO al 1003 Y3 RYS RX1 y1004 Y4 RY4 RX2 1005 1 s RYS S RX3 Y11006 gt Y6 RYG RX4 1007 Y7 RY7 RXS Y1008 Ye RYS RX6 1009 hed RY9 RX7 Y100A YOA RYA w Y10008 YOR RYB w e Remote input
173. 2 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14 for station No 20 216 Dedicated instruction G P RLPASET Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the G P RLPASET instruction Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the G P RLPASET instruction Instruct to stop data link Turn the data link stop instruction off Instruct to stop refreshing Instruct to change parameters Clear completion status Slave station setting data communication and automatic update buffer assignment data Valid Total module connected 3 Retry count 3 times Automatic reconnection station count 1 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay time setting 0 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 3 To the next page CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data M303 3 i j r First station number 1 local station ee LMoV K100 DIO Send buffer 100 word MOV K100 D171 y First station number 1 local station 7 Receive buffer 100 word MOV KO D172 First station number 1 local station Automatic update buffer 0 word Parameter registration data li
174. 2 b Number of Modules fi T Boards Blank No Setting JV Set the station information in the CC Link configurati a m neers mo CC Link Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting sa Ste e Mode Setting Ver 1Mode z T Speed Z Link Scan Time Approx 77 ms Select CC Link Find Module My Favorites Staton no Model Name Station Type Verson oFSTA Ocad OPIN Remote Staton Ponts Reserves Invalid A Z Ei v m me 3 1 1 AN6S8TB2 16T Remote 1 0 Staton Ver 1 1Occupied Station Single 32 Points No Setting E AJ6SSBTB1 8T 8 points Transistor output 2 2 AJ658T82 1607 Remote 1 0 Station Ver 1 10ccupied Staton Single 32Ponnts No Setting E AJ65SBTB1 8T1 8 points Transistor output Em AJ65SBTB1 8TE 8 points Transistor output E AJ6SSBTB2 8T 8 points Transistor output E AJ65SBTB2 8T1 8 points Transistor output E AJ6SSBTB2N 8R 8 points Relay output Em AJ65SSBTB2N 8S 8 points Trac output 16 points Transistor output M Em AJ65SBTB1 16T1 _ 16 points Transistor output i Host Station lt STAHD Master SI Ven aust Berend Drag and drop the text Total STA 2 AIGSBTB2 1 AJGSBTB2 1 6T EDT ww 12 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started XX Online lt gt Write to PLC e LLL or power off on
175. 2 compatible slave station to an existing system consisting of Ver 1 compatible slave stations only Programs in the remote net Ver 1 mode can be used without change because RX RY RWr RWw data of a Ver 1 compatible slave station are stored in the Ver 1 compatible buffer memory areas Remote station A generic term for a remote I O station and a remote device station Link scan link scan time Time required for all stations in a system to transmit data The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests Local station A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local stations The station is controlled by programs in the CPU module or other equivalent modules on the station Disconnection Processing that stops data link if a data link error occurs Slave station A generic term for a remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Dedicated instruction An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules Standby master station A station that serves as a master station to continue communications if the master station fails Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Return Processing that restarts data link when a station recovers from an error 14 PACKING LIST
176. 2011 10 18 14 00 45 QozucPU Clear History Refresh Start 1 0 Start YO 000 Mount Position Main Base Slat No 1 1 Error and Solution 3 2 Module Information Item Information Action status Normal Data link status Data Linking Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Line status Normal Master station information Data link cont Standby master station information Not present Scan mode setting information Asynchronou Operation specification when CPU Stop Create CSV File 3 Item Description Displays error logs of modules Error History List For an error Ex Station number setting error that has occurred during the initial process in the CPU module the date and time of the error will be displayed as 0000 00 00 00 00 00 therefore error logs are not displayed in reverse chronological order Error and Solution Displays the details and the corrective action of an error selected under Error History List Intelligent Module Information 4 has occurred Displays the status of a master local module when an error selected under Error History List Create CSV Eile button Outputs module error logs in a CSV file 4 If an error that occurs simultaneously with a CC Link system error is selected
177. 45 44 43 42 41 40 5E5y 1509 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 5E6p 1510 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 5E7H 1511 7F TE 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 5E8 1512 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 5E9 1513 OF 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 SEA 1514 AF AE AD AC AB AA AQ A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 AO SEB 1515 BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO 5EC 1516 CF CE CD cc CB CA cg c8 C7 C6 c5 C4 C3 C2 C1 co 5EDH 1517 DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 5EE 1518 EF EE ED EC EB EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 SEF 1519 FF FE FD FC FB FA F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO 5FO 1520 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 5F 1 1521 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11A 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 5F24 1522 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 5F3 1523 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 5F4y 1524 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 5F5H 1525 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 5F6H 1526 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 5F7H 1527 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 5F8H 1528 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 5F9H 1529 19F
178. 5 CHE AD conversion comp RWIS CHE digital output val Aww AD conv enable prohibit CH RX6 CH AD conversion comp l RWG CH digital output val 1 Rww0 5 AD conv enable prohibit CH RX CH8 AD conversion comp Rw CH8 digital output val RwwOs AD conv enable prohibit CH RXS RWS Error code Rww0 7 AD conv enable prohibit CH R9 RWw08 RWO Rww0 8 EEPROM write error CHi set val check code RWB CD oc ooo ecco When a master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode In the system configuration of the program example the assignment is the same as that in the remote net Ver 1 mode except for buffer memory addresses of data storage locations gt Page 48 Section 3 6 4 Page 51 Section 3 6 5 The remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw of the AJESVBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN For details on the signals refer to the following Manual for the remote station used eeseeeeececeoceoseeeaoeseeeoseeeoeeeoeeeeeceeeeeeoeaeeceeeaseseeceaeeeceeseeaeeeeeee ee ee ee a Remote input RX Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 407 Appendix 8 1 1 uoneinByuoo wa skS Z OL 3 N m Pad 3 a o Q Q e 3 2 CPU module Master station Slave station 3 Q Buffer memory address
179. 8 1 10 1 Precautions for Programming This section describes precautions when creating a program for a master local module 1 Interlock program When creating a program to perform cyclic transmission create the program that can detect data link status in a slave station and interlock with the station Use Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 to detect data link status in a slave station 3 Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Also create an error handing program Ex Interlock method Assume that the start I O number of the master local module is 0000 and a refresh device is set as follows Number of Modules 1 Boards Blank No Setting M Set 1 Start I O No l 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station g Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode m 2 __ Total Module Connected 1 o Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register Rwr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Special Register SwW Refresh device 228 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING Devices used for the program example Device Description Device Description Other station data link status station XO Module error SW0080 0 number
180. 8 2 3 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station 131 8 2 4 Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPUliss tto STOP tine ne ea Bh Re bie ee ei he ee Re ee ee ee k 133 8 2 5 Standby master function 2 0 0006 0 135 8 2 6 Cyclic data aSSurance n orreec iai a e cece tenet e deen eees 150 8 3 Useful Applications of the Functions n saasaa uaau cece 154 8 3 1 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 154 8 3 2 Event issuance for the interrupt program 6 02 2 158 8 3 3 Automatic CC Linkistartup ccussoehudd reatie nu a a E SAAN 159 8 3 4 Reserved station function s sossarna rrara nrnna 162 8 3 5 Scan synchronization specification ssas ssaa cect 163 8 3 6 Error invalid station setting function 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 167 8 3 7 Temporary error invalid station setting function 000000 c eee eee eee 168 8 3 8 Datalink stop r start se erd naeran dahon ke edawdaaddeekd diye A E es 169 8 3 9 Remote I O station points setting remote net Ver 2 mode only 00000005 170 8 3 10 Master station duplication error canceling function 000 0c cece eee eee 172 10 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 173 9 1 List of Dedicated Instructions Applicable Devices and Precautions 173 52 ASIP YURI erre sir
181. 8 Points 8 Points Reserved to the last of consecutive remote I O stations Remote O station Station No 3 no of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Remote O station Station No 1 no of Station No 2 no of occupied stations 1 occupied stations 1 Master station 8 Points 8 Points Reserved Y07 to YOO 8 point output module 8 point output module 8 point output l i i l o7 to v00 l i i i i module 0 Point Reserved Station 8 Points e 8 Points 8 Points Reserved e 16 Points e 32 Points Default Varies depending on the number of occupied stations Reserved Err Invalid STA Select whether to set the slave station as a reserved station or an error invalid station L gt Page 162 Section 8 3 4 Page 167 Section 8 3 6 No Setting e Reserved Station Error Invalid Station Default No Setting Intelligent Buffer Set the size of buffer memory used to perform transient transmission with dedicated instructions This setting can be configured only for a Size word fot a F A local station intelligent device station and standby master station Send Set the size of send buffer to send data using the G P RIWT 0 64 to 4096 instruction Note that the total buffer size of Send and Receive for all slave stations must Receive Set the size of receive buffer to receive data using the G
182. 83 67 15 Check whether data link is being performed normally Turning on Y1000 of the master station on Device Buffer Memory Batch on the programming tool turns on RYO YO of the AJ65BTB2 16T station number 1 Turning on X0 of the AJ65BTB1 16DT station number 2 turns on X1020 of the master station Turn on Y1000 in the master station Device Name Y1000 C Buffer Memory Modify Value 2 MEI 32 82 64 Asc E 16 _oetats _ open _ save T C Set Value Reference Program Display format Y1000 Device B 1 Y1010 o ojol ojojo m olo om sloloo ololola slolo gt olojo ofojoN elolola elolo s o Y1020 68 4 Ol W Online lt gt Monitor lt gt Device Buffer Memory Batch RYO in the AJ65BTB2 16T is turned on MITSUBISHI MELBEG Fai Pi G Dies sn i ii St oi a eS EA gt P 4 i PW LRUN SD L ERR 1 e 90909 O0Oo0Oo F ON 1 eo0o00000000000000 I i 0123456789 ABCODEF Flashing 411 1 x 4 o OFF H s This LEDistumedon L L L aonana The LED may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status Point Ifthe operation above does not turn on the output Y of the slave station or the input X of the mas
183. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Led aries MELSEC Q CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under NCAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING For the operating status of each station after a communication failure in the data link refer to Page 121 Section 7 5 in this manual Failure to do so may result in
184. A File device function module Index Constant data System user i Others register JO O device register ZO Bit Word Bit Word UO GO K H S O D1 O D2 O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written Bae Un 5 0 to FEy 16 bit binary with three digits ee Within the range of the S Start number of the device in which control data is stored Si specified device Device name 7 Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is stored a specified device D2 Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of reading Within the range of the Bit i D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 4 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 175 HIH d 76 a Control data i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete S 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code Specify the station numbers of the master station local station S 1 Station number 0 to 64 User and intelligent device station Specify the type of the device to be accessed or the type of the Access code buffer memory Refer to S 2 User A
185. BTCU 68DAVN WE 2EEy 750 RWr2 WF 2EFy 751 RWr3 W10 2F0H 752 Rwr4 W11 2Fiy 753 RWr5 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W12 2F2y 754 RWr6 W13 2F3y 755 RWr7 W14 2F44 756 RWr8 W15 2F5 757 RWr9 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W16 2F6y 758 RWrA W17 2F7y 759 RWrB 238 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING The assignment by each data of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 Station No 4 No of occupied No of occupied _ _CPUmodule __ Master station __ stations 3 ___ Stations 3 i i Buffer memory ie i i Device Remote register RWr Remote register RWr ME i wo 2E0H 736 RWO i 3 i 5 In 1 i w3 i 2E3H 739 RWr3 1 i 1 ro l 1 ies Ko ad ih 1 1 P s RWr4 WA Station Station 2E4040 Station si l i w7 Noa tt Nes __ 2E7H 743 Nev RWi7 ws i 4 2E8H 744 RWr8 1 i 1 x 1 f j i I 1 1 ki i 1 1 f WB i l 2EBH 747 RWB Remote register RWr WC 2ECH 748 me RWO 1 a C i H l 1 H l 1 I ii i OO WF 2EFH 751 RWr3 1 Me P 1 lie I ais 1 W10 Station Station POED ________ station phar 1 1 T I wi No4 2F 31 755 l No4 Rwer 1 W14 i 2F4u 756 a RWr8 1 i i
186. Buffer memory address Station number Buffer memory address 1604 and 164 352 and 353 14 17Ay and 17B 378 and 379 27 1944 and 195 404 and 405 40 1AEy and 1AF 430 and 431 53 1C84 and 1C9 456 and 457 1624 and 1634 354 and 355 15 17Cy and 17Dp 380 and 381 28 1964 and 1974 406 and 407 41 1BO and 1B1 432 and 433 54 1CAy and 1CBy 458 and 459 1644 and 165p 356 and 357 1664 and 1674 358 and 359 16 17 17Ey and 17Fy 382 and 383 1804 and 1814 384 and 385 29 30 1984 and 199p 408 and 409 19A and 19B 410 and 411 42 43 1B24 and 1B3 434 and 435 1B4 and 1B5 436 and 437 55 56 1CCy and 1CD 460 and 461 1CEy and 1CFy 462 and 463 1684 and 1694 360 and 361 18 1824 and 1834 386 and 387 31 19Cy and 19D4 412 and 413 44 1B6 and 1B7 438 and 439 57 1D04 and 1D1 464 and 465 16Ay and 16B 362 and 363 19 1844 and 1854 388 and 389 32 19E and 19F4 414 and 415 45 1B8 and 1B9 440 and 441 58 1D24 and 1D34 466 and 467 16Cy and 16D 364 and 365 20 1864 and 1874 390 and 391 33 1A04 and 1A1p 416 and 417 46 1BA and 1BB4 442 and 443 59 1D4 and 1D5y 468 and 469 16E and 16F4 366 and 367 21 1884 and 189 392 and 393 34 1A2 and 1A3 418 and 419 47 1BC
187. CC Link communications are performed between the master station and slave stations using RX RY RWr and RWw Data in RX RY RWr and RWw of the master local module are stored in the buffer memory This section describes the assignment using an example of data input and output of the master station and local station Remote I O station CPU Master Remote device station Local station CPU module station Intelligent device station module Rag a a a Pe te sore 5a A See ae Tay Paes Sts Re ee nk ea RL A N 4 i Station No 1 y Station No 2 y Station No 3 r i ii ii i Buffer li 1i Buffer 3 i Device memory 3 1 Ii memory Device i I li Ii i RX RWr i it RX RWr 3 I 1 11 3 1 7 1 1 Station I Range of the Mt 11 Station 1 No 4 SL Eh station No 1 da bbb i Catt allie i No 1 i i o 1 sending data li RX RWr 5 Ii o i w w Stati y Range of the i Stati P G ation 1 1 i station No 2 tation 1 gt i EEEE CEL EET OTT a fee i A j No 2 i g A No 2 D n i t s q oa y p 1 25 Station 1 i i Station 1 e3 No 3 prrnnnnnngunnn i 9 No 3 1 39 l I 1 J i f 82 i 7 o I l 1 d a i RY RWw RY RWw i a i Range of the I Stati My Stati 1 I master station ation 5 ation 1 Q sending data to O the station No 1 i RY RWw i S No 1 2 pl L Range of the 1 z 1 master station Station 1 is Station 3 sending data to
188. CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 13 Check that the LEDs are in the following status If the LEDs are not in the following status follow the steps 1 to 11 again Master station AJ65BTB2 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT QJ61BT11N MITSUBISHI MELSEC RUN HL RUN MST OSMST E OoN sg B oo ON sD M MRD I Flashing 1 999909999909909 lacing ERR L ERR OFF o OFF 4 The LED may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status Point Ifthe LEDs on the CPU module are in the following states refer to the manual for the CPU module used and follow the troubleshooting instructions User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection e The MODE LED is off The ERR LED is on or flashing 14 Check the connection status of each module on the CC Link diagnostics 7 Page 311 Section 11 4 When the window is as follows the connection status is normal Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics CC Link Diagnostics CCiink BE i mh 2 Masterst vast iost ajdwexy uonesiedo 7 Return to the original E N Display All Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information Point The data link status of each module can be also checked using Other station data link status SW0080 to SW00
189. CIFICATIONS Ex When 43 stations of remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using a CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible Transmission speed 10Mbps Because the cable length between the second station and the third station is 35cm the maximum overall cable distance is 80m 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 43rd remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station Master station settee og E ooon OOOO 000000001 suogeayoadg 0UewOJ d ZE 00 F 498A 4UIT DD 9UBISIP aged Jes9AO WNWIXEN Z E 31 2 When a system is configured with remote I O stations remote device stations local stations and intelligent devices stations Local station or intelligent device station nonon Master station Remote O station or remote device station Remote I O station or remote device station Local station or intelligent device station Local station or intelligent device station pil g oo o Om o ooo omo pu 2 2 4 2 22 Maximum overall cable distance e CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 co
190. CT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End Us
191. Completion device D2 turns on 225 c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RDMSG instruction Completion device D2 and Status display device at completion D2 1 e Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RDMSG instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RDMSG instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RDMSG instruction is Abnormal end completed and turns off in the next END process End End End End process process process process Sequence program pp or Execution completion of ON the G P RDMSG a ee G P RDMSG instruction OFF _ ___ 3 Completion device ORR en M Abnormal end 1 Normal completion 1 1 scan Status display device OFF at completion d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RDMSG instruction is ten 4 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs sie When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a spec
192. DVCPU Q13UDVCPU and Q26UDVCPU Remote I O net mode A mode used to perform high speed communications in a system consisting of a master station and remote I O station s only Remote I O station A station such as the AJ65BTB1 16D and AJ65SBTB1 16D that exchanges I O signals bit data with another station by cyclic transmission This station cannot perform transient transmission Remote device station A station such as the AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV and AJ65BT 64DAI that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station cannot perform transient transmission Remote net Ver 1 mode A mode used to configure a CC Link system consisting of a master station and Ver 1 compatible slave station s only Remote net Ver 2 mode A mode used to configure a CC Link system containing a Ver 2 compatible slave station Compared to the remote net Ver 1 mode the number of cyclic points per station is increased from 128 to 896 for RX RY and from 16 to 128 for RWr RWw Remote net mode A mode used to communicate data with all stations remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station in a CC Link system There are three modes remote net Ver 1 mode remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode Remote net additional mode A mode used to increase the number of cyclic points by adding a Ver
193. Data link stop restart 000005 169 Dedicated instruction 14 173 Delay Time Setting 20005 100 Description of I O signals 326 Detecting overlapped station numbers 84 DEVICES aad ced PAR EO a E 13 Device Reference 2000000 eee 60 Difference between the asynchronous and synchronous modes 000ee 163 Difference from traditional modules 395 DISCONNECTION siei garer aiana a E ane diene 14 EMC and Low Voltage Directives 6 ERR LEDa haia age ete aes be Saket 22 Error code listasi nanenane mad ety ae ae baa ia 293 Error HIStory aaee bin eae ede hea se ears 291 Error invalid station setting 167 Examples v 20 veel tata epee Geile 59 Example of communications between a master station and a local station 255 Example of communications between a master station and a remote device station 232 Example of communications when the master station duplex function is used n 147 Execut amp Flag serca seana Soe eka 109 Executional Condition s sssaaa aaan 109 Expanded Cyclic Setting 101 105 106 External dimension diagram 416 Function version 000 ee eee eee 413 CPV ROMSC stan bee ot a E aS 221 G P RIFR naies ain ook ee ah eet ot 197 G P RIRCV oaaao aaan 187 G PIRIRD peia dnne E N ees 175 G P RISEND 24 2 GS aaau 192 G
194. E6H 230 RX00 t xto7F t f E7H 231 a RXIF x1080 Station o E8H 232 i A Station Rap i xqogF No4 No 91233 ta RXE j X10A0 i EAH 234 l l RX40 i 1 i i f 2a X10BF EBH 235 RXSF CPU module Remote station Device Module name Remote input RX Signal name X1000 RX00 CH 1 A D conversion completion flag X1001 RX01 CH 2 A D conversion completion flag X1002 RX02 CH 3 A D conversion completion flag X1003 RX03 CH 4 A D conversion completion flag X1004 RX04 CH 5 A D conversion completion flag X1005 RX05 CH 6 A D conversion completion flag X1006 RX06 CH 7 A D conversion completion flag X1007 RX07 CH 8 A D conversion completion flag X1008 RX08 to to Reserved X100B RX0B AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X100C RXOC E2PROM write error flag X100D RxX0D to to Reserved X1017 RX17 X1018 RX18 Initial data processing request flag X1019 RX19 Initial data setting completion flag X101A RX1A Error status flag X101B RX1B Remote READY X101C RX1C to to Reserved X105F RX5F 234 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CPU module Remote station Device Module name Remote input RX Signal name X1060 RX00 to to Reserved X106B RX0B X106C RXOC E2PROM write error flag X106D RX0D to to Reserved AU AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN nike X1078 RX18 Initial data processing request flag X1079 RX19 Initial data setting complete flag X107A RX1A Error status
195. EDIUNWWOD Jo ajdwexg ZOL 249 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting change Xal iowa HFG ata J Analog output enable disable I setting RWw8 CH 1 to 4 output range setting s eeee eee ee ee I I I 1 MOVP H30 w115 i i RWw9 i Turn on Initial data setting i SET Y1079 J request flag RY19 1 ae RST y1079 J Turn off Initial data setting x request flag RY19 bl E AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Digital value setting X20 X107B Set CH 1 digital value setting 1 H 1 H MOVP K500 wioc J RWw0 r Set CH 2 digital value setting MOVP K1000 W10D g RWw1 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting X23 X107B Turn on CH 1 analog output Y1060 i k enable disable flag RY00 Cy1061 Turn on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RY01 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Process at error occurrence X107A Read CH 1 check code RWr0 J E 5 ee DA i and CH 2 check code RWr1 MOVP w14 D518 J Read Error code RWr8 X26 HoA 3 Turn on Error reset request l LSET 7A 4 flag RY1A YIO7A X107A Turn off Error reset request J J li i LRST YIOJA J flag RY1A MCR NO END When creating the program refer to the manual for the remote device station used and change the program as needed The program is needed only for the initial setting change 2 Write the program to the CPU module in the master st
196. ET Varies depending on a CPU module User s manual for the CPU module used Default Blank zj The station information is not set in the CC he Set the station Link configuration window not checked o information in the Select it when graphically configuring Station Information The station information is set in the CC Link CC Link Setting by referring to the network map display area for GX configuration window checked he configuration Works2 only lt _ Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 a Default The station information is not set in g window the CC Link configuration window not 7 checked Within the range of I O points of the CPU Set the start I O number of a master local module in units of 16 ae 2 pel Start I O No module oints Default Blank Set the operations to be performed at an error or when the switch Operation Setting ona CPU module is set to STOP L gt Page 101 Section 7 3 2 1 uonels Jajsey e 10 SBunjes vejoweseg EZ 97 Item Description Setting range Type Select Master Station To configure the system that switches the control to the standby master station if the master station goes down set as follows Page 135 Section 8 2 5 Operation Setting When a failed master station becomes normal again it does not return as a Master Station standby master station e When a failed master station becomes normal
197. Edge Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched 04 to een H sw 0 to O1FFy first time only FFFF Level Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched z Level Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched Scan Completed 3 When completing the interrupt settings open the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window of the PLC parameter Relate Interrupt SI No of a master local module set in the Interrupt Settings window to the interrupt pointer of a CPU module KO Project window gt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System tab gt _ Interrupt Pointer Setting button 4 Input settings to the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window 5 Click the End button and close the setting window Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting PLC Side Intelligent Module Side Interrupt Pointer Interrupt Pointer Start No Count Start I O No Start SI No 50 3 oot i Item Description Setting range Interrupt Pointer Stari Ne Set the start number IOO of the interrupt pointer 50 to 255 Default Blank PLC Side Interrupt Pointer Set the number of the interrupt conditions set in the Interrupt 1 to 16 Default Blank Count Settings window of Network Parameter Within the range of I O points of Intelligent Start I O No Set the start I O number of the master local module the CPU module Module Default Blank Side Set the start number of t
198. Equal Interrupt when the value is matched first time only 0 to 65535 _ 0to 15 Edge Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched first time only Op to SW 0 to O1FFy Level Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched H Level Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched FFFFy Scan Completed 3 When completing the interrupt settings open the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window of the PLC parameter Relate Interrupt SI No of a master local module set in the Interrupt Settings window to the interrupt pointer of a CPU module Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System tab gt _ Interrupt Pointer setting button 4 Input settings to the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window 5 Click the End button and close the setting window Cancel Item Description Setting range Interrupt Pointe i i 7 e Set the start number IOO of the interrupt pointer 50 to 255 Default Blank art No PLC Side Interrupt Pointer Set the number of the interrupt conditions set in the Interrupt 1 to 16 Default Blank Count Settings window of Network Parameter Within the range of I O points of the Intelligent Start I O No Set the start I O number of the master local module CPU module Module Default Blank Side Set the start number of the SI No set to Interrupt SI No in Start SI No 0 to 15 Default Blank the Interrupt S
199. F S amp T Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link Sheet Double click the icon 4 When the step 3 is performed while the data link of the selected module has been stopped the data link will restart Point When stopping or restarting data link do not write data to the buffer memory area buffer memory address 5E0 320 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 6 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations during data link for maintenance or for other purposes 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Right click the target slave station icon of the temporary error invalid station setting and select Set Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station The selected station will be a temporary error invalid station CC Link Diagnostics CC1ink i Start Monitor Stop Monitor 0 Master ST 3 When the step 2 is performed while the selected station has been set as a temporary error invalid station the temporary error invalid station setting is canceled Point When configuring the temporary error invalid station
200. GANIZATION ceases see ee sete eee tere tees ry ee We Ore nae re ese Wee ccna oe ce peels 12 STE RIM See ae 2 ree ce Ak es A ar ard AE a aa AR eR Ae ea E 13 PACKING TELS Ties E cs secre ee te enone tae ye Aa pee meee ow tre Ars OSE E E a eae nae Seca 15 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 16 1 1 GCC LINK ae ss Ae he i hae be Ba A a ee 16 41 2 Mast r Local Modul sS 2 220 ae exten edna e a wed pe baie acre vielen cde ce ad 17 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 21 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 24 3 1 General Specification Si sisya ira ae i ee eee a 24 3 2 Performance Specifications sannana teen tees 24 3 2 1 Maximum number of connected modules 0 0 0 0 cece eee 27 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 10 2 0 0 0 0 cece ee ee eee 29 3 2 3 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 00 0 00 cece eee eee ee 30 3 24 CG Link d dicated cables srini cererii s eee ed oo oar eas ME Ae Pe eee 33 3 3 Listtof FUNCIONS ossein e in bine ion os Soa wt liw Ss Meee ee Se 34 3 4 s Listiof O SiQnals 2 ei wns str ie ee ee eek ee ew ek So ete get 37 3 5 List of Buffer Memory Areas 0 6 ett teen eee 38 3 6 Assignment and Modes 0 00 cece tet ee eee 41 S 64 ASSIQNIMENE fey Sg ae ae A e ho Me aes Med Pils finde tee Oat 41 3 6 2 Modes ierre Aue pe ae creas Kee hide AE ASE a oe ve AVIRA BA odes cla aw 43 3 6 3 Remote net Vert mode lt 4 4 ac eacewk esie ph ayki tae aniei mod Aa abe 46 3 64 Remote n
201. GOld EZL SWI GOld JO S SI ZL 11 2 4 1 Problems due to operation error in the master station Problems due to operation error in the master station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Check the program Correctly set the link special Is Data link stop SBO002 Check the refresh devices relay SB on set in the network Turn on Data link stop G1 1 4 Data link stop parameter SB0002 Check Data link stop result Take a corrective action Does no error occur SW0045 according to the error code Check the program Correctly set the link special Is Data link restart Check the refresh devices relay SB Data link SB0000 on set in the network Turn on Data link restart cannot be parameter SB0000 stopped Check Data link restart Take a corrective action estarted Does no error occur result SW0041 according to the error code G1 2 Data link restart Check cables visually or by the line test using a programming tool Correct the cables and Isn t the corresponding Check the parameter settings of the station disconnected Check the operating status corresponding station and of the CPU module on the start the system corresponding station for local station Check Error invalid station A 7 as Cancel the error invalid specified status SW0078 to station setting Error invalid station Isn t the station set as an SW007B A faulty station set
202. H LTO H10 H5E0 K4SBO K2 4 refreshed To H10 H600 swo K32 Data in SW0000 to SW001F are a dwexe Bunjes Ja awesed ajdwexe wesbold g6 refreshed END 2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices 217 218 Write the PLC parameters and program to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system lt u RESET D or power off gt on Set the switch on the CPU module in the master station to RUN to execute the program The G P RLPASET instruction is executed by executing the program and the network parameters are reflected to the master local module The network parameters are changed by turning on M500 The error invalid station with station number 2 and the reserved station with station number 3 are canceled TTT CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 Precautions when setting parameters using the G P RLPASET instruction a The differences from the parameter settings using a programming tool The items that can be set are different between the parameter settings using the dedicated instruction and the ones using a programming tool Item Parameter settings using a programming tool Parameter settings using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET instruction Program for parameter settings Not necessary Necessary Data Link Faulty Station Setting Can be set Cannot be
203. HEX in Input Format and enter information in other columns e Initial setting for an AJ6E5SVBTCU 68ADVN station number 1 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S amp Select HEX Input Format HEX x Execute Details of Execution Write Device Set New RWww Same as Prev Set ba RWw Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set A EN KM EU EA E KA EA EHEN EA EA EA Se EN EA EHE SH E EA E EA EA EAE EN K Default Configuring the initial setting executes the following processes from the first condition Condition Description ist The channels 1 and 2 are set to the A D conversion enable An input range is set 2nd Channel 1 0 to 5V Channel 2 User range setting 1 10 to 10V Whether a sampling process or averaging process is executed is set 3rd Channel 1 Sampling process Channel 2 Averaging process count average 4th The average count of the channel 2 is set to 16 5th Initial data processing completion flag is turned on 6th Initial data setting request flag is turned on 7th Initial data processing completion flag is turned off 8th Initial data setting request flag is turned off 244 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING e Initial setting for an AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN station number 4 Remote Device Station Initial
204. Link dedicated cables If cables other than CC Link dedicated cables are used the performance of the CC Link system is not guaranteed For the specifications of CC Link dedicated cables and contact information refer to the following Website of CC Link Partner Association www cc link org Remark ooo ooo ooo ecco Refer to the CC Link Cable Wiring Manual published by CC Link Partner Association S9 qed Ps edIpep YUI DD VCE SuONeoioads SOURWOIIOd ZE 33 3 3 1 Cyclic transmission List of Functions Function Description Reference Communications with other stations Communications can be performed with other stations using remote I O RX RY and remote registers RWr RWw Access to remote slave stations can be performed in the same way as access to a module mounted on the same base unit is performed Page 41 Section 3 6 1 Page 125 Section 8 1 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Remote I O net mode The mode can be selected according to the CC Link system configuration There is a mode such as the one to add a Ver 2 compatible slave station to a system with a Ver 1 compatible slave station Page 46 Section 3 6 3 Page 48 Section 3 6 4 Page 51 Section 3 6 5 Page 55 Section 3 6 6 Auto refresh Data can be automatically transferred between RX RY RWr RWw SB and SW in a master local module and a device in a CPU m
205. Link is connected in 16 point unit Parameters of master local modules can be set using a programming tool Therefore parameter setting programs need not to be created resulting in reduction in the program amount gt Page 93 CHAPTER 7 CCLink Configuration Edt View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Detect Now a Jodule List TE ms Unk Find Medule My Favorites Modeseting leciWode z Spee seks z Oksen Tme prox StatonType veson oFSTAOcaned Epanid Remote Master staton Remote 1 0 Station Ver 1 Occupied Station Single 32Points ster L Remote 1 O Station Ver 1 1Occuped Station Single 32 Points RJ61BT11 Wver1 SOccuped Staton singe s6 Ponte usigTiin L25CPU BT 19618 AJGSVBTCU Total STA 5 AJG5SBTB3 AJ65SBTB2 20 N85 Setifitis needed No Setting Already Set ma com e or e pont wren Piot window Sone 18 Parameters of a master station can be also set using a program L gt Page 205 Section 9 8 When parameters are set using a program parameter settings of the master station can be changed without resetting the CPU module CHAPTER 1 FEATURES b Diagnostics using a programming tool The status of a CC Link system can be checked using a programming tool Error locations and error causes are displayed in a programming tool enabling the user to quickly troubleshoot the problem
206. Local Station Ea ater Stton Data Unk Type ie e Se O ee Renstenessteraun tenereregsecawy Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Pre don Pret wed Aea t aan Check End Cancel Input settings to the Network Parameter window gt Page 115 Section 7 4 2 Click the End button Write the settings to the CPU module using the programming tool O Online gt Write to PLC The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system When the reflection is completed data link is automatically started at master local modules When change the settings for a local station or standby master station change the settings for the master station accordingly 7 4 2 Setting details Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules IT Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window 1 x Boards Blank No Setting CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS a 2 3 Start 1 0 No Operation Setting Local Station Master Station Data Link Type Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX _Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw
207. MA gt o Completion device Status display OFF device at completion Request device RYn Completion device RXn 190 Normal completion Receive completion N OFF Other end station send ready d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIRCV instruction is ten e Assignment of the receive buffer The assignment of the receive buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module aie When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 4 1 Program examp
208. MST LED Flashing The station number where data link was performed with the slave station is stored in Line test 1 result SWO0B4 to SWO00B7 e For a standby master station use Standby master station test result SBOOB4 e When the test is not completed error on all the stations MST LED ON ERR LED Flashing The error code is stored into Line test result SWOOB8 CF Page 293 Section 11 3 2 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING b Line test 2 1 Before the line test 2 check the following i High Perf del QcPU a PU i a e If the switch on the CPU module is set at STOP If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET CS If all the stations are connected with CC Link STOP dedicated cables RESET L CLR CD 2 Set the station number setting switches on the master station to the station number of the slave station where the test is executed Set the start station number when the number of occupied stations is two or more 3 Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on en ee a the master station from 5 to 9 eee When setting the switch from 5 to 9 set the same STATION No transmission speed as that of during system operation Page 21 CHAPTER 2 a oD 4 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the a G system 5 2 5 The line test 2 is started During the test the MST F T QJ61BT11N LED on the master station flashes j RUN E E MST
209. Mov K63 D1 J MOV H4 D2 3 gt Control data setting OV H111 D3 4 Mov KI D4 J J MOV H4 D5 7 MOV H104 D6 J Interlock signal storage j J device setting MOV HI D7 J fs Sets data to be written to LMOV KII Dio intelligent device station _____________J GP RISEND UO DO D10 D5 M40 Dedicated instruction execution M6 SW83 E Set G P RISEND instruction A g s at j LSET Mi executing flag to ON M40 wa Perform process for normal Process upon normal completion rcompletion of dedicated instruction M41 1 Perform process for abnormal Process upon abnormal I end 1 completi i i i rend O LLL LLL 7 pletion of dedicated instruction RST M6 Set write request to OFF Set G P RISEND instruction RST Mi executing flag to OFF END 196 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 6 G P RIFR The G P RIFR instruction reads data from the automatic update buffer of the target station The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIFR c eRR n m 2 m Command GPRIFR I Applicable device Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device g File device function module Index Constant data System user A Others register JO O device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H n1 O O O
210. No 3 the number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station No 4 the number of occupied stations 1 configured Remote I O station Station No 1 the number of occupied CPU module Master station stations 1 i i number 1 y i Station number 3 h ee Staon f number 4 The remote I O station points setting is not 1 i i 1 16 point output module Remote I O station Station No 3 the number of occupied stations 1 YOF to YOO YiF to Yi0 32 point output module i 1 As in A a e i ee ee 4 Remote I O station Station No 4 the number of occupied stations 1 configured Remote I O station Remote 1 0 station Station No 1 the Station No 2 the number of occupied number of occupied CPU module Master station stations 1 stations D oraaa Remote output RY o L 5 L nog po Lo T gt Forte Yoo X aE Station i i cg a i oi ___ Station J 7 i i 7 i oa number 4 i i i i i e DE SOE L amp point output module 8 point output module 170 32 point output module 1 1 1 1 ee ee ae ae ea 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Setting method Set the number of points of a remote I O station in Remote Station Points under Station Information Setting of the network parameter gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Point When setting eight point remote I O stations set an even number of stations consecutively When sett
211. O remote device station exceeding the number of the same time access concurrent execution The remote device station access Unsupported function function was attempted to be Perform the function from the BC71 error remote device x O performed to a station other than master station station access the master station The remote device station to be accessed from the peripherals is any of the following e The station is not set in the Target station error network parameter f ka Check the parameters or BC72 remote device station The station is not the station O x access with the start station number The station has been reserved e A data link error including an error in all stations has occurred operations of the target station 308 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code ore Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Target station ae The remote device station to be Check the station number and specification error i i BC73 accessed from the peripherals is station type of the specified target O x remote device station a remote I O station station access The specified device RX RY Device number error RWw or RWr number is outside Check the parameters and the BC74 remote device station
212. O type error remote device station or again intelligent device station Please consult your local BF44 System error a O O Mitsubishi representative Invalid number of The message transmission BFFA messages that were function was executed Execute four requests or less at o 7 simultaneously simultaneously for five or more the same time transmitted intelligent device stations p Too many transient requests Transient request Wait for a while and send the BFFB were sent from the programming f O O overload error request again tool or GOT CPU monitoring timer The CPU monitoring timer timed Check operations of the target BFFE O O timeout out station C000 to CFFF Error detected in a Ethernet interface module LZ Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port D000 to DFFF Error detected in a CC Link IE Field Network QA CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual E000 to EFFF Error detected in a CC Link IE Controller Network QA CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual F000 to FFFF Error detected in a MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network system OQA MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual 310 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 cc Link Diagnostics Using GX Works2 The status of a CC Link system can be checked using a programming tool Unlike link special relays SBs and link speci
213. O x reserved station Zero points are set for a station Set zero points for a reserved other than a reserved station station 299 SI p09 JOM ZE LL s po9 JOU Ee Error code Delectability k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station The remote I O station points setting is set to 8 points or 16 cons Set the remote net Ver 2 mode points in the remote net 8 point 16 pointsetting additional mode B39E error remote I O 8 points or 16 points are set for a O x Set 8 points or 16 points for a station station other than a remote I O i remote I O station station 8 points and 16 points are set for Set either 8 points or 16 points for the same remote I O station the station In the remote net additional In the remote net additional mode mode the maximum station set the network parameter so that Remote net additional number of Ver 1 compatible slave the maximum station number of B39F mode station number station is set greater than the Ver 1 compatible slave station O x invalid minimum station number of may be less than the minimum Ver 2 compatible slave station in station number of Ver 2 the network parameter compatible slave station The mode setting is invalid in the master station local station or standby master station e The mode of the master station differs from that of the standby m
214. OI M1E7H 483 La I l i 1 LI Device actually used by the remote I O stations Point Using the remote net Ver 2 mode can reduce the number of devices by assigning zero points to RWr and RWw in a remote 1 0 station 3 Page 48 Section 3 6 4 3 Mount the master local module on a base unit L gt Page 75 Section 6 1 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 4 Connect a CC Link dedicated cable to each module Connect terminating resistors to the modules at both ends gt Page 76 Section 6 2 Wiring diagram Master station AJ65BTB2 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT Blue a a Blue Terminating i a 7 i i Terminating 4 a rf a 4 resistor X x X WA Ml DB resistor 1102 1 2W eee ee Sh operas ies 1102 1 2W CC Link CC Link f dedicated cable dedicated cable Actual wiring Terminating resistor 1102 1 2W Terminating resistor 1 1 3 5 7 8 110 1 2W DA DG a 10 4 When a Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable or CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible is used connect 110Q 1 2W Brown Brown Brown terminating resistors When a CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible is used connect 130Q 1 2W Brown Orange Brown terminating resistors
215. P RIRD be 4096 or less instruction Default 64 0 128 to 4096 Set the size of automatic update buffer to communicate with an Note that the total buffer size of Auto Auto intelligent device station using automatic update buffer for all slave stations must be 4096 or Set the size required for each intelligent device station less Default 128 Station specific mode setting Set the station specific mode for the slave station This setting can be configured only when the slave station supports the station specific mode Varies depending on the module that was set 105 sjieyep Bunjes ZE uonels Jejsep e 104 sBunjes sejoweleg Z Item Description Setting range Module List The list of slave stations is displayed Information about slave stations can be set to the master station by drag and drop of the items from Module List to List of stations Select CC Link The list of CC Link modules is displayed Select modules from General CC Link Module if they are not in the list Find Module Search modules by the station type or model name The modules displayed in Find Result can be moved to List of stations by drag and drop My Favorites The modules registered in My Favorites are displayed To register modules in My Favorites perform any of the following e Right click on the module listed in Select CC Link e Right click on the module displayed in Find
216. P RITO cae ois Gt ae ot ii 201 G P RIWT oaaae aaan 181 G P RLPASET to ome ot ak geen oa an 205 General specifications 2 n 00 eee eee 24 GX Developer rae rine bad erie E ee es 401 H W LED Information 0 323 H W SW Information 000000 323 Handling precautions 2 0000 75 Hardware information 05 322 Hardware test 2200000 cece 324 High Performance model QCPU 13 Host data link status Xn1 000 326 How to check error codes 2005 290 How to perform the initial process only in a specified station 2 0 cee eee 155 How to set the station number 83 How to set the transmission speed 85 Installation 0 es 75 Installing the module 00000 aes 75 Intelligent Buffer Select Word 107 Intelligent Buffer Size word 105 Intelligent device station 13 Intelligent function module 13 Internal current consumption 5VDC 25 Interrupt Settings 2005 100 111 UERR LED fistscanncx canta bon and bat Gok atk gaa 22 L RUNIFED 22 geen patie tee et he oh oh ee wo ed a 21 FING ACSt rat ha phd yar ade Aes wee eS 86 Link refresh time 2000000 eee ee 389 Link scantime 2200000 eee ee 366 Link Scan Time Approx 0000005 104 Link special register SW
217. PU module of the target station Section 9 2 local station G P RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory areas of the target station or the Page 181 f device in the CPU module of the target station Section 9 3 Page 175 G P RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory areas of the target station f Section 9 2 Page 181 G P RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory areas of the target station j Section 9 3 Automatically performs handshaking with the target station and G P RIRCV reads data from the buffer memory areas of the target station Page 187 The instruction is available for modules that have interlock signals Section 9 4 for the handshake e g AJ65BT R2 N Intelligent device Automatically performs handshaking with the target station and station writes data to the buffer memory areas of the target station Page 192 G P RISEND mae i The instruction is available for modules that have interlock signals Section 9 5 for the handshake e g AJ65BT R2 N Reads data from the automatic update buffer of the target station Page 197 G P RIFR The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic aoi a6 i update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Writes data to the automatic update buffer of the target station P 201 age G P RITO The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic ae K 7 ion 9 update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Sets the network parameters to the master station and starts up the Page 205 Maste
218. Q01UCPU 0 32 0 31 QO02UCPU 0 32 0 31 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 14 0 12 389 Local station The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station QO0JCPU 1 05 QOOCPU 0 86 Q01CPU 0 79 Q02CPU 0 81 0 74 Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 31 0 29 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QOOUJCPU QOO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 70 0 60 QO02UCPU 0 70 0 60 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 15 0 13 4 A Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU cannot be set as a local station e KM2 KM3 KM4 Constant The value is the same regardless of execution of the block guarantee of cyclic data per station When a master local module is mounted on a main base unit Constant KM3 x 107 File registers File registers KM2 x10 R ZR ona R ZR on a KM4 CPU type memory card memory card are used are not used QO0JCPU 0 91 E QOOCPU 0 83 Q01CPU 0 79 Q02CPU 0 48 0 32 0 5 Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 43 0 14 0 2 Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU i _ f Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 43 0 14 0 2 QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU 0 39 0 2 QO02UCPU 0 39 0 05 0 2 Universal model QCPU other than those listed above 0 36 0 03 0 14 390
219. QX10 QY10 Start O number X Y00 to X Y1F X20 to X2F Y30 to Y3F Local station station No 1 i 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode ae a ee E PSS Se ee ee ee Terminating resistor Terminating resistor te number of occupied stations 1 uoneinByuoo wa skS p O uonels e007 pue uonels Jelsey e uaamag suoeorunwwog Jo ajdwexg gO 255 2 Assignment of the remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw In the program example the following assignment is used to perform data link Point The status of a device assignment can be checked on GX Works2 by setting information of a slave station on the CC Link configuration window on GX Worksz2 gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 a W Miew gt Docking Window lt gt Device Reference Device Reference CC Link Master Station Start I O No 0000 Station No 0 Start 1 0 No Display Option Export to CSV File Slave Station List Link Device List I Display Detailed Information Remote Input R Remote Output Fivy jer j Remote Register Aww Target STA St Target STA Host STA Target STA a Link i rie Refresh Link a Explanation ee Explanation ei Explanation fais STAR Dene Explanation Ryo wo BWO RYT 1 a Awa BA 2 ae gt Awe Link Device RYS RWS Rvs RYS RYS RY RYS When a master local module is in the remote net Ver 2 mode or
220. RWw2 RWr RWr2 SB SW aE Point RX RX2 RY RY2 SB 16 RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW q E Number of CC Link modules 1 x KM4 ms RX RX2 RY RY2 SB 16 RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW ms Link refresh time Number of remote input RX points refreshed in the master station local station Number of Ver 2 remote input RX points refreshed in the master station local station Number of remote output RY points refreshed in the master station local station Number of Ver 2 remote output RY points refreshed in the master station local station Number of remote register RWw points refreshed in the master station local station Number of Ver 2 remote register RWw points refreshed in the master station local station Number of remote register RWr points refreshed in the master station local station Number of Ver 2 remote register RWr points refreshed in the master station local station Number of link special relay SB points refreshed in the master station local station Number of link special register SW points refreshed in the master station local station Time that file register R ZR data on a memory card is transferred only when used Add aE only when refreshing the data to the memory card file register Addition is not required when refreshing the data to the standard RAM and extended SRAM cassette file registers e KM1 Constant Master station The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not
221. RX RY RWw with ones used in programs A j used in programs and in RWr SB and SW or in other networks other networks D1 1 Refresh data Access the correct buffer area Is the accessed buffer memory area in the Check if no device overlaps Cyclic data memory area correct RX f corresponding station with ones used in programs cannot be RY RWw RWr SB and Set the devices so that they or in other networks read written SW do not overlap with ones used in programs Check if the bit Isn t a station to which Ae corresponding to the faulty Parameter reading writing cannot be gig j Cancel the reserved station D1 2 te station is not 1 in Reserved i setting performed specified as a Po setting i station specified status reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 Word data Paramet Do the parameter settings Check if a remote I O station Match the model set by the rameter cannot be D2 1 P match with the status of the is not connected to the parameter with that of the i read written 9 connected modules corresponding station connected module Cyclic data 4 Check if a module with the Match the number of Do the parameter settings n lower area Parameter small number of occupied occupied stations set by the D3 1 match with the status of the cannot be setting stations is not connected to parameter with that of the connected modules 5 i read written the corresponding station connected module
222. Range of the 2 MEM E station No 2 Station sending data 4 No 2 4 Station No 3 z Buffer Device memory RX RWr Station No 1 i I I RX RWr 1 I a Range of the Ra aaa station No 1 I sending data 1 1 1 r 1 1 Station 3 q 1 1 1 1 1 1 Station No 2 No 3 RY RWw Y RWw master station E Station Station P O suo ouny y Jo suoneoyddy siseg p8 Range of the sending data to the station No 1 i No 1 Range of the 1 master station sending data to 1 the station No 2 i Range of the 1 2 master station 1 I No 1 Patan at Station No 2 7 3 uoIssiwsued ODD SUOEOIUNWIWWOD Ipod pyg Range of the station No 3 sending data sending data to the station No 3 en i i i ey ae gt Data sent from the master station w Area where data is sent to other stations gt Data sent from slave stations 4 RWr and RWw are not used for a remote I O station Note however that buffer memory areas are occupied depending on the mode of the master local module _ Page 46 Section 3 6 3 Page 55 Section 3 6 6 125 2 How to start communications Power on the slave station then master station to start data link When the parameter settings are reflected the master local module starts data link automatically e When the settings are configured using a programming tool re
223. Remote register RWr 2048 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station e Remote I O RX RY 32 points 30 points for a local station Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote device station local CC Link Ver 1 station intelligent device station standby master station Remote register RWr 4 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station gt master station Number of link points Expanded Cyclic Setting per remote Item stationilocel Single Double Quadruple Octuple station intelligent R 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points emote I O j device station standby RX RY 30 points for a 30 points for a 62 points for a 126 pene fora master station CC Link Ver 2 local station local station local station local station Remote register 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points RWw Remote 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points register RWr 24 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item Specifications Communication method Broadcast polling method Synchronization method Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI method Network topology Bus RS 485 Transmission format HDLC compliant Error control system CRC X18 X12 x5 1 Connection cable e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link d
224. SW80 3 eee Data link error AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN NO__ M100 Initialization procedure registration gt 1 SB5F 4 Sapna es I 1 RST SBOD J Turn off the initialization 1 i procedure registration instruction X101B ae i I I A X1018 l ean i I SET SBOD J Turn on the initialization i 1 procedure registration instruction X1078 1 x K 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Initial setting change j 3 KP imove H3 wioo 4 2 conversion enable prohibit 1 specification RWw0 1 1 MOVP H30 w101 gt CH 1 to 4 input range setting i i RWw1 i MOVP H200 W103 Averaging process specification 1 RWw3 i I CH 2 average time number of MOVP K16 W105 i 1 l times setting RWw5 i 1 1 Turn on Initial data setting 1 SET Y1019 l l request flag RY19 S 1 X1019 Turn off Initial data setting 1 a K ERST Y1019 J request flag RY19 7 y goa Mes Pace a a a eds a e a a a a ech scat a caer asf Es NS a ad a att 2 a AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Digital output value reading S X101B X1000 Read CH 1 digital output value 3 Mov wo D500 RW10 o X1001 Read CH 2 digital output value 5 mov wi D501 cg p RWr1 g AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Process at error occurrence X101A J MOvVP w8 D508 J Read Error code RWr8 X25 SET YIOIA Turn on Error reset request flag RY1A ae X10A RST yoa J Turn off Error reset request flag RY1A To the next page UONeIS 299149 S OWSY E pue UOHeIS Je seyy UBEMINg SUOI
225. Section 11 3 1 Section 11 4 1 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 6 Appendix 2 7 Appendix 2 8 Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Addition Section 7 9 Appendix 2 9 Partial correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 2 1 Section 4 3 6 Section 4 4 3 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 2 1 Section 7 4 Section 7 7 2 Section 8 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 13 2 Section 13 3 Section 13 4 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 1 to 2 7 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 3 1 Section 5 3 1 to 5 3 3 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 2 1 Section 7 3 to 7 6 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 Section 8 2 2 Section 13 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 6 Addition Section 13 3 1 Partial correction Section 2 2 1 2 2 3 5 2 3 8 4 2 11 4 4 13 3 2 Appendix 7 Addition Section 4 4 15 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 4 Section 4 1 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 15 Section 5 1 Section 5 4 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 7 Section 7 3 Se
226. Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 10 1 2 Section 10 1 3 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 2 3 Section 10 3 2 Section 10 3 3 Section 11 2 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Oct 2006 SH NA 080394E G Partial correction Section 2 2 2 Section 4 2 6 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 5 1 Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 2 Section 5 3 3 Section 6 2 Section 7 5 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 10 3 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 1 421 Dec 2005 SH NA 080394E E Addition Section 4 3 7 Appendix 7 Partial correction Section 1 3 Section 2 2 3 Section 4 1 Section 5 1 Section 7 8 Section 13 1 Print date Manual number Revision Nov 2007 Apr 2008 Jan 2009 Aug 2009 Nov 2010 May 2012 Mar 2015 SH NA 080394E H SH NA 080394E SH NA 080394E J SH NA 080394E K SH NA 080394E L Partial correction Section 1 3 Section 2 2 1 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 3 Section 4 2 6 Section 4 4 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 3 4 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 4 4 Section 6 5 2 Section 6 5 4 Section 6 6 2 Section 6 7 Section 7 3 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 1 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 3 1 Section 11 2 1
227. Set the word device value for the interrupt condition if RWr or SW is set to Device Code Channel No Connection No The setting is not required for a master local module Interrupt SI No Set the interrupt SI No used for the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC parameter The interrupt SI No is the control number on the master local module side to issue a request for the interrupt from a master local module to a CPU module This is not the device used for an actual program Refer to the following table Point Only one interrupt condition can be set for one interrupt program 119 uoneys sajseyy Aqpuels pue uonejs je007 10 s UY S Jojoweled PZ Setting range If the interrupt condition is established upon the completion of a link scan the interrupt is issued If Scan Completed is set to Device Code the interrupt is issued without condition upon the completion of a link scan Word Channel Device Device Device No Interrupt Detection Method Interrupt Condition Code No B Setting Connection SI No Value No RX 0 to 1FFF Edge Detect ON Interrupt at rise SB 0 to O1FFy Edge Detect OFF Interrupt at fall _ Level Detect ON Interrupt at ON RY 0 to 1FFFy Level Detect OFF Interrupt at OFF RWr 0 to O7 FF Edge Detect
228. Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S amp Select HEX Input Format HEX 2j Execute Operational Condition Executional Condition Details of Execution Flag Condition Device Execute Write Device Write No ondition Device No Data ON v RWw os ooFC ON o9 0031 ON o 0000 ON 18 0N_ ON 19 ON OFF 18 OFF ON 19 OFF Execute 5et New Execute Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Execute Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Execute Set New Execute Set New Set New Set New Set New Execute Set New Execute Set New Set New Execute Set New Set New Execute Set New 4 4 44414 ala la lala EA KA E A E Aidala lalalalaialaialatayatata Ala lala lalallala E EAT E E E EA E Default Configuring the initial setting executes the following processes from the first condition Condition Description ist The channels 1 and 2 are set to the analog output enable An output range is set 2nd Channel 1 0 to 5V Channel 2 User range setting 1 10 to 10V The HOLD CLEAR setting is configured 3rd Channel 1 CLEAR e Channel 2 CLEAR 4th Initial data processing completion flag is turned on 5th Initial data setting request flag is turned on 6th Initial data processing completion flag is turned off 7th Initial data setting request flag is turned off Remark Sooo cocoon The init
229. System error f a O O B826 Mitsubishi representative 303 SI p09 JON ZELL s po9 03 p4 Error code Delectability k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station A transient request was issued to aa Secure a communication buffer B903 Transient request error a station that had not secured a A O O D area using the parameter communication buffer When a dedicated instruction ae was executed the PLIA Communication buffer a Set the communication buffer size B904 communication buffer size of the an O O size setting error i within the range corresponding station was outside the range When the dedicated instruction oo Increase the communication was executed the transient data Transient data length buffer size so that it may be B905 length was greater than the N O O error o greater than the transient data communication buffer size of the length corresponding station B981 and B982 x B983 O Bout Susi Please consult your local o stem error y Mitsubishi representative B985 to B987 O B9FF A hardware error has been Please consult your local BA01 Error hardware test a O O detected Mitsubishi representative BA02 Please consult your local System error P O O BA05 Mitsubishi representative A hardware error has been Please consult your local BAO6 to BA13 Error
230. T output module Remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote 1 0 station CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 ee 1 Buffermemory Pope a _ Device Remote register RWr 4 Wo ti a 2 1 2E0H 736 S i pui Station No 1 i i i Station No 1 5 1 i 1o w3 x L DIII 1 2E3H 737 1 S LOO WA LLL Np LLL T 2E4H 738 kd 1 Station No 2 i 1 amp tationNo 2y l f mog l i i oh ey ss 1 it i i UAE E i Soke 2E7H 739 ty ET ENE NETA 4 be gpl e a a Pao l Tee ae A 3 Device actually used by the remote I O stations 61 ajdwexy uonesiedo 7 e Remote register RWw Because an AJ65BTB2 16T and AJ65BTB1 16DT are remote I O stations the remote register RWw is not used Note however that four points equivalent to the points for one station are occupied in the master local module because the system is in the remote net Ver 1 mode AJ65BTB2 16T output module AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote I O station Remote I O station CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 i gt j Buffer memory pee a e _Device Remote register RWw a 1 W100 ty 1EOK 480 i Station No 1 i i Station No 1 1 l i i W103 L py IESH 481 i W104 7777 _ 11E44 482 La Pl Station No 2 i i rot Station No 2 l l l i i Lo W407 OOOI p o a OO
231. TED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RDMSG instruction Master station rm iai Target station Remote device station Programmable controller CPU Master station Command 1 2 gt Send data Request o Device memory Q 4 2 Received data Response 2 7 e The send data S2 in the size specified in S1 2 are stored into the master station The send data are sent to the station specified in S1 1 Processing for the send data is executed at the station specified in S1 1 A processing result is received from the station specified in S1 1 IAUNA The received data are stored in the area from the device specified in D1 and the device specified in D2 is set to ON b Simultaneous execution of the G P RDMSG instruction The G P RDMSG instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple remote device stations up to four stations To the same remote device station however simultaneous execution of multiple instructions including other dedicated instruction s is not allowed Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after
232. X Link scan Response time of the first station f Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station Responses from remote I O stations l Input 2 i a i mis I m lt ______ Transmission delay time gt Delay time due to response delay of the remote I O station ll Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station lll Delay time between the master station receiving data and the data being stored into the buffer memory IV Delay time until information of the master station is refreshed in the CPU module 166 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 6 Error invalid station setting function Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This function is used when a slave station is powered off as a matter of the system configuration or for other purposes Note however that an error is not detected in an error invalid station Because the error invalid station setting is configured in the network parameter the setting cannot be changed during data link To change the setting during data link use the temporary error invalid station setting function lt gt Page 168 Section 8 3 7 Stations set as error invalid stations
233. Y1060 RY0OO CH 1 analog output enable disable flag Y1061 RY01 CH 2 analog output enable disable flag Y1062 RY02 CH 3 analog output enable disable flag Y1063 RY03 CH 4 analog output enable disable flag Y1064 RY04 CH 5 analog output enable disable flag Y1065 RY05 CH 6 analog output enable disable flag Y1066 RY06 CH 7 analog output enable disable flag Y1067 RY07 CH 8 analog output enable disable flag Y1068 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN RY08 to to Reserved Y1077 RY17 Y1078 RY18 Initial data processing complete flag Y1079 RY19 Initial data setting request flag Y107A RY1A Error reset request flag Y107B RY1B to to Reserved Y10BF RY5F uoneinbiyuoo WayshS p ZOL UONeIS 99149 S OWSY E pue UOIEIS 19 Se UBEMIEg SUOI eEDIUNWWOD Jo ajdwexg z OL 237 c Remote register RWr Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 408 Appendix 8 1 2 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote register Device Station number Module name g Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw wo 2E0 736 RwWr0 W1 2E1y 737 RWr1 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN w2 2E2y 738 RWr2 W3 2E3y 739 RWr3 W4 2E4y 740 RWr4 W5 2E54 741 RWr5 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W6 2E6y 742 RWr6 W7 2E7H 743 RWr7 w8 2E8y 744 RWr8 w9 2E94 745 RWr9 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN WA 2EAy 746 RWrA WB 2EBu 747 RWrB WC 2ECy 748 RwWr0 WD 2EDy 749 RWr1 4 AJ65V
234. Z Remote device station Remote I O station Local station Remote I O station Y y 4 Remote device station Intelligent device Remote device station A maximum of six stations can be connected s Remote I O station Remote device station Terminating resistor between DA and DB a Terminating resistor ine between DA and DB Remote 1 O station Remote device station Local station Intelligent device station station A maximum of six stations can be connected The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length Buln 79 a Precautions When the following modules are the master stations change the procedure of connecting terminating resistors e AJ61BT11 Hardware version C or earlier e AJ61QBT11 Hardware version C or earlier e A1SJ61BT11 Hardware version D or earlier e A1SJ61QBT11 Hardware version D or earlier Connect the terminating resistors between DA and DB and between DA and DG Use the following terminating resistors and do not use the terminating resistors included with the module UONDBsUuUOD YOUeIG 7 9 1109 5 1 2W x 4 pieces a Connection between DA and DG and between DB and DG DE Connect a terminating resistor to each module at both ends DG H of the main line SLD FG Terminating resistor model name im lex
235. a CPU module is issued when the conditions that have been set using a programming tool are satisfied and the interrupt program can be executed This function is used to stop the control and execute an interrupt program upon an error or for other purposes Page 158 Section 8 3 2 Automatic CC Link startup Data link can be performed by powering on the master local module This function is used to check the operation of when a system is configured Page 159 Section 8 3 3 Reserved station function Slave stations that are not actually connected but will be connected in future are not detected as Data Link Faulty Station in the master station and local station By setting slave stations that will be connected in future as reserved stations slave stations can be added without a program change because the RX RY RWr RWw assignment is not changed In addition the number of points of a slave station that has been set as a reserved station can be set as zero points Page 162 Section 8 3 4 Error invalid station setting function Temporary error invalid station setting function Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This function is used when a slave station is powered off as a matter of the system configuration or for other purposes Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a
236. a master local module as a local station Select any of the following to use a master local module as a standby master station gt Page 135 Section 8 2 5 Operation Setting When only the standby master station is started up it starts data link as a master station Master Station Duplex Function Other than the above Standby Master Station 1 When select Master Station Duplex Function set the same settings as the master station for other items _ gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 e Local Station Standby Master Station e Master Station Duplex Function Default Master Station Master Station Data Link Type The setting is not required when a master local module is used as a local station or standby master station 115 syejep Bujes 772 uonels Jejseyy Aqpuels pue uonejs e907 e 10 sbues Jojoweled PZ Item Description Setting range Set the mode for a master local module lt gt Page 43 Section 3 6 2 to Page 51 Section 3 6 5 Remote Net Ver 1 Mode e Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Set the same mode as a master station to use a master local module Offline as a standby master statign Default Remote Net Ver 1 Mode The setting is not required when a master local module is used as a Total Module local station or standby master station Except when Master Connected Station Duplex Function is select
237. al Setting Initial Setting Interrupt Settings Interrupt Settinas i 229 3 Remote device station initial settings using a programming tool a Reflection of the settings The initial settings registered using a programming tool are reflected to a remote device station by writing the settings to a CPU module and turning on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD b Signals that are required to be always on even after the initial process is completed Turning off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD after the initial process is completed turns off all the remote output RY s that turned on during the initial procedure registration For signals that are required to be always on such as a conversion enable signal turn them on using a program c When a faulty station exists in the station to which the initial settings are to be executed Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on unless the execution is completed to all the stations that are registered in the remote device station initial setting of a programming tool If a faulty station exists create the program so that Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is turned off depending on the completion status of other stations 4 A program when the module is connected to a Redundant CPU For prec
238. al registers SWs the system status can be checked on a graphical window therefore corrective action can be easily taken This section describes the CC Link diagnostics using GX Works2 For the CC Link diagnostics using GX Developer refer to Page 402 Appendix 7 3 11 4 1 Monitoring the host station other stations Data link status of the host station station to which a programming tool is connected and other stations stations other than the host station can be monitored 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window XW Diagnostics lt gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Refer to the subsequent descriptions for operation CC Link Diagnostics Monitoring Stop Monitor Module list diagnostics target selection area 1 4 Intell ST Station list Return to the original Display All Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information Connecting Station Master station fo Data Link Status Data linking Master ST Operation Status Normal Master Station Switch Master station A Used Line cH 0 CH 0 Side Line Status Normal CH 1 Side Line Status Line Type Twist Single Bus Link Scan Time Max 2ms Min 2ms Current 2ms Related Functions lt lt Legend Close amp B Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link Sheet ZSHOM XO Buist soysoubelg YUIT OO Y SUONE S JOUJO UOHE S
239. an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signal as an output signal from the CPU module to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions A WARNING To seta refresh device in the network parameter select the device Y for the remote output RY refresh device Remote Output RY Ifa device other than Y such as M an
240. an be connected in one system b Right of controlling data link of a standby master station When a master station goes down the right of controlling data link is automatically transferred to a standby master station Note that an instruction to refresh cyclic data is not issued Use a link special relay SB and link special register SW to issue a refresh instruction Page 145 Section 8 2 5 6 After the instruction is issued information before a master station error is detected is output to each station c Change in the parameter settings of the master station While data link is performed by a standby master station the parameter settings of the master station cannot be changed d Station number setting for a standby master station If the station number setting of the station number setting switch on a standby mater station differs from that set in Standby Master Station No of the network parameter for the master station an error error code B39A occurs in the standby master station If an error has occurred reset the CPU module of the standby master station after changing the parameter settings of the master station or changing the station number set using the station number setting switch of the standby master station e If the terminal block of a master station is removed while the master station is controlling data link If the terminal block of a master station is removed without powering off the master
241. an error code under Error Code No Error Code Date and Time Model Name Start Oo HST LOSS 2011 08 19 13 56 20 QJ61BT11N 00102 ac2i 2011 08 19 11 23 35 Q20UDEHCPU ses In such case increase the number of collected module errors per scan in the PLC RAS tab of the PLC parameter window For the setting refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals f errors with the same error code consecutively occur only the information on the first error is displayed in the Error History window 11 3 2 Error code list The following table lists error codes When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Delectability in the table as explained below When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column Delectability Error code see F A Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal i station station Error detected in a CPU module 4000 to 4FFF QA QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Error detected in a serial communication module 7000 to 7FFF LA Serial Communication Module User s Manual and other relevant ma
242. an instructed to a station other than O O specification error number the standby master station A request such as the temporary error invalid station specification j Start the data link then issue the B30D Initial status line test request or data link p i O O request stop restart request was issued q before data link is started 295 SI p09 JON ZELL s po9 013 Ee Delectability Error code me A k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal i station station A function that is started using B30E Unsupported service SB SW and executable on the Perform the function from the 7 o error master station only was tried to master station be performed on a local station Specify a temporary error invalid A temporary error invalid station a Temporary error invalid p i station while data link is being i a was specified while data link was B30F station specification performed with parameters set O x being performed upon automatic i error f using a programming tool or CC Link startup dedicated instructions Execute Data link restart Data link restart SB0000 was 3 SB0000 to the station where B310 Data link restart error executed to the station that was j O O i f data link has been stopped using performing data link Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop SB0002 was
243. ance e CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 110Q used ms Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission speed F 4 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 30cm or longer 600m 2 5Mbps 200m Between 30cm and 59cm 110m 5Mbps 1m or longer 60cm or longer 150m Between 30cm and 59cm 50m 10Mbps Between 60cm and 99cm 80m 1m or longer 100m e CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 130Q used ae Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission speed 4 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 900m 2 5Mbps 400m 5Mbps 30cm or longer 160m Number of connected stations 100m 1 to 32 1m or longer Number of Between 30cm and 39cm 80m connected stations 10Mbps 33 to 48 40cm or longer 100m Numberor Between 30cm and 39cm 20m connected stations Between 40cm and 69cm 2 30m 49 to 64 70cm or longer 100m 1 2 3 30 This is a station to station cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations This is a station to station cable length between a master station and a station one before after the master station When this range is applied for one section the maximum overall cable distance is the shortest station to station cable length CHAPTER 3 SPE
244. anceling complete SB0058 5E5y b8 e Master station duplication error canceling result SW0057 6574 3 Timing chart of the link special relays SBs and link special register SW gt Executed by the master local module vette eeceeeceeeseees Executed on the program ON Master station duplication error canceling request SB0007 Master station duplication error canceling acknowledgement SB0057 Line check OFF Master station duplication error canceling complete SB0058 Result Master station duplication error canceling result SW0057 172 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules A master local module can perform the following operations by using dedicated instructions e Transient transmission to a master station local station and intelligent device station e Network parameter settings for a master station e Message transmission to remote device stations 9 1 Precautions 1 List of dedicated instructions The dedicated instructions that can be used for a master local module are listed below List of Dedicated Instructions Applicable Devices and Target station Instruction Description Reference GIP RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory areas of the target station or the Page 175 Master station P device in the C
245. andshake failure Delectability Error cause details Corrective action Master Local station station Check the program to see if any prohibited remote output RY has oan not been accessed With the message transmission If the same error persists after function abnormal data were O x i checking the above the master received module or remote device station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative During execution of message transmission a data link error Check the operation of the target has occurred on the remote device station corresponding station During execution of message ie Stop the data link and then transmission some parameters change parameters were changed Check the program to see if any O z prohibited remote output RY has o not been accessed With the message transmission A 5 If the same error persists after function abnormal data were i checking the above the master received module or remote device station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Increase the value for Monitoring With the mess t mission ith the message Transmission time setting SW0009 If the error function a communication i occurs again check the request timeout has occurred eats destination module and cables Data link stop SB0002 s ae oP ywa Stop data link after completion of executed during the message pice O x D message transmission
246. ansmission values set within the range Check the transmission speed A1 2 i Correct the value speed and same between the master values of all stations station and slave stations Is the online mode set to the Check the mode of the master A1 3 Mode Set the online mode master station station Check the network parameters of Are the network parameters the CPU module on the master for CC Link such as the station using the programming number of stations and tool Correct the network station information Check Host station number parameter correctly set SW0061 and Mode setting Format the CPU Does the master station status SW0060 module memory then Parameter have no error Check SW0068 SW0069 write the network is setting Are the network parameters syyo070 SwW0071 SWO0072 parameters for a network other than SW0074 to SW0077 SW0098 to CC Link correctly set SWO09B SW009C to SWOOSF Data link cannotbe and SW0144 to SW0147 i Disable the intelligent performed in Check if values are not set in the 9 the entire Are the settings correct Fa P function module switch intelligent function module switch f system Automatic CC Link startup eattin setting of the 9 programming tool Are there no disconnection short circuit incorrect wiring poor connection and coexistence of different 5 Check if cables between the cables LY wae master station and slave stations Correct the wiring Do a transm
247. appendix describes buffer memory areas 1 Parameter information area This area stores parameter settings Do not write data in this area Doing so may cause an error Address n Item Description Hexadecimal Decimal OH 0 Use prohibited The number of slave stations including a reserved station connected to the master 1 4 Total number of station is stored H connected stations Default 64 stations Range 1 to 64 station The number of retries to a station where a communication failure has occurred is N stored 2H 2 Number of retries i Default 3 times Range 1 to 7 time The number of slave stations that return to system operation by one link scan is 3 3 Number of automatic stored H return stations Default 1 station Range 1 to 10 station The standby master station number is stored Standby master R 44 4 ends Default 0 0 no standby master station specified station specification E Range 0 to 64 0 no standby master station specified 5H 5 Use prohibited The specified data link status if a programmable controller CPU error occurs in the Operation mater station is stored 6H 6 specification when Default 0 Stop CPU is down Range 0 Stop 1 Continued Whether to synchronize a link scan with a sequence scan is stored Default 0 Asynchronous TH 7 Scan mode setting Range 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous 8H 8 Delay time setting Delay tim
248. aster station Invalid mode pane Be e A local station is set to the Correct the mode setting in the among the master i i remote net additional mode master station local station or B3A0 station local station ee x O and the master station is setto standby master station then reset and standby master the mode other than the the CPU module station Si remote net additional mode e A local station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode or the remote net additional mode and the master station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode An invalid value is set for the B3A1 Standby master setting switch 5 of the intelligent function Set a correct value to the switch o X invalid module switch setting parameter 5 using a dedicated instruction In the remote I O net mode a station other than a remote I O Invalid station type in A Set all stations as a remote I O B3A2 station is set in the station type O x remote I O net mode j station parameter using a dedicated instruction In the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode the total number of remote station f i Change the number of remote B3A3 Assignment error points set in the station O x i station points information parameter has exceeded 8192 the maximum number of points 300 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code fore Description Error cause detail
249. aster station ON Master station duplex function Whether the host station has operated as a standby Host standby master aa SB007A i master station is indicated 5E7y b10 Fai operation OFF Not operated as a standby master station O i i y ON Operated as a standby master station Whether the host station is operating as a master station or standby master station is stored Host master standby at SB007B OFF The host station is operating as a master station 5E7y b11 ved operation during data link control O O x ON The host station is operating as a standby master station standby status Slave station The parameter setting status of the slave station refresh compulsory ne SB007C sl arseiling status in refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable 5E7y b12 case of controller CPU STOP is stored O O x p og ammabie OFF Refreshed ON Forcibly cleared controller CPU STOP The setting status of the automatic detection of connected SB007D Automatic detection of devices is stored 5E7y b13 connected devices OFF Do not read the model name of the slave stations O x x ON Read the model name of the slave stations 348 APPENDICES Number Name Description Availability O Yes x No Online Master Local Offline station station SB0080 5E8 bO Other station data link status Whether communications are being normally performed with a remote statio
250. ata size Set a receivable data size S1 3 so that it will satisfy the following conditional expression Receivable data size S1 3 gt Receive data size S1 4 Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Device Received stored in S1 4 Response PT LLL specified in S1 3 py tt t OSOOOCOS If the receivable data size S1 3 is smaller than the receive data size S1 4 data sent from a remote device station cannot be received The G P RDMSG instruction will fail error code B418 The following explains the operations when the receivable data size S1 3 is not equal to the receive data size S1 4 e Receivable data size S1 3 gt Receive data size S1 4 Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Device Received Response TY sway d 9 66 Data are not updated 223 224 e When the receivable data size S1 3 is an odd number of bytes Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station In the high byte of the last data Device Received 0 is stored Response ee e When the receive data size S1 4 is an odd number of bytes when data received from a remote device station is an odd number of bytes in length Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station In the high byte of the last data Device Received 0 is stored Response ee a CHAPTER 9 DEDICA
251. ation RXOUNo RXOF Occupies 1 station Remote I O station i i f f RX00 to RXOF RYO00 to RYOF f f f f IRX10toRX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to NIF a a A neice l R20 to RX2F X00 to XOF Y00 to YOF Seton NUMDENS iO O Pe RY20 to RY2F PE T Seer i o E Weel ood Occupies 1 station RX30 to RX3F Y10t0YIF 7 gt RX40 to RX4F f N seee a E X00 to XOF Y00 to YOF ee eS JNO RAR je eee eee eee RX50 to RXSF X10 to X1F Y10to Y1F i ETENEE E ae Inputs RX RWr of the standby master station are stored in the outputs RY RWw of the master station By transferring the outputs RY RWw of the master station to the inputs RX RWr inputs from the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above lt 7 Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 140 4 Setting method Set the function in the network parameters of a programming tool CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Project window gt Parameter 2 gt Network Parameter 2 gt CC Link a Settings for a master station Configure the settings in Type and Standby Master Station No of the network parameter as follows For other settings refer to Page 97 Section 7 3 2 1 Set the station number to 0 using the station number setting switch on the master local module QJ61BT11N RUN 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting in Type as fol
252. ation Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system ZX Online gt Write to PLC LLL D or power off on 250 3 A CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING Set the switch on the CPU module in the master station to RUN to execute the program Executing the program turns on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D Then the initial setting is executed H When the initial setting is completed the input value of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN is converted into a digital value CH 1 digital output value is stored into D500 and CH 2 digital output value is stored into D501 If an error occurs in the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN an error code is stored into D508 After the cause of the error is removed and X25 is turned on the error is reset Turning on X22 sets the digital value of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Turning on X23 outputs the analog value from the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN If an error occurs in the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN an error code is stored into D518 After the cause of the error is removed and X26 is turned on the error is reset 251 jdwex welbold G Z OL uoe s 39149 J0W Y e pue UOlje1S 19 sey e u mz g suoedlunwwop zo jdwexg ToL 10 2 6 252 Program example when the initial setting is configured only on a program This section provides an example of when the initial setting is configured only on a program not ona programming tool 1 Devices to
253. ation single 6H Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station single 8H Ver 2 compatible remote device station double 9H Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station double BH Ver 2 compatible remote device station quadruple Cu Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station quadruple EH Ver 2 compatible remote device station octuple Fu Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station octuple 60 to 7Fy 96 to 127 a prohibited The buffer memory sizes assigned for a local station 80H Send buffer 128 Send buffer 8 intelligent device station and standby master station during 81H Receive buffer 129 Receive buffer v A er 82H Automatic update __ 130 Automatic update transient transmission are stored buffer 3 buffer 8 Default eT g g Assignment Send buffer size 404 64 word EFE HE to to of Receive buffer size 404 64 word g 8 communica Automatic update buffer size 804 128 word CBu Send buffer Z 203 Send buffer canal Range CCu Receive buffer 6 204 Receive buffer 5 and Sa CDH Automatic update N 205 Automatic update N 2 Automatic e Communication buffer buffer E 2 buffer E 2 Op 0 word not set or 404 64 word to 10004 4096 word update Note that the total size of the communication buffer must be within buffer 4000 4096 word e Automatic update buffer Oy 0 word not set or 804 128 word to 10004 4096 word Note that the to
254. ation value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 1x 3 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 20 3 x 1x3 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 30 5ms 21 5ms 30 5ms 21 5ms 20 x 1 3 x2 3 1 5 20x 1 x 2 1 5 20 3 x2x3 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 Max value 39 5ms 41 5ms 39 5ms 41 5ms 375 oul Aejap uolssiuusues Zp xipueddy ew Bulsseooig U1 eyeq y xIpueddy b Master station RY remote device station RY RWr This is the time between the device of a CPU module turning on off and the output of a remote device station turning on off or between data set in the device of a CPU module and the data in a remote device station ch anged Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time m Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 x m 1 Rd SM x t LS x m Rd SM LS x
255. ation points setting 170 Remote input RX 00000005 99 331 Remote net additional mode 14 43 51 Remote net mode nonna nanana aanne 14 Remote net Ver 1 mode 14 43 46 Remote net Ver 2 mode 14 43 48 Remote output RY 00000 99 332 Remote register RWr 2200005 99 333 Remote register RWwW 000 99 334 Remote station 0 0 00 c eee eee eee 14 Remote Station Points 105 107 Replacing a QJ61BT11 with a QJ61BT11N 396 Replacing an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 with AQJ61BT11N 0 0 ee ee 395 Reserve Invalid Station Select 107 Reserved station 0 000002 eee nee 162 Reserved Err Invalid STA 2005 105 Retry COURE 4 024 4 d650 dte4ne4 ob ood eal oes 100 Retumis r sack Mckee ohare earn eh wate cde Weak tae 14 RUN LED Ii 2 cares and aor al arn Ste Adds Gear soa dee 21 RV ieee tl ee ge Pa eke ee ha 13 RWW e rs Seid Basalt SRG eal x Sate Bhs ance at ARINE 13 Rx A EP a Racal Otel RR ark ee Bee a 13 BRYA er cece oak at Mita an Lol St ee he allt cat 13 SMS PLEDD aaay snc as fees ye asa PAS Saale Bh ad A ifa 21 Safety precautions 1 0 eee 1 SBivinn ects hot ok buddoa el a ed Bee 13 343 Scan Mode Setting 220005 100 Scan synchronization 20 163 SCREWS resis 25 5 2h sant are ar hs atl eh arn Et 8 Saale 78 SD LED s is tamani a eee A See
256. autions for programming and a program example refer to the manual for the Redundant CPU used T QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 230 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 5 For the configuration where a remote I O station is connected in the remote net Ver 2 mode Different from the remote net Ver 1 mode RWr RWw slide over by the number of points of remote I O stations in a master station and a local station RX RY also slide over if the points are changed in Remote Station Points of Station Information Setting Consider it when assign them Ex Assignment example when RWr RWw slide over ete ew ee ew ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee a l represents the station numbers that slide over by the number of points of remote I O stations y Master station Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote O station Remote device station Remote device station eee Range of the station No 1 sending data TETELE O Station No 1 Range of the Peter eee station No 2 sending data RX Range of the station No 3 sending data Station No 2 TETEE OT Cee hr l Station No 3 RY Range of the master station sending data to Station No 1 the station No 1 Range of the master station sending data to Station No 2 the station No 2 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 RWr
257. b Simultaneous execution of the G P RIWT instruction The G P RIWT instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D turns on 184 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RIWT instruction Completion device D and Status display device at completion D 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIWT instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process e Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RIWT instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIWT instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End process End process End process End process Program e ON the G P RIWT eS a G P RIWT instruction or A gt Completion device COl EE EEE ls
258. be initialized swo017 Remote device station initialization on procedure registration instruction 3B0000 OFF gt ON Execution status of remote device l station initialization procedure SBODRE OFF Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SB005F OFF procedure registration execution to individual information SW011F Remote device station initialization swo110 X 110 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 4 Interrupt Settings Project window lt gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Interrupt Settings button 1 in Interrupt Settings window set the conditions on which a master local module issues the interrupt to a CPU module 2 Click the End button and close the setting window Interrupt Settings Module 1 Input Format DEC a Detection Device Code Device No Method 0001 Edge Detect Clear Check End Cancel The setting is not required for a master local module i No Connection No g q Refer to the following table Set the interrupt SI No used for the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC parameter Item Description Setting range e DEC Input Format Select the input format of Word Device Setting Value e HEX NN Default DEC w w F N v Device Code n L Set the device for the interrupt condition D o Device No 3 Q Detection Meth
259. be used Devices are the same as those when the initial setting is configured on a programming tool gt Page 248 Section 10 2 5 1 2 Program example 1 Create the following program on a programming tool Confirmation of the data link status X0 XOF X1 Swe i J r 0 0 t 1 1 H Mc NO M100 SW80 3 SW80 0 Y30 SW80 3 Y31 NO M100 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Initial setting X1018 E J MOVP H3 w100 MOVP H31 w101 MOVP H200 W103 MOVP K16 W105 SET Y1018 1 SET Y1019 Pete E E AE E E E E T T eee EA eee E E E E E AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Initial setting change 1 X20 a 1 ft MOVP H3 w100 Li i j l MOVP H30 w101 1 i MovP H200 w103 I l ji 1 MOVP K16 w105 I Li 1 SET Y1019 vc cee cat cass est ch ted vn seat Seyi vie Yedda enya cacao ace Gos ad toca ey tat cali asia ont A a a fee a a A a AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Process of completing the initial setting X1018 4A RST Y1018 X1019 _ RST Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting X1078 E MOVP HOFC W114 MOVP H31 W115 MOVP HO W117 SET Y1078 SET Y1079 Data link is normal J AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Data link error AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Data link error AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to 4 input range setting RWw1 Averaging process specification RWw3 CH 2 average time numb
260. being performed is SB006E Host station operating stored 5E6p b14 status OFF In process O O ON Not performed Whether the block guarantee of cyclic data per station has Setting status of block yoke SBOO6F been set to the host station is stored 5E6 b15 guarantee or cyclic OFF Not set O O x data per station ON Set ages Master teen k ees the master station oO O x 5E7 b0 information l l ON Data link control by the standby master station SB0071 Standby master Whether a standby master station exists is stored 5E7y b1 station information OFF Absence O O ON Present SB0072 Scan mode setting shea aati eg eee ie o x x 5E7y b2 information ON Synchronous mode Operation The parameter setting status of the operation specification B0073 sl tas when CPU is down is stored oo 5E7y b3 speciticatgri when OFF Stopped O O x 3 CPU is down status aa ON Continued x X Whether a reserved station has been specified by the 2 parameter is stored E gt OFF Not specified as ON Specified The set station number is stored in 2 F SB0074 Reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 z a 5E7 b4 specified status O e pe Depending on the link refresh timing SBO074 may be pe 5 updated with the time difference of one sequence scan wD D from the update of Reserved station specified status lt SW0074 to SW0077 Whether an error invalid station has been specified using z the parameter is stored pe OFF Not
261. bled 285 10119 eByep o10A0 0 ENP SWIAIGOld ZT LL SWAI GOld JO S SI SLL 3 Problems due to cyclic data error in an intelligent device station local station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Set the devices so that they Has the auto refresh been Check if no device overlaps do not overlap with ones correctly set RX RY RWw with ones used in programs j used in programs and in RWr SB and SW or in other networks other networks Access the correct buffer Check if no device in the memory area in the master master station overlaps with station E1 1 Refresh data ones used in programs orin Set the devices so that they area Is the accessed buffer other networks do not overlap with ones Cyclic data memory area correct RX used in programs cannot be RY RWw RWr SB and Access the correct buffer read written SW Check if no device in the memory area in the local local station overlaps with station ones used in programs orin Set the devices so that they other networks do not overlap with ones used in programs 3 Check if the bit Isn t a station to which ie corresponding to the faulty Parameter reading writing cannot be olen Cancel the reserved station E1 2 i 7m station is not 1 in Reserved setting performed specified as a n Ae setting station specified status reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 Word data Sa Do the parameter sett
262. c Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous of 4 fe jo Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Initial Setting CC Link Configuration Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas 141 uoloun Jajsew Aqpueis S78 Aygeiley wWejsks y Bujnosdw 7g b Settings for a standby master station Configure the settings in Type and Mode of the network parameter as follows For other settings refer to Page 115 Section 7 4 2 1 Set the station number from 1 to 64 using the station number setting switches on the master local module Set the same number as that of Standby Master Station No that was set for the master station QU61BT11N RUN 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting in Type as follows Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link O Enabled x Disabled Function Operation When the master station goes down the standby master station operates as a master station to When a failed master station becomes normal again it returns as a standby master station When only a standby master station is started up it starts data link asa master station continue data link Setting in Type Master station switching O Standby Master
263. ce specified by D1 and subsequent devices and the device specified by D2 turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RIRCV instruction The G P RIRCV instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D2 turns on 189 c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RIRCV instruction Completion device D2 and Status display device at completion D2 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRCV instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RIRCV instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRCV instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End End End End process process process process Program S H n ON G P RIRCV instruction OF Z
264. ced master master switching switching request complete 149 uoloun Jajsew Aqpueiys S78 Aygeiiey weysks ey Bulroidw 7g 8 2 6 Cyclic data assurance This function prevents read write data from being separated between new and old data Point Before using this function check the versions of the master local module and programming tool lt _ gt Page 399 Appendix 6 2 1 Block data assurance per station Cyclic data may be separated between new and old data depending on the timing of the automatic refresh This function prevents read write data per slave station from being separated between new and old data Because the setting is configured only on a programming tool a program to prevent data separation is not required a Data to be assured This function is applicable to data automatically transferred to a CPU module automatic refresh by setting the refresh device of the network parameter Data in RX RY RWr and RWw are assured per slave station b Operation of a data assurance Identity of data per slave station is assured as follows Ex To assure data of the remote stations with the number of occupied stations of 3 and 1 Remote station Remote station Station No 1 Station No 4 CPU module the number of the number of device Master local module occupied stations 3 occupied stations 1 Data Station No 1 Station No 1 Station No 1 uaranieed to the to the to the g station No 3 Auto re
265. cessity of a setting Local station Item Remark Master station standby master station Number of Modules O O Start I O No O O Parameter Name A A Data Link Faulty Station A A Setting Case of CPU STOP Setting A A Set it only when Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Auto Detect Setting of the Operation A x Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Connected Device i Setting Net Additional Mode is set to Mode Number of Occupied Stations x O Set it only when Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Expanded Cyclic Setting x O lt 2 Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode Block Data Assurance per A A 7 Station It is automatically input when Station Type is Type O O A a set in the CC Link configuration window Master Station Data Link Type x x It is automatically input when Mode is set in Mode O O s the CC Link configuration window It is automatically input when the station Total Module Connected O x information is set in the CC Link configuration window Remote Input RX A A Remote Output RY A A Remote Register RWr A A Remote Register RWw A A Ver 2 Remote Input RX A A Ver 2 Remote Output RY A A Set it only when Remote Net Additional Mode Ver 2 Remote Register RWr A A is set to Mode Ver 2 Remote Register RWw A A Special Relay SB A A Special Register SW A A Retry Count O x The settings are not required when Remo
266. cified device sre Within the range of the S3 Start number of the device in which an interlock signal is stored p i specified device D Device that turns ON for one scan upon completion of writing Within the range of the Bit i D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal end specified device 4 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 192 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 User 1 2 REESE CORE Set 00044 00044 User Attribute code 1 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory 4 User S1 4 Number of write points Specify the number of write data in word units 1 to 480 2 User 4 For details refer to the manual for the intelligent device station to which data are written 2 The value indicates the maximum number of write data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the intelligent device station or within the receive buffer area setting range set by a parameter b Interlock signal storage device Setting Device Item Setting data S
267. consult your local BD85 i sok O O detection detected Mitsubishi representative BD86 and BD87 BF11 to BF1C Please consult your local System error P O O BF20 Mitsubishi representative BF30 to BF37 Check the application of the A An error has been detected in Execution result read request source reading the execution result in BF38 error remote device Check if another peripheral is O O j access from the peripherals to station access y not accessing the remote the remote device station device station Check the application of the request source An error has been detected inthe Check if multiple peripherals Request procedure request procedure in access from are not accessing the remote BF39 error remote device j i O O the peripherals to the remote device station station access i f device station Check if a value is not written in the system area in the buffer memory Please consult your local BF40 to BF42 System error L f O O Mitsubishi representative 309 SI p09 JON ZELL s po9 03 EL Delectability Error code ee E k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station The station type of a target Message transmission station for the message Correct the station type of a target BF43 target module station transmission is not either a station and execute the function O
268. ction set the refresh devices in the network parameter If the refresh devices are not set the remote input RX remote output RY and remote register RWr RWw of the buffer memory may not be refreshed Assurance of 32 bit data Integrity of 32 bit data in remote register RWr RWw is assured even if Block Data Assurance per Station is not set gt Page 153 Section 8 2 6 2 Transmission delay time and link refresh time When this function is used transmission delay time and link refresh time become longer than those of when this function is not used When designing a system based on an existing system check the transmission delay time and link refresh time at startup of the system gt Page 371 Appendix 4 2 Page 389 Appendix 4 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 32 bit data integrity assurance This function prevents read write data in 32 bit increments from being separated between new and old data a Data to be assured The data in the remote register RWr RWw between a CPU module master station and local station are assured b Method of a data assurance The following two conditions are required for assurance e The first address of the remote register RWr RWw has an even number e When accessing the remote register RWr RWw using a program access them with an even number of devices CPU module DMOV Master station CPU module Master station ee Remote register DMOV 4 Remote register
269. ction 7 5 Section 8 4 1 Section 10 2 5 Section 10 1 3 Section 10 2 3 Section 10 3 3 Section 10 3 5 Section 11 2 4 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 4 4 Section 13 3 1 Section 13 3 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 8 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Deletion Section 7 2 2 SH NA 080394E M Complete revision layout change SH NA 080394E N TERMS PACKING LIST Section 1 1 1 2 Chapter 2 Section 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 6 2 4 1 5 2 1 5 3 6 2 3 6 4 7 2 7 3 2 7 4 2 8 2 1 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 3 1 8 3 4 8 3 6 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 8 1 10 2 1 10 3 1 11 1 11 2 11 5 Appendix 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 4 6 9 11 Japanese Manual Version SH 080395 P This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 422 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Servic
270. d 6084 during line test e Do not execute a line test using a program or other peripherals at the same time The line test may not be normally executed After the line test is completed the result is displayed on the right side of the window CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 Using the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master local module There are two types of line tests line test 1 and line test 2 First a line test 1 is executed If the line test 1 is abnormally ended a line test 2 is executed Item Description Line test 1 To check the status of communications with all the modules connected If the test is abnormally ended the faulty station is identified in a line test 2 Line test 2 To check the status of communications with a specific slave station Point A line test can be executed when a CC Link dedicated cable is connected and the station number and transmission speed are set in a slave station No parameter setting is required in the master local module However to execute a line test 2 for a standby master station the parameter setting is required in the standby master station When the data link start function is used execute a line test using a programming tool Page 86 Section 6 5 1 1 a Line test 1 Before the line test 1 check the following 1 Universal model High Performance model QCPU QCPU e If the switch on the CPU module
271. d L is selected the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is changed to STOP For how to stop data link refer to Page 320 Section 11 4 5 in this manual If a CC Link dedicated cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction Design Precautions CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix th
272. d Status display device at completion D 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RISEND instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process e Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RISEND instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RISEND instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End End End End process process process process Program m A m Execution completion of ON the G P RISEND G P RISEND OFF instruction device at completion instruction I ON Completion device ORE S o o l i Lo f E Noma ae Status display OFF 1 completion y Request device RYn Completion device RXn Receive completion d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RISEND instruction is ten GN3SsIy d 9 S6 e Assignment of the send buffer The assignment of the send buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intell
273. d by D turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RLPASET instruction Two or more G P RLPASET instructions cannot be executed simultaneously c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RLPASET instruction Completion device D and Status display device at completion D 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RLPASET instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process e Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RLPASET instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RLPASET instruction is Abnormal end completed and turns off in the next END process 210 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d Process after the completion of the G P RLPASET instruction After the completion of the G P RLPASET instruction turn on Refresh instruction when changing parameters by the dedicated instruction SB0003 and refresh cyclic data When all the stations are normal End End End End End End End process process process process process process process Program EE ice Refresh stop gt lt Refresh start D Data link start G P RLPASE instruction completion Data link stop Host data link status X01 Refresh instruction when changing parameters
274. d up with a master local module operating as a local station When a master local module is started up with the station numbers 1 to 64 it is started up as a local station The table below lists the parameter settings of when CC Link is automatically started up by a master local module operating as a local station Item Setting details Operation Setting Refer to Page 160 Section 8 3 3 2 a Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Refresh devices Refer to Page 160 Section 8 3 3 1 b a Operation Setting Item Setting details Data Link Faulty Station Setting Clear the input data Case of CPU STOP Setting Refresh Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station 1 Block Data Assurance per Station Disable the setting 160 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Number of modules connected a When two or more master local modules are connected in one programmable controller system The automatic CC Link startup function applies to a module with the smallest start I O number only In a multiple CPU system the function applies to a master local module with the smallest start I O number among master local modules controlled by each CPU module b Number of connectable network modules When the automatic CC Link startup is performed the number of network modules that can be connected to the CPU module of a master station is as follows The number of CC Link IE Control
275. dby master SB0043 complete status at switching has been completed is stored o x 5E4 63 standby master OFF Not executed switching ON Switched Whether the data link stop instruction has been accepted SB0044 Data link stop is stored o o 5E4 b4 acceptance OFF Not accepted ON Accepted Whether the data link stop instruction has been completed SB0045 Data link stop is stored x 5E4p b5 complete OFF Not completed O O ON Stopped 344 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether Forced master switching SBOOOC can be O Forced master SB0046 S executed is stored Standby switching executable x x 5E41 b6 eh OFF Cannot be executed master atus ON Can be executed station only Tempo 5 Whether the temporary error invalid instruction has been mporary error SB0048 aj os ee accepted is stored invali eptance 5E4 b8 p OFF Not executed O status ON Accepted Whether the temporary error invalid instruction has been SB0049 ee ae egan is x x 5E4y b9 invalid complete Not execute O status ON A temporary error invalid station determined specified station number invalid Temporary error Whether the temporary error invalid cancel instruction has SB004A invalid canceling been accepted is stored x x 5E4y b10 acknowledgement OFF Not executed O status ON Acc
276. ddy 387 388 e G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 x 1 13 WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU QO02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO02CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 lt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SW000B Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 7271 x 1 13 WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 7271 x 1 13 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5x 12 1 x 1 13 0 66 15 66 2ms 4 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES Appendix 4 4 Link refresh time This section describes link refresh time extended time of the END process in the CPU module 1 Master station local station The link refresh time of a master station and local station are calculated as follows a In the remote net Ver 1 mode and remote net Ver 2 mode Formula aT KM1 KM2x ere RWw RWr SW x E Number of CC Link modules 1 xKM4 ms aE
277. displayed when the setting details of the network parameters are printed using a programming tool Eight characters Default Blank Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station gt Page 121 Section 7 5 Page 131 Section 8 2 3 e Clear input data not checked e Hold input data checked Default Clear input data not checked Case of CPU STOP Setting Select whether to refresh or clear compulsorily output sending data to a master station when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP Page 121 Section 7 5 Page 133 Section 8 2 4 e Refresh not checked Clear compulsorily checked Default Refresh not checked The settings are not required when the master local module is used as a local station or standby master station Number of Occupied Stations Select the number of occupied stations for a master local module Select it only when Local Station or Standby Master Station is set to Type Occupied Station 1 Occupied Station 2 Occupied Station 3 Occupied Station 4 Default Occupied Station 1 Expanded Cyclic Setting Select the expanded cyclic setting for a master local module Select the setting only for the following cases When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode When Local Station or Standby Master Station is set to Type e Single e Double
278. ds Blank No Setting I Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window i 2 3 Start 1 0 No Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay 5B Special Register SW aa AS Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas 4 1 This item is automatically set by the CC Link configuration window Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Please input the start 1 No where the CC Link is connected in 16 point unit Print Window Acknowledge XY Print Window ictal oer Clear 2 Check the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window at the top of the window for GX Works2 only 3 Input settings to the Network Parameter window gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 4 Clickthe Ea button 5 Write the settings to the CPU module using the programming tool D Online lt gt Write to PLC 6 The settings are
279. ds Blank No Setting I Sett Start I O No 000 p Parameter Name Operation Setting Type Master Station Data Link Type Mode Remote Net ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected Remote Input RX 1000 Remote Output RY y1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX W100 Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Yer 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB 5B0 Special Register 5W Swo Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas Data Link Faulty Station Setting T Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting T Clears Compulsorily 3 Click the End button to terminate the setting 4 Write the parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started D Online gt Write to PLC lt n or power off gt on Number of Occupied Stations JOccupied Station 1 x J Single Block Data Assurance per Station I Enable Setting 261 uonels e90 e 10 SSUMeS E TOL uonels e90 pue uones 139 Sse e uaamyag suoeorunwwog Jo ajdwexg OL
280. e RWr0 X1001 MOV w D501 J Read CH 2 digital output value RWr1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Process at error occurrence XPA MOVP W8 D508 Read Error code RWr8 ani SET YIOIA Turn on Error reset request flag RY1A bi ga a RST YIOIA J Turn off Error reset request flag RY1A AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Digital value setting X22 X107B Set CH 1 digital value setting ee r hK MOVP K500 w10c J RWw0 Set CH 2 digital value setting S r MOVP K1000 w10D J RWw1 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting X23 X107B Turn on CH 1 analog output 1f if 1 vrosp enable disable flag RY00 Y1061 Turn on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RY01 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Process at error occurrence X107A Read CH 1 check code RWr0 Pot i g a PEMONE MUG Dele NRA J and CH 2 check code RWr1 MOVP W14 D518 J Read Error code RWr8 X26 Turn on Error reset request J f LSET YI0o7A J flag RY1A YIO7A _ X107A RST vioza J Tum off Error reset request i flag RY1A MCR NO 7 END The program is needed only for the initial setting change 2 Write the program to the CPU module in the master station Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Online gt Write to PLC lt q or power off gt on weubod e uo juo painByuoo s Bunjes jeniul ay UayM jdwex wesbold 9 Z OL UONeIS 99149 9J0WY E pue UONEIS 19 Se UBEMIEg suoeaiunwwog Jo a
281. e Select one from M L B D W R and ZR Remote Register RWw refresh device Device name Select one from M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Input RX refresh device Device name Select one from X M L B D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Output RY refresh device Device name Select one from Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Register RWr refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Register RWw refresh device Device name Select one from M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Special Relay SB refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R SB and ZR Special Register SW refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R SW and ZR 409 jeaus Buljes soyowesed YWIOMJON Z8 xipueddy jooys Hues g xipueddy Item Setting range Setting value 1to7 Retry Count Default 3 1 to 10 Automatic Reconnection Station Count Default 1 Standby Master Station No Blank or 1 to 64 Blank no standby master station specified Default Blank PLC Down Select Stop Continue Default Stop Stop Continue Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous Synchronous Default Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous Delay Time Setting Enter 0 410 APPENDICES Appendix 8 3 Station information setting sheet Reserve Intellige
282. e module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions A WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before installation and wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product After wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightenin
283. e 407 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address r Device Station No Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal Y1000 to Y100F 1604 352 RYO to RYF 1 AJ65BTB2 16T Y1010 to Y101F 1614 353 to Y1020 to Y102F 1624 354 RYO to RYF 2 AJ65BTB1 16DT Y1030 to Y103F 1634 355 to 4 In the AJ65BTB1 16DT the first eight points are used for input and the last eight points are used for output RY8 to RYF are used for output in the AJ65BTB1 16DT In a CPU module Y1028 to Y102F are actually used AJ65BTB2 16T output module Remote 1 0 station AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote 1 0 station CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 lanes Buffer memory Device Remote output RY 160H 352 Y1000 Y100F 1611 353 Y1020 162H 354 Y1028 i om SSS SSS Y102F i 163H 355 Y1030 Device actually used by the remote I O stations Y103F iq T ii Ik ii i i il i ii if Y101F kK ii ii i i i ih 1 i i T I if e Remote register RWr Because an AJ65BTB2 16T and AJ65BTB1 16DT are remote I O stations the remote register RWr is not used Note however that four points equivalent to the points for one station are occupied in the master local module because the system is in the remote net Ver 1 mode AJ65BTB2 16
284. e Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if f
285. e G P RIRD instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process e Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RIRD instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRD instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End process End process End process End process Program SSS ees eS Execution completion of i T the G P RIRD instruction G P RIRD instruction FF _P aaa i ON Completion device OR M Abnormal end S s Status display device _OFF Normal completion at completion 1 scan d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIRD instruction is eight e Assignment of the receive buffer The assignment of the receive buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 auyly d S 76 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module a When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempting to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of
286. e Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SB0 Special Register SwW swo eC a b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for other purposes Address Item Reference Hexadecimal Decimal E04 to 1 5Fy 224 to 351 Remote input RX Page 331 Appendix 2 2 160p to 1DFy 352 to 479 Remote output RY 1E0 to 2DFy 480 to 735 Remote register RWw Page 333 Appendix 2 3 2E0 to 3DFy 736 to 991 Remote register RWr 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw Areas are assigned by 32 points in the order of station number to the remote input RX and remote output RY To the remote register RWr and RWw areas are assigned by four points in the order of station number Page 331 Appendix 2 2 Page 333 Appendix 2 3 47 SpowW J8 JOU SJOWSY 9E s poy pue juswubissy 9 E 3 6 4 Remote net Ver 2 mode This mode is selected when a new CC Link system including a Ver 2 compatible slave station is configured More points can be used compared to the remote net Ver 1 mode gt Page 24 Section 3 2 Ver 2 compatible area 1 2 3 48 2 Range of the master Remote device station Intelligent devic
287. e _ 12 gist Procedure Set New 5 Regist Procedure 13 Regist Procedure 6 Regist Procedure _ 14 Regist Procedure Set New 7 Regist Procedure _ 15 Regist Procedure Execute 5et New 8 Regist Procedure _ 16 Regist Procedure Set New Set New ear Check End Cancel Set New Execute Set New Execute Set New Default e Remote Device Station Initial Setting Target Station Number Setting window Item Description Setting range Target Station No Set the station number of the station where the initial settings are y 1 to 64 Default Blank configured No of Registered The number of the procedures registered using the Regist Procedure Procedures button is displayed Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration is Regist Procedure displayed by clicking it e Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration window Item Description Setting range e DEC Input Format Select the input format of Write Data HEX Default DEC 108 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Select whether to actually execute the registered procedure or not e Execute Only Set Default Execute Click it to change the setting Execute Fla 2 Set Only Set to use the setting only as a reference when inputting similar setting items Set New e Same as Prev Set Default Set New Select whether to newly s
288. e and synchronous mode are explained below using examples of communications between a master station and remote I O station Point Even if latched device listed in CPU side device in the table below data are cleared to 0 using a program at reset of the CPU module or at power off and on the latched data may be output depending on the timing of a link scan and link refresh For how to prevent output of latched device data perform actions listed in How to disable the setting in the table below CPU side device How to disable the setting Latch relay L Clear the value of the device to 0 using the initial device File register R ZR value Extended data register D Universal model QCPU only Extended link register W Universal model QCPU only Delete all latch range settings Device in the latch range A For how to set an initial device value refer to the manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals a Data flow in the asynchronous mode CPU module Sequence scan Master station buffer memory Remote input RX gt lt A gt lt gt Ss NS Link scan HHHH M n Response time of the first station J i 1 Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station i H 1 r f f 1 1 f Responses from remote H H I O stations H HI H J Input 1 Input 2 gt
289. e data specified in the control data is stored in the device of the CPU module i For timing of the automatic update refer to the manual for the AJ65BT R2 N QA CC Link System RS 232 Interface Module User s Manual Nonprocedural Protocol Mode 340 APPENDICES 10 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX and Ver 2 compatible remote output RY These areas are used when the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected In the remote net Ver 2 mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY in all slave stations including Ver 1 compatible slave stations gt Page 50 Section 3 6 4 3 e In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY in the Ver 2 compatible slave station gt Page 54 Section 3 6 5 3 a Storage location for each station The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size A information Un G992 to Un G1503 gt Page 335 Appendix 2 4 li The last two bits of RX RY cannot be used for communications between the master station and a local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 1 the number Station No 2 the number Local station Local station of occupied stations 1 of occupi
290. e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIRCV G RIRCV Un S1 D1 S2 D2 Command GP RIRCV GPRIRCV Un 6 2 03 Applicable device Link direct Intelli Setting Internal device ne igeni File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H D1 O S2 O D2 O o 1 Setting data gt Q T Device Description Setting range Data type z ea O Un Start VO number of the module First two digits of I O number written 0 to FE 46 bit binary lt with three digits oo Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device F Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is stored i Device name specified device Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device in which an interlock signal is stored Si specified device D2 Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of reading Within the range of the Bit i D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 4 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 187 a Control data i Setting Device Item
291. e is stored Set 0 R Reserved station specification status is stored Reserved station 10 to 134 16 to 19 ONE Default 0 Not set specification f f Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on f Error invalid station specification status is stored Error invalid station 144 to 174 20 to 23 nines Default 0 Not set specification i Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on 328 APPENDICES Address k gt a z z em escription Hexadecimal Decimal 184 to 1Fy 24 to 31 ee prohibited The setting status of the station type the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting of the connected slave stations is stored Default 01014 Ver 1 compatible remote I O station one station occupied and station number 1 to 0140 Ver 1 compatible remote I O station one station occupied and station number 64 Range Refer to the following b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to bO i Number of 20 First station 32 First station Station type occupied stations Station No Station 41 to 64 n to information i to 40H i i i 5SFy 64th station 95 64th station 1H Number of occupied stations 1 2H Number of occupied stations 2 3H Number of occupied stations 3 4H Number of occupied stations 4 OH Ver 1 compatible remote I O station 1H Ver 1 compatible remote device station 2H Ver 1 compatible intelligent device station 5H Ver 2 compatible remote device st
292. e number of occupied stations 1 BT 0 8 NI 12 gt 16 NW 11 gt 16 N 5 ni 12 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 16 x 4 8 16 x 9 6 5 x 30 12 x 4 8 10 x 9 6 2300 160 2908 8us 2 91ms ST 2300 2 The number of occupied stations 2 expanded cyclic setting Quadruple 3 The number of setting Single 1 800 12 x 15 980 2 900 3 x 50 1050 3 1200 11 x 100 2300 A 12 B 3 C 11 occupied stations 4 expanded cyclic EX 50 110 x 1 160 APPENDICES 2 In the remote I O net mode LS BT 27 NI x 4 8 N x 30 ni x 4 8 ST RT F us BT Constant transmission speed Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BT 51 2 12 8 3 2 1 6 0 8 NI Last station number The value should be multiples of 8 A Last 3 1to8 9 to 16 17 to24 25 to 32 33to40 41to48 49to56 57 to 64 station No NI 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 N Number of connected modules ni Total number of occupied stations ST Constant 250 ni x 10 RT Retry processing time Only the link scan with a faulty slave station where data link is being performed is added a B x number of detected faulty stations 1 a Retry processing time of the first station BT x 778 5 R x 3 R 13 2 NI x 4 8 B Retry processing time of the second and subsequent stations BT x 778 5 P x 3 P 10 8 F Return processin
293. e oe a _ dedicated instruction RST M1 Set read request to OFF Set G P RIRCV instruction executing flag to OFF RST M10 END 191 9 5 G P RISEND The G P RISEND instruction automatically performs handshaking with the intelligent device station and writes data to the buffer memory areas of the specified intelligent device station The instruction is available for modules that have a handshake signal e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RISEND ersen un st 69 83 D Command GP RISEND GPRISEND Un 51 62 63 D Applicable device k s Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device A l i E File device function module Index Constant data System user i Others register JO O device register ZO unco Bit Word Bit Word K H S1 O S2 O S3 O D O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written ak Un e 0 to FEy 16 bit binary with three digits os Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored po specified device Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which data to be written is stored p Device name spe
294. e on the B1 1 CPU module so that the CPU master station have no error module may identify the master local Check if the module has been module identified I User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection Check power supplied to the Apply the voltage Power supply for p i Pp PPY Bi 2 oo Isn t a voltage low master station and all slave within the specified communications stations range Are there no disconnection Check if cables between the Cable or other Suk ss B1 3 short circuit and poor master station and slave stations Correct the wiring Data link parts connection are not disconnected cannot be performed in Keep the transmission the entire cable away from the system Check if the transmission cable is power cable Keep a away from the power cable distance of 100mm or more is recommended B1 4 Nois Is the transmission cable free Check if the FG terminal is oise from noise grounded separately from the Ground the terminals GND terminal of the power separately system o Take noise reduction Reduce the transmission speed measures and check if the frequency of Pe Reduce the occurrence of noise is reduced ae transmission speed _ Repair or replace the Failure of the Do modules on the master Replace the modules and check if Bi 5 module on the master master station station normally operate the station normally operates saton ion Do not turn o
295. e register RWr F Buffer a Buffer Buffer A Buffer 3 Buffer Station memory Station memory Station MEMOrY Station memory Station memory number number number number number address address address address address 2E0y to 2E34 a 314p to 3174 ig 348 to 34By a6 37CH to 37Fy 3B0 to 3B34 736 to 739 788 to 791 840 to 843 892 to 895 944 to 947 5 2E4 to 2E74 is 318 to 31By z 34Cy to 34F4 i 3804 to 3834 e 3B4 to 3B74 740 to 743 792 to 795 844 to 847 896 to 899 948 to 951 3 2E8 to 2EB ag 31Cy to 31F z 350 to 353 a 384 to 387 ee 3B8 to 3BB 744 to 747 796 to 799 848 to 851 900 to 903 952 to 955 j 2ECy to 2EFy ig 320 to 3234 ba 354 to 3574 A 3884 to 38By ee 3BCy to 3BFy 748 to 751 800 to 803 852 to 855 904 to 907 956 to 959 P 2F0p to 2F34 ig 3244 to 3274 a 358 to 35By i 38Cy to 38Fy 57 3C0y to 3C3 752 to 755 804 to 807 856 to 859 908 to 911 960 to 963 A 2F4y to 2F74 328 to 32By is 35Cy to 35Fy a6 390 to 393 5g 3C4y to 3C7H 756 to 759 808 to 811 860 to 863 912 to 915 964 to 967 4 2F8 to 2FBy 3 32Cy to 32F4 360 to 3634 a6 3944 to 3974 5 3C8 to 3CBy 760 to 763 812 to 815 864 to 867 916 to 919 968 to 971 2FCy to 2FFy ji 330 to 3334 m 364 to 3674 ag 3984 to 39By s 3CCy to 3CFy 764 to 767 816 to 819 868 to 871 920 to 923 972 to 975 300 to 3034 3 334 to 3374 3 3684
296. e settings are configured using the G P RLPASET instructions Also do not use the G P RLPASET instructions to configure settings for the modules where network parameters have been set using a programming tool Doing so causes abnormal end of the instruction and the settings are not reflected When set Number of Modules of the network parameter of a programming tool do not include the number of modules that are set using the G P RLPASET instruction c Network parameter change during data link Network parameters cannot be changed during data link Therefore stop the data link using Data link stop SB0002 and execute the G P RLPASET instruction d Setting of a status input from a data link faulty station The setting of a status input from a data link faulty station is not allowed The input from a data link faulty station is cleared e Standby master function The standby master station cannot be connected To connect the standby master station configure settings using a programming tool f Output when a CPU module is switched from RUN to STOP The outputs from the remote output RY in the master station to a remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station are held For the master local module with a serial number first five digits of 09111 or earlier CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 9 G P RDMSG With this instruction a message is sent to a remote device station The fir
297. e slave station including a local station in the remote net additional mode to a station number after a Ver 1 compatible slave station When there is a possibility to add a Ver 1 compatible slave station in future set a reserved station at the end of the Ver 1 compatible slave station To add a station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station between station numbers of a Ver 1 compatible slave station use the remote net Ver 2 mode in a system where a standby master station is used changing the mode to the remote net Ver 2 mode is recommended In the remote net additional mode the storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw differ between a Ver 1 compatible slave station and a Ver 2 compatible slave station therefore changing a program for a standby master station is required 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications lt gt Page 24 Section 3 2 In CC Link increasing the number of occupied stations and setting the greater value in the expanded cyclic setting can increase the number of points Set the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting for each slave station 7 Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 118 Section 7 4 2 1 Item Description The number of points is increased by increasing the station numbers occupied per module Number of Occupied Stations Note that the number of slave stations that can be connected to a CC Link syste
298. e station Ver 1 or Ver 2 compatible Local station Remote net Ver 1 mode or remote net Ver 2 mode Master station Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote I O station Ver 1 compatible Station No 0 A l Ver 1 or 1 RX Ver 2 compatible Range of area tamennonodunnn P the station gt Station No 1 RX No 1 1 sending data Range of Station the station Station No 2 J s No 2 1 Station No 1 Station No3 ETET T UE Station m No 3 RY RY Range of the master station sending data to the station No 1 Station No 1 os s ae te Range of the master station sending data to the station No 2 Station No 2 Range of the ig station No 3 H sending data 4 RWr Station No 1 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 R Range of Station the station No 1 Station Station No 3 No 3 Range of the master station sending data to Station the station No 1 No 1 re Range of the station No 3 sending data station sending data to the station No 3 Area where data is sent to other stations gt Data sent from the master station n gt Data sent from slave stations The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station In the master station and a local station 0 points are assigned to RWr and RWw in a re
299. each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 2 For details of the send data and receive data refer to the manual for the remote device station that supports the message transmission function 221 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Stores the status when the instruction is complete 1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the remote device station 1 to 64 1 to 255 S1 2 Send data size Specify a send data size in bytes 3 Page 222 Section 9 9 2 a User 0 to 255 S1 3 Receivable data size Specify the maximum size of the device that stores received data in lt 3 Page 223 bytes Section 9 9 2 b 0 to 255 1 4 Receive data size The size of received data in bytes is stored gt Page 223 System Section 9 9 2 b a Send data size Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Size specified in S1 2 TULLE LL oe lt Request When the send data size S1 2 is an odd number of bytes the low byte of the last data is sent as the last byte Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Device Send ee daa Request a The low byte of the last data is sent 222 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Receivable data size and receive d
300. ection 4 1 Section 4 3 3 Section 4 4 14 Section 7 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 3 1 Section 8 3 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Appendix 3 Dec 2004 SH NA 080394E C Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 14 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 3 Section 8 4 2 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 6 Appendix 2 7 Jul 2005 SH NA 080394E D Addition Section 11 1 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 6 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 10 1 2 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 3 2 Section 11 1 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 2 4 Section 11 2 5 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 3 5 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Section 11 4 4 Section 11 4 5 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 7 Appendix 7 1 Apr 2006 SH NA 080394E F Addition Section 4 3 8 Appendix 2 1 Partial correction Section 1 3 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 3 1 Section 4 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 4 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 3 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 3 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 5 Section 8 3 2 Section 8 4 1
301. ecuted Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5E is on Also the execution procedure number and the target station number for the procedure registration are stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SW011F 8 When the initial settings are completed for all the set stations Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F is turned on Also the execution results are stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SWOO5F The data stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SW011F become FF indicates the target station number for the initial settings 9 Turn off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBO00D Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SW005F and Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SW011F are cleared 109 The following figure shows the operations of a link special relay SB and link special register SW when the remote device station initialization procedure registration is performed gt Executed by the master local module A gt Executed on the program Specification of remote device SW0014 a papi to station to
302. ed ee Do the parameter settings Check if a remote I O station Match the model set by the rameter F1 2 setting match with the status of the or remote device station is parameter with that of the etti Transient error connected modules not connected connected module F1 3 Response status Error code B404 response timeout Check if a response is received from the request destination station within the monitoring time Increase the monitoring time value If the error persists check the modules and cables at the destination Is the transient transmission dedicated instruction correctly performed Check the error code stored in Completion status when the dedicated instruction was executed Take corrective action according to the error code Do the master station and the intelligent device station have no error Check the error code of the CPU module Check the error code of the master station Check the operating status of the master station and the target intelligent device station Take corrective action according to the error code F1 4 Target station number Is the target station number correct Check if transient transmission is not being executed for the same station number at the same time Correct the station number setting If executing for the same station number shift the execution timing 287 JOS ep JUSISULI 0 ANP SWA
303. ed for Type Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw are transferred By setting these items RX RY RWr and RWw can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a program 1 Number of refresh points All points for the station number 1 to last station number are automatically assigned lt gt Page 46 Section 3 6 3 to Page 55 Section 3 6 6 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 Page 335 Appendix 2 4 2 Buffer memory areas of the refresh sources L gt Page 47 Section 3 6 3 2 Page 50 Section 3 6 4 3 Page 56 Section 3 6 6 3 e When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 1 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module e When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 2 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module 3 Overlaps with other devices Set the devices without overlaps with the following e Refresh parameters of modules on the network e I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module e Auto refresh settings of an intelligent function module e Auto refresh using a multi
304. ed stations 1 Station No 3 the number of Station No 7 the number of occupied stations 4 occupied stations 4 I expanded tti Remote output RY Address Address Remote input RX Remote output RY Address f lot 40000 RX Fto RKO pH xo o xo J inf RY FoRo Jazo Seton __ sf RoRo jazon Sation Station T RX1F to RX10 e 1 f x1F to x0 I i RY 1F to RY 10 ae RY 1F to RY 10 peck ning i No 2 4o024 RX2F to RX20 Lo CXF t xo IJ RY2F to RY20 42024J No2 RY2F to RY20 42024J No 2 i 4003H RX3F to RX 30 toot i i i i RY3F to RY30 4203 i i RY3F to RY30 4203H i i 40044 RX4F to RX40 Lo RY4F to RY40 4204 i RY4F to RY40 4204 i Station to to lt it to to Station Sey to to Station Nos po i i i i No3 o i No3 o 400FH RXFF to RXFO RYFF to RYFO 420FH RY FF to RYFO _ 420FH 40101 RX 10D to RX 100 o RY 10D to RY 100 4210 RY 10D to RY 100 4210H i 4011H RX 11F to RX 110 toot i i i i RY 11F to RY 110 4211H i i RY 11F to RY 110 4211 i i 4012 RX12F to RX 120 p l RY 12F to RY 120 4212H f RY 12F to RY 120 42124 i i Station ooi iod i i i i Station i i Station No 7 to to aE E i i i i to to fno 477 to to fNo7 i 400DH RX 1DF to RX 1D0 Lo
305. ed wiring can be achieved 3 Flexible system design Various CC Link devices manufactured by partner vendors are available Therefore a system can be flexibly designed according to application 4 Configuration of a distributed system By connecting multiple programmable controllers to a CC Link system a simple distributed system can be configured The multiple programmable controllers can perform data link with remote stations and intelligent device stations and can control distributed devices in a CC Link system CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 1 2 Master Local Modules By using master local modules MELSEC Q series programmable controllers can be connected to a CC Link system Remotely located devices in a CC Link system can be controlled as if they were on the same base unit as the master local module The module works as a master station or a local station in CC Link 1 Data communications a Periodic communications cyclic transmission Master local modules can periodically exchange data with other stations in a CC Link system gt Page 125 Section 8 1 1 For example I O signals of remotely located stations in a CC Link system can be used in the same way as those of the master station Terminating resistor Terminating resistor Remote device
306. edicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible The cables above cannot be used at the same time If used normal data transmission is not guaranteed In addition select a terminating resistor to be connected according to the cable type _ Page 76 Section 6 2 1 3 Maximum overall cable distance maximum transmission distance Depends on the transmission speed and CC Link version gt Page 29 Section 3 2 2 Page 30 Section 3 2 3 RAS function e Standby master function e Automatic return function Slave station cutoff function e Error detection using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment intelli 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 46A Weight 0 12kg 4 In CC Link Ver 1 increasing the number of occupied stations can increase the number of link points per station In CC Link Ver 2 increasing the number of occupied stations and setting the greater value in the expanded cyclic setting can increase the number of link points per station For the points refer to the following table CC Link Ver 2 Item CC Link Ver 1 Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple 32 points 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Remote I O RX RY 30 points for a 30 points for a 30 points for a 62 points for a 126 points f
307. em Description Check method Corrective action Are there no disconnection Check cables connected to the short circuit incorrect wiring faulty station poor connection and coexistence of different When faulty stations occur cables Goestnaaan i orrect the wiring ho frahsmission distance sequentially to one end on the g s transmission path check cables station to station distance transmission cable and FG connected to faulty stations close A4 1 Cable or other terminal grounding meet the tothe masterstation parts specifications Check if terminating resistors are connected to the both ends in the POE CC Link system Connect terminating Are terminating resistors resistors to the both c nriected Check if a station with built in ends in the CC Link terminating resistor is connected system other than at both ends in the CC Link system Is the power on and is the N Apply the voltage Power supply for Ee Check power supplied to the ie x A4 2 Mee applied voltage within the within the specified Data link communications 2 faulty station ata lin specified range range cannot be a T Keep the transmission performed in Check if the transmission cable is cable away from the the entire away from the power cable power cable system A Check if the FG terminal is occasionally ae grounded separately from the Ground the terminals A Is the transmission cable free A4 3 Noise GND terminal of the power separa
308. emote Remote Remote Remote input 3 i RX output register register Input Output RY RWw RWr Clears the receive area from the local station Geer having a Holds the Continue Continue Wh Data Link Fault aig Te Emer or A ge communication receive area Not affected Not affected communication Station Setting of failure ON hel ta by ihe by the falture such se a programming i Continue Continue station havinga communication communication power off occurs tool for master Holds the receive g ina local station station setting area from the communication status of the status of the g oid local station failure local station local station o having a communication failure 2 122 If parameter settings have been configured using dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter settings have been configured using a programming tool the data is cleared when Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set When Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY in the local station that has stopped only the receive area from the stopped local station is cleared The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set The operations continue for the receive areas from other stations CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2
309. ems of the initial settings can be registered per remote device station Use a program to register 17 items or more A programming tool and program cannot be used together for the initial setting in one remote device station If they are used together a remote device station may malfunction 2 If the process has stopped Information about an initial setting in progress is stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SW011F of a master local module If the process has stopped halfway information such as the number of the procedure that has stopped and the number of the station where the procedure has stopped can be checked 3 How to configure the initial setting Configure the setting in Remote Device Station Initial Setting of the network parameter in the master station Then use Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD to reflect the initial setting to the remote device station gt Page 108 Section 7 3 2 3 Page 232 Section 10 2 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 How to perform the initial process only in a specified station specification of remote device station to be initialized When a remote device station in operation was replaced due to failure the initial process used to be performed in all the stations Now the initial process can be performed only in a specified remote device station that has been replaced Remote de
310. epted Tembo Whether the temporary error invalid canceling instruction mporary err SB004B p e a i has been completed is stored 3 invalid cancelin 5E4 b11 g OFF Not executed 9 complete status F ON Temporary error invalid station setting canceled Whether a line test request has been accepted is stored SB004C Line test acceptance GEE Nolekecied a 3 p x Not execute 5E4 b12 status ON Accepted Whether a line test has been completed is stored SB004D Line test complete GEE Nol eeaiied R p x Not execute 5E4y b13 status x ON Completed SB0050 ae naa elie is being executed is stored x x 5E5y b0 ine test status Not execute O ON In process Master station Whether a master station duplication error canceling SB0057 duplication error request has been accepted is stored a 5E5p b7 canceling OFF Not accepted O acknowledgement ON Accepted Whether a master station duplication error canceling Master station SB0058 en request has been completed is stored duplication error O x x 5E5p b8 OFF Not completed canceling complete ON Completed Whether the standby master station has detected the Master switchi system down of the master station and has accepted a O aster switchin SB005A g request of switching from standby master operation to Standby request ha x master x 5E5p b10 master operation is stored acknowledgement station OFF Not accepted ON Accepted only Whether the standby master stat
311. equest or temporary error invalid B302 than or equal to the maximum O x number setting error canceling request has exceeded station number the maximum station number that can communicate Although the temporary error invalid request or temporary error No station number Set the station number B303 invalid canceling request was O x setting error SW0003 SW0004 to SW0007 issued the target station number has not been set When a line test was executed Check if the remote station S an error has been detected in a intelligent device station and Line test faulty station i i i B304 remote station intelligent device standby master station have been O x detected station or standby master station started and the cables are not disconnected 294 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code ore Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Please consult your local B305 System error are O x Mitsubishi representative A station number other than the o start station number has been Specified station ee B306 specified in the temporary error Specify the start station number O x number setting error invalid request or temporary error invalid canceling request When one of the following requests is issued a data link Make sure that the da
312. er e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the QJ61BT11N CC Link system master local module hereafter abbreviated as master local module Before using this product please read this manual carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly
313. er 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB 5B0 Special Register 5W sw b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for other purposes Address Item Reference Hexadecimal Decimal E0 to 15Fy 224 to 351 Remote input RX Page 331 Appendix 2 2 1604 to 1DF 352 to 479 Remote output RY 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw Areas are assigned by 32 points in the order of station number to the remote input RX and remote output RY gt Page 331 Appendix 2 2 56 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedure to be taken before operating a master local module Check column System planning lt S Page 41 Section 3 6 Plan the system configuration and device assignment L Page 75 Section 6 1 Mount the master local module on the base unit Connect the slave station to the control panel and machine p a q M Connect the modules with a CC Link dedicated cable Connect terminating resistors to the modules located at both ends Page 76 Section 6 2 Items to check before powering on the module Check the module installation status Check
314. er of times setting RWw5 Turn on Initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turn on Initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to 4 input range setting RWw1 Averaging process specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turn on Initial data setting request flag RY19 5 Turn off Initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turn off Initial data setting request flag RY19 Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to 4 output range setting RWw9 J HOLD CLEAR setting RWwB Turn on Initial data processing complete flag RY18 Turn on Initial data setting request flag RY19 To the next page CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 1 AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting change 1 l I x21 5 Analog output enable disable JAL gt tt LMOVP HOFC W114 4 setting RWw8 i l I r CH 1 to 4 output range setting 1 MOVP H30 W115 j RWw9 A SET y1079 4 Turn on Initial data setting request flag RY19 ae AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Process of completing the initial setting X1078 Turn off Initial data processing J r j LRST Y1078 J complete flag RY18 X1079 RST Y10793 7 Turn off Initial data setting j request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Digital output value reading 101 1 AB X10 MOV wo D500 J Read CH 1 digital output valu
315. er station RWw local station RWr This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a master station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a local station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time SL Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 2 SL x k 1 SM x n LS x 2 SL x k 1 SM LS x 2 SL SM x n LS x 2 SL SM x n LS x 3 SM x n LS x 2 Max value SM LS x 3 SL SM x n LS x 2 SL SL x k 1 SL x k 1 Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20
316. er supports this function 5 A Redundant CPU with Version 8 58L or later supports this function 6 Use a Universal model QCPU with a serial number first five digits of 11043 or later APPENDICES Appendix T When using GX Developer This appendix describes the operations of GX Developer which are different from those of GX Works2 When GX Developer is used read this appendix before operation The operations that are not described in this appendix are the same as those of GX Works2 Appendix 7 1 Parameter settings GX Developer does not have the station information setting on the CC Link configuration window Set the station information on the CC Link Station Information window gt Page 106 Section 7 3 2 2 b CC Link Station Information Module 1 ae i Station Typ Setting Count Points Station Select Remote 1 0 Station fbinale T v Occupied Station 1 v a2points T v fno Setting Remote Device Station Single sx Occupied Station 1 32Points x No Setting single Occupied Station 1 v S2Points No Setting 2i g Intelligent Device Station Single y Occupied Stations 2 v 64Points No Setting 2 X 3 3 Inteligent Device Station v Intelligent Device Station of Station Type includes local station and standby master station Default Check End Cancel Ap pendix 7 2 Device test Execute a device test on the following menu Online lt gt Monitor gt Device batch monitor
317. ers SWs The link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs represent information stored in the buffer memory areas of a master local module for smooth operation They are read to devices set as refresh devices in the network parameter for use e Link special relays SBs Buffer memory addresses 5E0 to SFFy e Link special registers SWs Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFy Appendix 3 1 Link special relays SBs SB0000 to SBOO1F are turned on off using a program whereas SB0020 to SBO1FF are automatically turned on off Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses 3 Page 338 Appendix 2 5 When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Availability in the table as explained below When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station SB0000 Restart the data link that has been stopped by SB0002 5E04 b0 Data link restart OFF Not instructed O O x ON Instructed Refresh cyclic data after data link control is transferred to Refresh instruction at SB0001 Sandbumasl the standby master station 7 x aster 5E0 b1 S2nory OFF Not instructed o switching ON Instructed Stop the data link of the ho
318. et by range RY Request device 0 to 127 User S3 0 b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 RY Set 0 to the upper eight bits 0 User RX Completion device 0 to 127 User b15 to b8 b7 to _ b0 Rw Error code storage device S3 1 RWr 1 RX 0 to 15 If the error code storage device does not exist set FF User H FFy 0 The host station completes the process by checking b15 to bO the contents of one device RXn S3 2 completion mode 1 The host station completes the process by checking 0 1 User the contents of two devices RXn and RXn 1 RXn 1 turns on at an abnormal end GN3SsIy d 9 S 6 4 The same error code as that for Completion status of the control data is stored in the error code storage device 193 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RISEND instruction Master station 8 Target station 3 g 3 900 8 O mm o pii h r ees or CPU module Master station TE Intelligent device station Device 6 5 Executes RX RX request G P RISEND 4 paces RY RY 3 Buffer memory 2 Send buffer 7 194 1 Writing of data to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 is commanded 2 The data to be written to
319. et the condition for the initial settings or use Operational Condition oe the same condition as the above line Executional Condition Set the condition to execute the initial settings RX Condition Device Select the device to execute the initial settings eSB Default Blank Set the device number of the device set to Condition Device Set 0 to the first device number for each station Ex For instance 0 to 1F can be set to the device number for the station number 4 as shown below Remote device station Remote device station For RX 0 to 37Fy Station No 1 no of Station No 4 no of Master station occupied stations 3 occupied stations 1 For SB 0 to FFH l i Default Blank Device No RX0 Station No 1 EN AN a ON a Select whether to execute the initial settings with ON of the condition Execute Condition OFF device or with OFF of the condition device Default Blank 5 When completing the initial settings write the settings to the CPU module using a programming tool Online lt gt Write to PLC 6 The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system sjieyap Bunjes ZE uonels sajsey e JO SBunjas JoyoWeIeY Ey 7 Start the initial settings by turning on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD While the initial settings are being ex
320. etas n ala aeaa 21 Performance specifications 000 24 Periodic communications cyclic transmission 17 PLC Down Select 202000000 100 Precautions for programming 228 Preparation before wiring 0 76 Problems due to cyclic data error 284 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station 276 Problems due to operation error in the master station Paden os as andl aa Pra Mande Mie e eR nda le AR hE NET 288 Problems due to transient data error 287 Procedure before the operation 57 Process CPU i gine raia tae ded wach edad 13 Processing time of dedicated instructions 381 Programming 220000 eee 228 Programming tool 02ee0005 13 71 OCRUN Tea cies sana Daas eae 13 QMACPU ateena eia oeae EA wits Sas 13 RAS ied ei eed Ba ie dae tate dee 13 RDIBE Disc coun aankh A a glans are EA ware aie 21 Redundant CPU 2 20 000e0 eae 14 Redundant system 0 eee ee 74 Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPU iS setto STOP presies erat oa e aD 133 Remote device station n n nonan nanana 14 Remote device station initial setting 100 108 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 0000 eee 154 Remote I O net mode 14 43 55 Remote I O station 0000505 14 Remote I O st
321. etected Whether station numbers are unique when the start station numbers of modules are different is stored 0 Normal 1 Station number in use start station number only swo098 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 bO 698p SW0098 Swo0g9 SwWwo0099 SWOO9A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 6994 SWOO9B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 Station number 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers O E SWO09A overlap status SOA Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations 98H later than that are excepted Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on This SWO009B item is checked and the result is stored only upon data link start and 69By the update of a parameter For a slave station with the transmission speed auto tracking setting whether the station number is already used for other stations may not be detected When the station number of a station is the same as that of the standby master station the status cannot be detected 358 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether the connected module status matches with parameter settings is stored A mismatch error will occur in the following cases 1 The station types do not match 2 The number of occupied stations do not match
322. etected in the master station in the initial status before data link is started The operation is not switched from the standby master station to the master station and data link is not started This applies only to the master station switching function and master station duplex function 143 144 i Data link start function using a standby master station e Parameters and program set in the master station and standby master station Set the same parameters and program in the master station and standby master station If not the operation is not guaranteed Line test When the data link start function by a standby master station is used a line test cannot be executed using the switch on the master local module Use a programming tool to execute a line test L gt Page 86 Section 6 5 1 1 j Processing that sets the link devices saved at master switching and Refresh instruction at standby master switching After saving the link devices wait a fixed number of scans and execute the processing that sets the link devices saved at master switching and Refresh instruction at standby master switching SBO001 Number of scans for waiting after saving the link devices differs depending on the mode setting Use the following values Mode setting Number of scans for waiting Remark Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote I O net mode Fixed to 0 Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Link scan time Se
323. ettings window of Network Parameter a Precautions 120 The precautions are same as those for the parameter settings for a master station gt Page 113 Section 7 3 2 4 a 7 9 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Status Difference Between a Master Station and a Slave Station at an Error The station status at an error varies depending on the combination of PLC Down Select of Network Parameter Data Link Faulty Station Setting and Case of CPU STOP Setting in the Operation Setting window When configuring the settings consider the station status at errors listed below 1 Status of a master station standby master station when operating as a master station and remote I O station Master station standby master station operating as a master station Remote I O station Data link status 3 Remote Remote Remote Remote input 4 x RX output register register Input Output RY RWw RWr When the programmable controller CPU of the master station is set to STOP at an error data link Continue 4 Continue Hold Continue 4 continued When the programmable controller CPU of the local station is set to STOP at an error data link 2 Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue continued Data Link Fault Clear Clear When data link ees for the entire Station Setting of By external sustem is a programming Indefinite Indefinite Hold Raa All points off y tool for master Hold Hold
324. even after the system is powered off and on or the CPU module is reset 1 Operating procedure a Starting the status logging 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Double click Status Logging on the bottom of the window If Status Logging is not displayed on the bottom of the window click the Related Functions gt gt button on the bottom left corner of the window eme rype LDU DN IIE DU gt Link Scan Time Max Oms Min Oms Current Oms Related Functions lt lt Legend Close tr Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Start Data Link Sheet Double click the icon 3 The Status Logging window appears Log display part Logging Time of Lagging Acquisition 1 to 65535 seconds 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds or 0 seconds No specification 1 Hour 0 Minute 0 Second Clear Log Log Storage Area in CC Link Module RAM C RAM Flash ROM Logging Progress 0 The first 45 logged data after starting logging when checking RAM Flash ROM will be stored in RAM and flash ROM and will be stored only in RAM after it Please check logged data stored in the flash ROM after turning the power OFF gt ON or resetting programmable controller CPU When executing Clear Log selecting RAM Flash ROM in logged data stored area please execute Clear Log after stopping data link And please restart data link after completin
325. evice that turns on for one scan upon completion of writing Within the range of the Bit i D 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 4 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 181 a Control data i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete 1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code Specify the station numbers of the master station local station and S1 1 Station number 0 to 64 User intelligent device station Specify the type of the device to be accessed or the type of the Access code buffer memory Refer to S1 2 User Attribute code b15 to b8 b7 to bO b and C Access code Attribute code 81 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory or the start number 4 Us er or device number of the device Bote 1 to 480 S1 4 Number of write points Specify the number of write data in word units 5 User 1 to 10 4 For details refer to the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station to which data are written When specifying the random access buffer specify the start address of the random access buffer as 0 2 The value indicates the maximum number of write data Specify the value within the buffer mem
326. faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations during data link for maintenance or for other purposes Page 167 Section 8 3 6 Page 168 Section 8 3 7 Automatic detection of connected devices The time of setting parameters can be reduced by automatically reading information of slave stations Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 The model names of slave stations can be read LIJ iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual Data backup restoration The setting data of the slave station is backed up into the SD memory card of the CPU module on the master station The setting data backed up on the SD memory card of the CPU module on the master station is restored into the slave module CA iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 List of O signals This section lists the I O signals for a CPU module The device X is an input signal from a master local module to a CPU module The device Y is an output signal from a CPU module to a master local module n in the table below represents the start I O number of the master local module When the start I O number of the master local module is 0030 Xn0 to X n 1 F gt X30 to X4F Yn0 to Y n 1 F gt Y30 to Y4F
327. figuring the number of remote I O station points Set the number of points greater than the I O points of a remote I O station connected If the smaller number of points is set in a station data cannot be normally input to or output from stations after that juo pow 7 Ja 2u BJOWAJ Huas sjulod uoNe s O BJOWSY 6 E g 171 8 3 10 Master station duplication error canceling function Even if a master station duplication error has been detected the error can be cleared without resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system Point Before using this function check the version of the master local module gt Page 399 Appendix 6 2 1 How to cancel the error 1 Remove the cause of a master station duplication error Another master station may exist on the same line or the line may be being influenced by noise 2 Turn on Master station duplication error canceling request SB0007 2 Link special relays SBs and a link special register SW related to the master station duplication error canceling function Link special relays SBs and a link special register SW related to the master station duplication error canceling function are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers e Master station duplication error canceling request SBO007 5E0 b7 e Master station duplication error canceling acknowledgement SB0057 5E5y b7 e Master station duplication error c
328. fresh station No 3 station No 3 Data guaranteed 150 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Setting method Configure the setting in the master station local station and standby master station where data needs to be assured 1 Open the Operation Setting window Project window lt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt TT button 2 Check the checkbox in Block Data Assurance per Station Parameter Name _ Number of Occupied Stations Data Link Faulty Station Setting gt _ Expanded Cyclic Setting _ T Hold Input Data single z m Case of CPU STOP Setting memean I Clears Compulsorily 7 Enable Setting Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device 7 Please select Read Model Name of Slave Station in Auto Detection of the connected device The start of data link may be slow after selecting the item J7 Read Model Name of Slave Station Bee Jesse Point When configuring the setting in the block data assurance per station set the refresh devices as well aoueinsse eyep aA 9 79 Aygeiey wejsks y Bulroidw 7g Number of Modules ft Boards Blank No Setting IV Set Ss as a Lo cco Master Station X Remote Net Ver 1 Mode X 151 152 d Precautions when using the block data assurance per station function Refresh device setting When using this fun
329. g a condition setting switch in the network parameter of a programming tool Appendix 5 2 Precautions when replacing a QJ61BT11 with a QJ61BT11N A QJ61BT11 can be replaced by a QJ61BT11N as is For the mode names refer to the following table Mode of a QJ61BT11 Mode of a QJ61BT11N Remote net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote I O net mode Remote I O net mode 396 APPENDICES Appendix 6 Upgrading the Functions of a Master Local Module Before using the functions of a master local module check if the master local module CPU module and programming tool support the functions 1 Available functions of CPU modules O Can be used x Cannot be used QCPU QJ72LP25 25 excluding a Basic model QJ72LP25G Function Basic model QCPU QJ72LP25GE QCPU QJ72BR15 Communications with a remote I O station O O O Communications with a remote device station O Oo O Communications with a local station O O O Basic applications Communications with an intelligent device station O O O O O O Parameter settings using a programming tool O O O Parameter settings using dedicated instructions O O x Slave station cutoff function O O O Automatic return function O O O Setting of the data link status upon an error in the o o o programmable controller CPU of the master station Setting of a status input from a data link faulty ae O O O Applications to station improve the s
330. g can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Use CC Link dedicated cables for a CC Link system If not the performance of the CC Link system is not guaranteed For the maximum station to station distance and the overall cable distance follow the specifications in Page 29 Section 3 2 2 to Page 30 Section 3 2 3 If not normal data transmission is not guaranteed Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable S
331. g clear log BulbBo snes ey LL gc m ZSHOM XO Bursn s ysoubeq JUT 09 Y LogList The list will display up to 5 000 logs Selecting an item displays the status of selected date and time in the right window Date of Log Acquisition Error _ Error Details 2011 10 06 12 30 43 Returned normally 2011 10 06 12 30 37 Data Link Error Station No 1 2011 10 06 12 30 28 Normally operated Legend Reserved Temporary error Error invalid Error station invalid station station save Read Close 315 4 Set Time of Logging Acquisition Enter the period during which logging is executed When 0 seconds is set logging will be continued until the Stop Logging button is clicked or the number of logs reaches to 5000 5 Select either RAM or RAM Flash ROM in Log Storage Area in CC Link Module e When GX Works is not connected at all times Select RAM Flash ROM To check the logs stored on the flash ROM maximum 45 logs connect GX Works2 e When GX Works2 is always connected Up to 5000 logs can be stored regardless of the selected option RAM or RAM Flash ROM 6 Click the Start Logging button Logging will be executed for the specified period However if the Stop Logging button is clicked or the number of logs reaches to 5000 the logging will stop 7 When an item is selected under Log List the status of the selected item is d
332. g time added only when there is a faulty station BT x 243 1 ST wu UedS yul p xIpueddy ew Bulsseooig yu eyeq y xIpueddy 369 370 Ex When the transmission speed is 10Mbps in the following system configuration It is assumed that there is no faulty station and retry in this example Master station Station number 1 1 Remote I O station Station number 2 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 1 Remote I O station 0000 JOOOOO0000 OOOO OoO00000000 0000 JOOOOO0000 ooo 000000000 ooo 000000000 DoOood 000000000 1 The number of occupied stations 1 BT 0 8 ST 250 ni x 10 NI 3 gt 8 250 3 x 10 N 3 280 ni 3 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 8 x 4 8 3 x 30 3 x 4 8 280 415 84us 0 42ms C Appendix 4 2 Transmission delay time This section describes transmission delay time time until data is transmitted 1 Master station lt gt remote I O station a Master station RX lt remote I O station input This is the time between a signal input to a remote I O station and the device of a CPU module turning on off Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM LS Link scan time Master station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rio Re
333. ge 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Set the procedure for the initial settings when registering the initial settings of a remote device station using a programming tool _ gt Page 108 Section 7 3 2 3 Interrupt Settings Set the conditions used to issue a request for the interrupt to a CPU module _ gt Page 111 Section 7 3 2 4 4 The operations when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP vary depending on whether Y or the devices other than Y is set to Remote Output RY Page 133 Section 8 2 4 2 The ranges can be set only for the Redundant CPU 100 1 Operation Setting CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Project window lt gt Parameter 2 gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button Parameter Name m Data Link Faulty Station Setting J Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station 7 Clears Compulsorily I Enable Setting Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device Please select Read Model Name of Slave Station in Auto Detection of the connected device The start of data link may be slow after selecting the item J7 Read Model Name of Slave Station ee Item Description Setting range Parameter Name Set the name of the setting if needed This item is displayed when the setting details of the network parameters are printed using a programming
334. gement SBO05A save data stored in RX RY RWr and RWw to the devices and back up data stored in RX to RY data stored in RY to RX data stored in RWr to RWw and data stored in RWw to RWr using a program In addition turn on Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB0001 After saving data stored in RX RY RWr and RWw to the devices wait a fixed number of scans and execute the processing that backs up data stored in RX to RY data stored in RY to RX data stored in RWr to RWw and data stored in RWw to RWr using a program and the processing that turns on the Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB0001 For details refer to Page 143 Section 8 2 5 5 OFF OFF CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 7 Example of communications when the master station duplex function is used The following system configuration is used to explain an example of communications For example of communications when the Redundant CPU is used refer to the following C QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System a System configuration Standby master station Intelligent device station Station number 1 i Remote device station Master station Siain number Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 2 a eee oS e O00 annonnnant 3 Omm OOOO COOOO00O0O O00 000000000
335. he L RUN LED turns off temporarily G4 1 Number of retries setting Number of retries setting Check the number of retries Increase the transmission speed Reduce the number of retries 289 UONe Ss JOISEW SY U 10119 UONeISdO 0 ENP SWIAIGOld HZ LL SWI GOld JO S SI ZL 1 1 3 Error Codes If an error such as a data link error occurs the error cause can be identified by checking an error code 11 3 1 How to check error codes Error codes can be checked using a programming tool as well as link special registers SWs gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 1 Checking in the Module s Detailed Information window This window displays error codes error details and corrective action D Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Detailed Information button Module s Detailed Information Module Model Name QI61BT11N I O Address 0000 Mount Position Main Base 0 Slot A Product Information 100320000000000 B Production Number Monitoring Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status eee at Displays the latest error code 1 0 Clear Hold Setting i Noise Filter Setting Displays error history Error and Solution Latest Error Code 2 Contents Master station overlapping error Multiple master stations exist BBCS j Hi on the same line Alternatively line noise was detected at power on Error Clear Error Code Di
336. he SI No set to Interrupt SI No in the Start SI No 0 to 15 Default Blank Interrupt Settings window of Network Parameter 112 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS a Precautions e When interrupt conditions are always established with Level Detect being set to Detection Method Because the interrupt process is performed for each link scan if the sequence scan time is much longer than the link scan time a watchdog timer error may occur in the CPU module due to the prolonged sequence scan To avoid this check the conditions using program and do not use the interrupt settings e Before executing an interrupt program Execute the El instruction in the main routine program and enable the interrupt User s manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals El Enable interrupt Main routine P program rd FEND m 10 interrupt i program 7 fIRET Interrupt pointer e When multiple interrupts occur simultaneously The operation may delay e When a master local module is in test mode or offline mode The interrupt to the CPU module can be performed when a master local module is in online mode The interrupt cannot be performed when a master local module is in test mode or offline mode e Executing an interrupt program at rise or fall of the specified device Do not execute an interrupt program by using the rise using the PLS instruction or fall using the PLF instruction
337. he area buffer memory address 4018p are the Station No 3 RY size 1 1H corresponding size of RY in the station number 3 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 4 RY offset 42184 Start buffer memory address of RY in the station number 4 The upper eight bits of the area buffer memory address 4018p are the Station No 4 RY size 1 18y corresponding size of RY in the station number 4 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 1 RWw offset 4400H Start buffer memory address of RWw in the station number 1 Station No 1 RWw size 64 404 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 2 RWw offset 4400 Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RWw size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RWw offset 44404 Start buffer memory address of RWw in the station number 3 Station No 3 RWw size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWw in the station number 3 Station No 4 RWw offset 44404 Start buffer memory address of RWw in the station number 4 Station No 4 RWw size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWw in the station number 4 Station No 1 RWr offset 4C00y Start buffer memory address of RWr in the station number 1 336 APPENDICES Buffer memory
338. he bottom left corner z oO 1 Master of the window If Loop Test is not displayed click the _Rel tedEunctions gt gt feu t the hal Display a button on the bottom left corner of the window Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information Twist Single Bus Max 2ms Min 2ms Current 2ms Relgtedyanstons lt lt Legend Close btt amp B Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link a Sheet Double click the icon 3 Select Obtain transmission speed setting under The transmission speed for each station is indicated Test Type TY 4 Clicking the button executes the fe wc transmission speed test Tes tae e Do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer oe ie memory addresses 5E0y 5E4y 5F8y 6414 645p et E and 783 to 787p le arar mai sasae e Do not obtain the transmission speed setting using GX Hc x pa mies Works 2 and a program or other peripherals at the Deia la ee same time The transmission speed setting may not S E be obtained normally In addition do not obtain the transmission speed setting using GX Works 2 and the check sheet creating wizard at the same time After the transmission speed test is completed the transmission speed of each station is displayed on the right side of the windo
339. he data in the device of a CPU module is changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM LS Link scan time Master station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rd SM x n x 1 Rd SM LS x 1 Rd SM x n x 1 Rd Max value SM x n LS x 2 Rd SM x n x 2 Rd SM LS x 2 Rd SM x n x 2 Rd Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote device station processing time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 20 3 1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 24 5ms 21 5ms 24 5ms 21 5ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 20 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 41 5ms 27 5ms 41 5ms 373 oul Aejap uolssiwusues Zp xipueddy awl Bulsseooig JU eyeq y xIpueddy b Master station RY remote device station RY RWr This i
340. he device of the CPU module in a local station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time SL Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up m Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 x m 1 SL x k 1 SM x t x 1 SL x k 1 SM LS x 1 x m 1 SL SM x t x 1 SL SM x n LS x 2 x m 1 SM x t x 2 SLx SM LS x 2 x m 1 Max value SM x t x 2 SL SL x k 1 k 1 SL lex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms the expanded cyclic setting is Double and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 1 x 3 1 10 x 1 1 52ms 20
341. he information is stored in W100 to W103 turn on Y1000 for a handshake in the master station Data in RWw is sent before data in RY is sent by cyclic transmission Then X1000 in the local station turns on Information in WO to W3 is stored into D100 to D103 O After the information is stored in D100 to D103 turn on Y1000 for a handshake in the local station Turning on Y1000 in the local station turns off Y1000 in the master station 8 Turning off Y1000 in the master station turns off Y1000 in the local station 14 If a handshake is performed in one bit of the remote I O RX RY in a station with the number of occupied stations of two or more the integrity of cyclic data is assured per slave station An interlock for the number of occupied stations in units of four words is not required 266 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes details on errors that might occur when the master local module is used and the troubleshooting 267 11 1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts 11 1 1 Troubleshooting using LEDs Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting when the RUN LED Master station No on the master station is off RUN on 3 gt Page 269 Section 11 1 1 1 Yes When a CC Link system is newly configured or the existing Tne r g Pa ial Kiasterstation No CC Link system is changed eS operaie L RUN on Yes Master sta
342. he setting 131 uoneys Ane yui eyep e WO e ep ndu 3y 40 snjeys ay jo DUMAS E Z 8 Aygeiiey was s y Bulroidw 7g 2 Setting method Select whether to clear or hold input data in Data Link Faulty Station Setting under Operation Setting of the network parameter L gt Page 101 Section 7 3 2 1 Page 118 Section 7 4 2 1 132 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 4 Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPU is set to STOP Whether to refresh or compulsorily clear remote output RY when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP can be selected How the remote output RY should be handled can be selected according to the system used gt Page 121 Section 7 5 1 Applicable output sending data The following figure shows applicable data Remote device station station number 2 f Remote I O station Master station station number 1 Remote input RX Station number 1 Input Station number 2 Remote input RX Local station station number 3 Remote input RX Station number 1 Local station station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote output RY gt Station number 3 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote output RY Remote register RWw Station number
343. he station has been set as a reserved station A data link error including All stations data link error has occurred The message transmission was Message transmission performed to a station other than BC04 i Check the target station O x target station error remote device stations and intelligent device stations The station No specified for the Station No out of hams aos message transmission function is pa BC05 range Message Check the specified station No O x ae outside of the range between 1 transmission function to 64 oa Execution of the message Message transmission ae Execute the message i i transmission function was A i BC06 function executing 3 transmission function on the x O Fe attempted from a station other station invalid master station than the master station The send data size was out of the ie Send data size out of Change the send data size within BCO7 range when message O x range er the range transmission was executed BC08 to BCO9 BC30 O x Please consult your local BC33 to BC34 System error ot ee Mitsubishi representative BC35 to BC39 O O BC3A x O 306 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code hexadecimal Description BC50 BC51 Message transmission handshake failure BC52 Message transmission handshake timeout BC53 Message transmission handshake timeout BC54 BC55 Message transmission h
344. her parameter settings match with connected module status are stored 0 Normal SW0069 Values other than 0 Loading status O x 6694 Error code gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 Error details are stored in SW0098 to SW009B and SWOOS9C to SWOOSF This item is checked and the result is stored only upon link start Whether the switch has been correctly set is stored SWOO06A Switch setting i 0 Correct O O 66AH status Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 SWOO6D Max link scan The maximum link scan time is stored unit 1ms x 66Dy time O SOSSE Gurent link The ci t link scan time is stored unit 1ms x urrent link scan time is stored unit i 66Ep scan time SWOO6F Min link scan The minimum link scan time is stored unit 1ms x 66F4 time O SW0070 Total number of The last station number set using the parameter is stored x 670p stations 1 to 64 station O The maximum station number during data link station number set using Max SW0071 o the station number switches is stored communication x 67114 1 to 64 station station number Reserved stations are excepted Number of 3 ee SWw0072 The number of modules performing data link is stored connected Oo x 672 Reserved stations are excepted modules SW0073 Standby master The standby master station number is stored 673 station number 1 to 64 station O Whether a station has been set as a re
345. hin the range of the specified device Bit i 22 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data When S2 to S5 are not to be set specify a dummy device 205 1a3SYd7H d 8 6 a Control data i Setting Device Item Setting data 9 Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete 1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code Specify whether the individual setting data for S2 to S5 is valid or invalid 0 Invalid 1 Valid b15b14b13 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Slave station setting data S2 S1 1 Setting flag Reserved station specification data S3 Error invalid station specification data S4 Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data S5 Mode 00 Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 01 Remote Net Additional Mode 10 Remote Net Ver 2 Mode 11 Cannot be used Total module S1 2 Set the number of connected slave stations 1 to 64 User connected S1 3 Retry count Set the number of retries to a faulty station 1to7 Automatic S1 4 reconnection station Set the number of slave stations that can return per one link scan 1to10 count Specify the data link status when a master station programmable controller Operation Fa CPU error occurs S1 5 specification when 0 1 i 0 Stop CPU is down 1 Continue Select whether to synchronize the l
346. ial function module 4002 When attempting to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 226 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 9 1 Program example For program examples refer to the manual for the remote device station that supports the message transmission function ajdwexe weibold 6 6 sway d 9 66 227 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes precautions for programming communication examples and sample programs when data are communicated at master local modules The examples of communications shown in this chapter are the one between a master station and a remote device station or the one between a master station and a local station For the other communication examples refer to the following e Communications between a master station and a remote I O station gt Page 59 Section 4 1 e Communications between a master station and an intelligent device station I Manual for the intelligent device station used e Transient transmission example lt gt Page 180 Section 9 2 1 to Page 213 Section 9
347. ial number of a master local module a On the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of a master local module CC1inkWA MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No first 5 digits Function version A e SERIAL 13012000000000d B_ Relevant regulation standards MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b On the front of a module The serial number and function version on the rating plate are printed on the front at the bottom of the module Function version SSS 1301200000000006 avs eres eer mre 2e Serial No 413 JOQUINN Jenas pue uorsJa y UOHOUN y Buiyoayo 6 X pu ddy 414 c On the system monitor Product Information List In System Monitor of Diagnostics on a programming took click the _Product Information List button Se ee ee Intelli 130120000000000 e Display of a production number Because a master local module does not support a production number display a hyphen is displayed Point The serial number on the rating plate and the front of the module may differ from that on the production information list window of a programming tool The serial number on the rating plate and the front of the module indicates the management information of the product e The serial number on the production information list wind
348. ial setting of a remote device station can be also configured on a program lt _ Page 252 Section 10 2 6 eeeeeeeceoeoeoseeeoseeeeoeaeeveoe eee eoeeeeeeseeeeeeeaes eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaee eee ee 6 Click the End button to terminate the setting 7 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started W Online gt Write to PLC lt mn or power off on 245 uoleys Jajsew e 10 SUYOS Z ZOL UONEIS 29149 S OWSY E pue UONEIS 19 Sse e UBEMIEg suoeaiunwwog Jo ajdwexg Z OL 10 2 3 Settings for a remote device station Set the station number transmission speed and mode using the switches on the remote device station 1 Switch setting on an AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN 10 8 3 4 5 6 7 2 f 3 3 iS BPRBPARAP AB No 1 ally THTSUBISA uaa Y Station number setting switch transmission y Speed setting switch Station number 1 y 6 gt Mode selection switch Je 0 Normal mode wE i rA N MODE 2 Switch setting on an AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 10 9 8 SLSEE AJGSVBTCU GBDAVN 3 4 5 6 7 2 No 1 MITSUBISHI Custa 4 246 Station number setting switch transmission speed setting switch r Station No 4 STATION NO 156kbps Mode selection switch
349. ice Station Ver 1 30ccupied Station Single 96 Points No Setting ThE List of stations STAH3 STAM Local Module Q series ification Link Ver 2 Compatible AJ65VBTCI J65VBTCI nt J subishi Elec corporation EDAN iDN Drag and drop the text qe bf roc san Lir fersion ER Device map area ian x Item Description Setting range Ver 1 Mode e Ver 2 Mode Select the mode of a master station gt Page 43 Section 3 6 2 to Mode Setting Page 55 Section 3 6 6 e Addition Mode e Remote I O Mode Default Ver 1 Mode Select the transmission speed of a master station 156kbps Note that this setting is used only to display Link Scan Time ec nai e 2 5Mbps TX Speed Approx For the transmission speed of a master local module set it Mib 5Mbps with a transmission speed mode setting switch on the module L37 10Mbps Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Default 156kbps Link Scan Time i p Ra The estimate value of link scan time is displayed Approx For a master station 0 0 is displayed Station No For a slave station a _ The order of the slave station is displayed before the slash The start station number of the slave station is displayed after the slash The model name of the module is displayed Model Name If the module information cannot be found Module without profile is displayed Select the station type Set the sta
350. ies 1 station Remote input RX Remote output RY RYO00 to RYOF oe RY30 to RY3E RY40 to RY4F Master station standby status Standby master station controlling Station number 0 Remote input RX Remote Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Remote I O station Station number 3 Occupies 1 station X00 to XOF YOO to YOF Y10toY1F Outputs RY RWw from the standby master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the master station shaded areas in the figure above Input of the standby master station Station number 0 gt 1 The number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote output RY input RX Rx00 to RxoF RX10 to RX1F RX20 to RX2F RX40 to RX4F RX30 to RX3F Standby master station controlling Station number 0 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote I O station Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 1 nc ea cnet cs esa Remote I O station 4 Station number 3 The number of occupied stations Inputs RX RWr from slave stations to the standby master station are stored in outputs RY RWw of the master station shaded areas in the figure above 139 uoun Jaysew Aqpueis Z8 Aygeiiey wejsks y Bulroidu 7g d Operation between the standby master stat
351. igent function module li When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 195 9 5 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to write 1 word data from D10 in the master station to the buffer memory address 1114 in the AJ65BT R2 N station number 63 when M6 is turned on in the following system configuration e Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y00 to X Y 1F e Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW e M11 is the G P RISEND instruction executing flag e Assume that the settings of the interlock signal storage device are Request device RY4 Completion device RX4 Error code storage device RWr1 and Completion mode 1 Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 63 RISEND request source Host station RISEND request target Target station M6 MIJ SW83 E 1 AF AF
352. ime is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 72 1 x 1 13 SM WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 72 x 1 13 0 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 1 x 1 13 0 66 15 66 2ms 4 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried awl Bulsseooig yu eyeq y xIpueddy SUONONJJSU PS edIpap JO aul Hulssed0ig Ey xIpueddy 383 384 e G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 1671 x 1 067 SM WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time gt Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 A 2 SM Master station sequence scan time Apply 0 when data is written to buffer memory in CC Link WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16
353. inary MON cies seth cr fod oe Sack AI ARG accion Hr ag 175 9 2 1 i Program example s2 429 6 sage aa ood eile ME yA se Sande here a ede png ek 180 9 3 GOP IW Mu a a Scab eee Sole Jala iat Noa tah gh tod hd al ole eet 181 9 331 Rrogramexamiples teu eines Oe lay lac Mag E Ae hl ate Me 186 BAe Wipe Vin aac cutee eo atin Se en een ees ces aoe 187 9 41 Program example ciesa oe vate oink dnd Sad Bw has be es Beetle 191 95 CIP RIS EID tenenan gai tenth tes a stecla mentite aie anle vl aa nai claves 192 9 5 4 Program example lt 3 ets c Maren ana fate a ey Oxia are eee elena me 196 go GP BIPM taste as bl ease etn cree oN A E shee Cakes 197 9 6 1 Prograin exaMpl tr i ea e a woth dra ates Goose mga eer ee oh BIG ae aa Ss 200 Oe WGP AITO m ar eel ryt Mit eats or a Og Daet a 201 9 7 1 Program examplar acen 4 dew ah lated i iti aed ie ot aks led a 204 9 8 FSU RPA SE Ices rots aterm cir ete ays aerate drach ere nls aac Peace So a eas cts aes 205 9 8 1 Program example parameter setting example 0000 cece e ee 213 09 GIP RMS footer a etcg mot E ak a E an AEE 221 9 9 1 Program exampley c deria pases ha ee Ree oe na RO eA rh Me ee Pee 227 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 228 10 1 Precautions for Programming 000 assada aranana anakana aana 228 10 2 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Remote Device Station 232 10 2 1 System configuration 0 0 cece e eee eens 232
354. ine cH 0 CH 0 Side Line Status Normal CH 1 Side Line Status Line Type Twist Single Bus Max 2ms Min 2ms JC link Scan Time i Current ms ar cae _ Legend Cose amp s iG T Loop Test gy Status Logging tast Create Check heet Stop Data Link Double click the icon Result of Loop Test Not executed 86 inot executed if normat Error Obtained Transmission Speed Setting bps 156k O 625K 25M Om 110M The test result appears i CLL u MELSOFT Application L Looptest completed oe Open the CC Link diagnostics window ona programming tool Diagnostics lt gt CC Link Diagnostics Double click Loop Test on the bottom left corner of the window If Loop Test is not displayed click the Related Functions gt gt button on the bottom left corner of the window Select Loop Test under Test Type Select the slave station where the line test is executed under Test Target e Selecting All stations Station 1 64 executes a test on all the connected stations e Selecting Specified station executes a test ona specified station Set the start station number when the number of occupied stations is two or more Clicking the button executes the line test Do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 an
355. ing an odd number of eight point remote I O stations set 8 Points 8 Points Reserved to the last of consecutive remote I O stations Ex When three output modules with eight points are connected Remote O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 1 the Station No 2 the Station No 3 the Station No 4 the number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied Master station stations 1 stations 1 stations 1 stations 1 8 point output 8 point output _ module module When the number of remote I O stations is odd eight points cannot be set in the remote station points Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote O station Remote I O station Station No 1 the Station No 2 the Station No 3 the Station No 4 the number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied Master station stations 1 stations 1 Stations 1 stations 1 module Cannot be set The parameter cannot be set using dedicated instructions Therefore read or write data from to the device in a CPU module according to the number of I O points of each station using a program Consequently the areas in refresh devices can be saved e Reading writing data using an intelligent function module device Un GD e Reading writing data using the FROM TO instructions suoloun4 3y Jo suonealddy jasn 8 2 Precautions when con
356. ings Check if a remote I O station Match the model set by the r er cannot be E2 1 seitin match with the status of the is not connected to the parameter with that of the i read written 9 connected modules corresponding station connected module Cyclic data i Check if a module with the Match the number of Do the parameter settings f f lower area Parameter j small number of occupied occupied stations set by the E3 1 match with the status of the j j cannot be setting stations is not connected to parameter with that of the connected modules i read written the corresponding station connected module Is Refresh instruction when Check if Refresh instruction Turn on Refresh instruction Data cannot be i are re E4 1 Refresh changing parameters by the when changing parameters when changing parameters a instruction dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction RY SB0003 on SB0003 is on SB0003 286 11 2 3 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problems due to transient data error 1 Problems due to transient data error in an intelligent device station local station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the transient transmission Refresh data j i i Check if the correct Access the correct area in F1 1 dedicated instruction Shon Gn area destination is accessed the corresponding station correctly perform
357. ings with answering a series of questions displayed on the windows The created check sheet is saved in Excel 5 Perform troubleshooting with reference to the Open Field Network CC Link Troubleshooting Guide Point Precautions when a transmission speed is checked Do not obtain check the transmission speed setting using GX Works 2 and a program or other peripherals at the same time Doing so may fail the acquisition of the transmission speed setting Check sheet When Microsoft Excel 2000 or later has been installed on the personal computer the system configuration figure is output 318 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Example of a check sheet The following is an example of a check sheet when it is created on the personal computer where Microsoft Excel 2000 or later has been installed Confirmation Item Contents 1 Master Station Master Type Programmable Controller HQ2ZOUDEHCPU J61BT11N Programmable Controller f 120820000000000B 100320000000000B Master Version Ss D D a a E F fe fe a a c c D D D O O S I Module Mount Status I O Address Other Network Module fOther Network Module Mode J61BT11 Remote Net Mode Ver 1 JAdditional Ver 2 JRemote I O Net Mode Synchronous Asynchronous Mode JI O mode Jintelligent mode SW8 A Series Only Checking the parameter matching status between the specification and PLC Oo zoz a 2 2 a d
358. ink scan with the sequence scan or not Selecting Asynchronous shortens input transmission delay time Selecting S1 6 Scan mode setting Synchronous shortens output transmission delay time 0 1 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous S1 7 Delay time setting Set 0 0 4 For the setting data specified as Invalid default value will be applied gt Page 207 Section 9 8 1 b to Page 209 Section 9 8 1 e 2 Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end 206 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Slave station setting data Device Item Setting data Seng Set by range Set the station type number of occupied stations and station number as follows b15 to b12b11 to _ b8 b7 to bO L Station number Number of occupied stations Station type The default values are 01014 to 01404 station number 1 to 64 number of occupied stations 1 station type Ver 1 compatible remote I O station enn 11404 2 Number of occupied stations setting Number of occupied stations Setting 1 1H 2 2H 1 to 44 S2 0 Setting for 1 3 3H to to 64 4 44 User S2 63 stations 3 Station type setting 2 Station type Setting Ver 1 compatible remote I O station On A Ver 1 compatible remote device station 1H i Ver 1 compatible intelligent device station 2H T Ver 2 compatible remote device station single 5H s Ver 2 compatible in
359. ints with a remote I O station can be selected from 8 points 16 points and 32 points Changing the number of points can save the areas of the refresh device in a CPU module In modes other than the remote net Ver 2 mode only 32 points per station can be selected Page 170 Section 8 3 9 2 Transient transmission Function Description Reference Communications using a dedicated instruction Communications can be performed with other stations at any timing Unlike cyclic transmission direct access to buffer memory areas in other stations can be performed This function is used to access data that is updated infrequently Page 127 Section 8 1 2 Page 173 CHAPTER 9 34 3 RAS function CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Function Description Reference Slave station cutoff function Data link can be continued in a normal station by disconnecting a slave station that cannot perform data link due to reasons such as power off No parameter setting is required Using this function prevents the entire system from going down when one station goes down Page 128 Section 8 2 1 Automatic return function When a slave station that has been disconnected from data link due to reasons such as power off returns to the normal status data link is automatically restarted The time between an error and a return can be shortened Page 128 Section 8 2 1 Setting of the data link status upo
360. ion Station Count Set the number of slave stations that return to the system operation by a single link scan after the stations are disconnected due to a communication failure Setting a larger number extends link scan time of when the station returns 1 to 10 Default 1 Standby Master Station No Set the station number for the standby master station Set the number of the station that controls a CC Link system instead of the master station if a master station goes down Page 135 Section 8 2 5 Blank 1 to 64 Default Blank PLC Down Select Select whether to stop or continue data link if a stop error occurs in a CPU module gt Page 130 Section 8 2 2 e Stop e Continue Default Stop Scan Mode Setting Whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan of a CPU module or not can be selected gt Page 163 Section 8 3 5 e Asynchronous A link scan does not synchronize with a sequence scan Input transmission delay time is shortened e Synchronous A link scan synchronizes with a sequence scan The sequence scan and link scan start simultaneously Output transmission delay time is shortened Because of the synchronization extended sequence scan time increases link scan time e Asynchronous e Synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay Time Setting Set 0 Station Information Setting Set information about a slave station connected to the master station gt Pa
361. ion function the remote f aa oo a turn off the remote device station B120 station initialization device station initialization a es O x i ae initialization procedure procedure registration procedure registration instruction ie i i registration instruction function was turned off before all procedures are completed B122 Please consult your local O System error Biot O B123 Mitsubishi representative x 293 SI p09 JON ZT ELL s po9 JOU L Error code Delectability k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal i station station Setting error of the f The remote device station station where the pare hee f initialization procedure ots remote device station j aes Turn on the instruction in the B124 DAA os registration instruction was x O initialization procedure master station station number 0 i BD turned on in a station other than registration function is j the master station to be performed The remote device station initialization procedure Set the remote device station registration instruction was initialization procedure turned on without setting the registration then turn on the remote device station remote device station initialization initialization procedure procedure registration instruction Remote device station registration initialization procedure i B125 i p i A bit other tha
362. ion going down and the master station controlling data link If the standby master station goes down the master station takes over the control of data link Output from the master station Master station controlling Station number 1 0 Standby master station r 7 r 7 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY RX00 to RXOF Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Remote I O station RX10 to RX1F prann l Rx20 to RX2F Yooto Yor Station number 3 O pees ieee ees Pee MONG SRE PERT e e Occupies 1 station 1RX30 to RX3F X30 to RX3F pacar cts ett IRX40 to RX4F RY40 toRY4F RX40 to AF TRY to RAE X00 t0 XOF _ 00 to YOr RX50 to RXSF SF YiotoYir l bop ENS TT i ed feed ot YA LN i l Denes eee e anaa Gonan n O ES eso oad Outputs RY RWw of the standby master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the master station By transferring the inputs RX RWr of the master station to the outputs RY RWw outputs to the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above gt Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 e Input of the master station Master station controlling Station number 2 Station number 1 gt 0 Standby master station Remote Remote x Remote Remote input RX output RY Nout RX Remote O st
363. ion has been switched as O SB005B Master switching a master station is stored 7 Standby x 5E5y b11 request complete OFF Not completed masier ON Completed staton only 345 sqs sAejai jeloads yu p E xipueddy SMS suajsiBey jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a forced master switching request has been O Forced master SB005C MPA accepted is stored Standby switching request x x 5E5p b12 OFF Not accepted master acknowledgement ON Accepted station only Whether a forced master switching request has been O O Forced master Standby SB005D switchi sit completed is stored Standby witching requ SES b13 a OFF Not completed master master complete station ON Completed station only only Execution status of Whether the initialization procedure is being performed is SBO05E remote device station stored x F SE5p b14 initialization OFF Not performed O procedure ON In process Completion status of Whether the initialization procedure has been completed SB005F remote device station is stored R s 5E5p b15 initialization OFF Not completed O procedure ON Completed The setting status of the transmission speed mode setting SB0060 Hostmode switch on the host station is stored ost mo SE6
364. ions 232 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Assignment of the remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw In the program example the following assignment is used to perform data link Point The status of a device assignment can be checked on GX Works2 by setting information of a slave station on the CC Link configuration window on GX Worksz2 gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 a iew Docking Window gt Device Reference Device Reference CC Link Master Station Start 1 0 No 0000 Station No 0 Start 1 0 No 0000 x Display Option Export to CSV File Slave Station List Link Device List J Display Detailed Information Remote Input X j Remote Qutput RY Remote Pegister Awr Remote Pegister Aww Host STA Target STA Host sta Target STA Host STA Target STA Host STA Target STA Refresh wink Refresh crag levice Device RxO CH1 AD conversion comp y1000 RX CH2 AD conversion comp RX2 CH3 AD conversion comp RX CHEAD conversion comp Refresh STAH Link fare Refresh STAH Link levice Explanation Explanation Explanation meee aiken Explanation Riwrd CHI digital output val Rivw0 AD conv enable prohibit Riel CH2 digital output val Rww0 0 AD conv enable prohibit CH Riwr2 CH3 digital output val Rww01 AD cony enable prohibit CH RWIS CH4 digital output val RWwO2 AD conv enable prohibit CH RX4 CH5 AD conversion comp Rw CH5 digital output val Riww0 3 AD cony enable prohibit CH RX
365. isplayed in the log display part Displays the status of the selected item Status Logging Logging Time of Logging Acquisition 1 to 65535 seconds 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds or 0 seconds No specification T tour 0 minute second Stop Logging Log Storage Area in CC Link Module c Logging Progress 0 The first 45 logged data after starting logging when checking eo RAM Flash ROM will be stored in RAM and Flash ROM and will be stored only in RAM after it Please check logged data stored in the flash ROM after turning the power OFF gt ON or resetting programmable controller CPU When executing Clear Log selecting RAM Flash ROM in logged data stored area please execute Clear Log after stopping data link And please restart data link after completing clear log Log List The list will display up to 5 000 logs Selecting an item displays the status of selected date and time in the right window Date of Log Acquisition Error _ Error Details Returned normally Select an item ha Go Tota tn 2011 10 06 19 12 56 Normally operated Legend LE Le 9 Reserved Temporary error Error invalid Error station invalid station station 316 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING b Saving logs in a CSV file and reading the saved logs To save the information displayed under Log List in a
366. ission distance y i are not disconnected station to station distance transmission cable and FG Cable or other terminal grounding meet the A1 5 parts specifications Are terminating resistors connected Check if a station with built in terminating resistor is connected other than at both ends in the CC Link system Check if a station with built in terminating resistor is connected other than at both ends in the CC Link system Connect terminating resistors to the both ends in the CC Link system 276 To the next page CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the CPU module set to Check if the switch on the CPU status other than RESET Cancel the RESET module is not at the RESET when network parameters are o status position set A1 6 Link start Disable the intelligent Check if values are not set in the Was the system started by the function module switch i intelligent function module switch automatic CC Link startup sattin setting of the ing g programming tool Remove the error OJ User s manual Check the error code of the CPU for the CPU module module used hardware design maintenance and inspection Take corrective action Does the CPU module on the so that the CPU master station have no error module may identify the master local Check if the module has bee
367. itch Before performing a hardware test check that the CPU module is set to STOP For operation check of the watchdog timer function when the hardware test is performed an error SP UNIT DOWN occurs and the CPU module stops CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING The hardware test starts During the test the MST LED on the master local module is flashing The test is completed in about 30 seconds When the hardware test is completed the MST LED on the master local module turns off or on e When the test is completed MST LED on the master local module OFF ERR LED on the CPU module Flashing for operation check of the watchdog timer function e When the test is not completed MST LED on the master local module ON ERR LED on the master local module Flashing If the test fails check if the terminating resistor provided with the master local module is connected between the DA and DB terminals If the terminating resistor is connected the possible cause is a hardware failure Replace the master local module so JEMPIEH SLL 325 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Description of I O Signals 326 This appendix describes on off timing and conditions of I O signals 1 2 3 Module error Xn0 This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty OFF Module normal ON Module error Module error Xn0 Module ready XnF Host data link status Xn1 This signal indicates the data link s
368. itional mode the assignment of RX RY RWw RWr for each station differs depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the remote I O station points setting a Offset This area stores the start buffer memory addresses of RX RY RWw RWr assigned for each station When two or more stations are occupied a value is stored only in the start buffer memory address of the first station For example when the station number 1 occupies two stations values are stored only in the RX RY RWw RWr offset size information of the station number 1 and those for the station number 2 remain the default b Size This area stores the sizes of RX RY RWw RWr assigned for each station unit word When the size is less than one word the storage value is rounded up therefore 1 is stored When eight points are set in the remote I O station points setting 1 is stored For the remote I O station points setting refer to Page 170 Section 8 3 9 If the target station is a reserved station 0000y is stored The following table lists the relationship between RX RY RWw RWr offset size information and buffer memory addresses for each station Buffer memory address Item Default hexadecimal Hexadecimal Decimal 3E0y 992 Station No 1 RX offset 0000 3E14 993 Station No 1 RX size 0000 to to to 45Ey 1118 Station No 64 RX offset 0000 45Fy 1119 Station No 64 RX size 0000 4604 1120 Station No 1 RY
369. jdwexg ZOL 253 254 3 A Set the switch on the CPU module in the master station to RUN to execute the program Executing the program turns on Initial data processing request flag RX18 of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Then the initial setting is executed HD RUN C O When the initial setting is completed the input value of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN is converted into a digital value CH 1 digital output value is stored into D500 and CH 2 digital output value is stored into D501 If an error occurs in the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN an error code is stored into D508 After the cause of the error is removed and X25 is turned on the error is reset Turning on X22 sets the digital value of the AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN Turning on X23 outputs the analog value from the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN If an error occurs in the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN an error code is stored into D518 After the cause of the error is removed and X26 is turned on the error is reset CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 3 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Local Station This section provides an example of data link between a master station and a local station 10 3 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system is used for explanation purpose The same system is used for the master station and local station Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode N Module name Q20UDHCPU QJ61BT11N
370. l does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
371. l registers SWs 00000 cece eee eee eee eee 351 Appendix 4 Data Link Processing Time 0 000 c ccc teens 366 Appendix 4 1 Link scantime 00 0c eee eee 366 Appendix 4 2 Transmission delay time 0000 0 eect eee 371 Appendix 4 3 Processing time of dedicated instructions 0000000eee eee 381 Appendix 4 4 Link refresh time 00000 cece eee 389 Appendix 5 Difference from traditional modules 0 00000 cece cece eee eee 395 Appendix 5 1 Precautions when replacing an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 with a QJ61BT11N aira a ra a he Cee te ce Ne er tee A eh eR he ye At r TA A Fol te 395 Appendix 5 2 Precautions when replacing a QJ61BT11 with a QJ61BT11N 396 Appendix 6 Upgrading the Functions of a Master Local Module 0 02055 397 Appendix 7 When using GX Developer a n nannan nee nnn ene 401 Appendix 7 1 Parameter settings 2 0 0 ccc eee teens 401 Appendix 7 2 Device test 2 0 0 eect teens 401 Appendix 7 3 CC Link diagnostics s s ossee renere 402 Appendix 8 Setting sheet 0 nent eee ene n eee 407 Appendix 8 1 Assignment sheet 0 00 ce eee eens 407 Appendix 8 2 Network parameter setting sheet 0 0 ees 409 Appendix 8 3 Station information setting sheet nananana ee ees 411 Appendix 9 Checking the Function Version and Serial Number 2 0000055 413 Appendix 10CC Link Versions 0 0000 0c eee eee 415 A
372. l stations Link special register SW Ver 1 compatible slave station Ver 2 compatible slave station Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of modules on the master and local stations A slave station that supports the remote net Ver 1 mode A slave station that supports the remote net Ver 2 mode Intelligent device station A station such as the AJ65BT R2 N that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station Intelligent function module A MELSEC QIL series module that has functions other than input and output such as an A D converter module and D A converter module Cyclic transmission A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same system using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr Data link A generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission Device A device X Y M D or others ina CPU module Transient transmission A function of communication with another station which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or a programming tool High Performance model QCPU A generic term for the QO2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Buffer memory The memory of an intelligent function module used to store da
373. le This section shows an example of the program to read 11 word data from the buffer memory address 400 or later in the AJ65BT R2 N station number 63 to the area starting from D40 in the master station when M1 is turned on in the following system configuration e Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y00 to X Y1F e Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW e M10 is the G P RIRCV instruction executing flag e Assume that the settings of the interlock signal storage device are Request device RY2 Completion device RX2 Error code storage device RWr2 and Completion mode 1 Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 63 RIRCV request source Host station RIRCV request target Target station M1 M10 SW83 E MOV K63 D11 Y MoV H4 D12 J Control data setting oO oO 7TH ov 1400 D13 J Sh i i gt Q MOV K1 D14 F E 7 S J MOV H2 D15 J 5 D o lt MOV H202 D16 1 Interlock signal storage Fs 7 device setting 3 Mov HI D17 R T GP RIRCV UO D10 D40 D15 M20 H Dedicated instruction execution Mi SWE 4 set mio J Set G P RIRCV instruction executing flag to ON M20 M21 1 Perform process for normal Process upon normal completion ag 1 A s completion _________ _ of dedicated instruction M21 1 Perform process for abnormal Process upon abnormal end of pal ends ok o
374. le Master station Intelligent device station Command G P RITO Communication Buffer memory starts when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic update buffer Device 1 The device after the device specified by D of the master station specified by Un is accessed 2 Data are written to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 b Timing of writing data The G P RITO instruction writes data while it is being executed But the concurrent execution of the instruction from two or more locations is not allowed for the same intelligent device station c The number of allowable write points The maximum number of points that can be written by the G P RITO instruction is 4096 d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RITO instruction is nine e Assignment of the automatic update buffer The assignment of the automatic update buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 202 3 Operation error CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs 5142 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a s
375. ler Network modules the number of CC Link IE Field Network master local modules the number of MELSECNET H modules lt 3 4 Precautions a When a system is changed during data link upon automatic CC Link startup When changing a system such as a module replacement during data link execute a line test in all the stations If a station with a start station number used by another station returns a station where data link is already being performed only a station with a station number used may also go down b Use of a temporary error invalid station When the automatic CC Link startup is executed a temporary error invalid station cannot be used c When using a Basic model QCPU In a Basic model QCPU the automatic refresh is performed only in stations with station numbers 1 to 32 The automatic refresh is not performed in stations with a station number 33 or later Read or write data from to those stations using an intelligent function module device Un GO or FROM TO instructions dnes xul O9 oWewoyny g suoljoun ou Jo suoneoddy injesq eg 161 8 3 4 Reserved station function Slaved stations that are not actually connected but will be connected in future are not detected as Data Link Faulty Station in the master station and local station By setting slave stations that will be connected in future as reserved stations slave stations can be added without a program change because the RX RY RWr RWw assignment is
376. lows Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link O Enabled x Disabled Function Operation When the master station goes down the standby master station operates as a master station to When a failed master station becomes normal again it returns as a When only a standby master station is started up it starts data link asa Setting in Type K 5 standby master station master station continue data link Master station switching O x x Master Station function Master station duplex 7 Master Station function O O Duplex Function Data link start function using Master Station O O O a standby master station Duplex Function 3 Set Standby Master Station No from 1 to 64 Ex When Master Station Duplex Function is selected in Type Start I O No 1 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Master Station Duplex Function Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 1 Remote Input Rx x1000 Remote Output RY y1000 Remote Reaister RWr wo Remote Register RWw W100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Rec gister RWr Ver 2 Remote Reaister RWwi Special Relay 5B 580 Special Register 5Sw SWO Retry Count Automati
377. lt lell V m 4 Transmission delay time gt Delay time due to response delay of the remote I O station ll Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Ill Delay time between the master station receiving data and the data being stored into the buffer memory IV Delay time until information of the master station is refreshed in the CPU module 164 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Data flow in the synchronous mode Sequence scan gt link scan CPU module Sequence scan MR 2 Remote input RX f 4 j o ten J Link scan Response time of the first station ae Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station Responses from remote I O stations r T EJ J Input 1 Input 2 j oa f gt lt ll gt l gt V Transmission delay time gt Delay time due to response delay of the remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Ill Delay time between the master station receiving data and the data being stored into the buffer memory IV Delay time until information of the master station is refreshed in the CPU module uoneoyioeds uoneziuoiyouAS ULIS G E suoljoun 3y Jo suoneaddy jasn 8 165 e Sequence scan lt Link scan CPU module H LY H H J Sequence scan Master station buffer memory Remote input R
378. lumn Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Select whether to specify multiple temporary error invalid stations Multiple 00 Multiple stations set in SW0004 to SW0007 specified SW0003 temporary error 01 to 64 6034 invalid station A single station specified from 1 to 64 O specification The number represents the station number to be set as a temporary error invalid station Specify a temporary error invalid station SW0004 0 Temporary error invalid station not specified 604p 1 Temporary error invalid station specified sw0005 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi b SW0004 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 6054 Temporary error Sa it SW0005 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 invalid station O x x SW0006 specification SW0006 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 606p SWw0007 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Sw0007 The stations need not be set by the number of occupied stations 6071 Error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Set a station number where the line test is executed SW0008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed to all stations x x 60844 setting 01 to 64 Target station number O Default 0 Set monitoring time when dedicated instructio
379. m is decreased because one module occupies the station numbers for multiple modules The station numbers occupied by one module are not changed and only the number of points is increased Unlike Number of Occupied Stations the number of slave stations Expanded Cyclic Setting CC Link Ver 2 only i connected to a CC Link system is not decreased Note however that the transmission delay time is extended compared to that of when the number of points is increased in Number of Occupied Stations 52 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module In the remote net additional mode data of a Ver 1 compatible slave station are stored into a Ver 1 compatible area and data of a Ver 2 compatible slave station are stored into a Ver 2 compatible area a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module lt _ gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 Page 115 Section 7 4 2 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration 1 _ Boards Start IJO No Operation Setting Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input Rx Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw
380. minals with insulation sleeves cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended to cover the connecting sections of the solderless terminals with a marking tube or insulation tube Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction jnpo y uiezsu 4 9 To mount the module on the base unit fully insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit and press the module using the hole as a fulcrum Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Tighten screws such as module fixing screws and terminal screws within the torque ranges listed below Screw type Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 Nem Terminal block screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58 Nem Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89 Nem 4 The module can be easily fixed on the base unit using the hook at the top of the module Note however that it is recommended to secure the module with module fixing screws under vibration e Before installing or removing the terminal block power off the applicable station If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power normal data transmission is not guaranteed e Before removing the terminating resistors to change the CC Link system power off the system If the terminating resistor
381. mmunication ae Read 10004 to 1FFFY communication buffer is O O Appendix 2 8191 buffer write performed with a local 8 station standby master station and intelligent device station Stores data automatically updated when transient transmission Page 340 8192 to Automatic oo Read 2000 to 2FFF communications using the O Appendix 2 12287 update buffer write automatic update buffer is 9 performed with an AJ65BT R2 N 12288 to 30004 to 3FFFy System area gt 7 16383 Master station weno Stores the status of the data O sae input from slave stations Page 341 Minow 16384 t0 compatible i Read onl Append 2 H to H 16895 remote input Local station ead only ppendix 9 Stores the status of the data 10 RX O input from the master station 39 seaiy Aow w yng Jo S1 S E Address Availability i Name Description Read write Master Local Reference Hexadecimal Decimal i station station Master station Stores the status of the data Write only O output to slave stations Ver 2 1200 to app 16896 to compatible Local station Page 341 H tO H 47407 remote output Stores the status of the data Appendix 2 RY output to the master station Read 10 Data received from other write slave stations are also stored Ver 2 Master station compatible Stores the send data to Write only O remote register slave stations RW
382. mote O station Buffer memory areas move over Note that buffer memory areas for RWr and RWw in a local station do not move over when the local station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode When a local station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode data are stored in the Ver 1 compatible area When a local station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode data are stored in the Ver 2 compatible area CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications lt gt Page 24 Section 3 2 In CC Link increasing the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting can increase points per module Set the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting for each slave station gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 118 Section 7 4 2 1 Item Description The number of points is increased by increasing the station numbers occupied per module Note that the number of slave stations that can be connected to a CC Link system is decreased because one module occupies the station numbers for multiple modules Number of Occupied Stations The station numbers occupied by one module are not changed and only the number of points is increased Unlike Number of Occupied Stations the number of slave stations connected to a CC Link system is not decreased Note however that the transmission delay time is extended compared to that of when the number of poi
383. mote I O response time APPENDICES Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rio SM x n x 1 Rio SM LS x 1 Rio SM x n x 1 Rio Max value SMxn LSx2 Rio SM x n x 2 Rio SM LS x 2 Rio SM x n x 2 Rio lex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote I O response time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 20 3x1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 24 5ms 21 5ms 24 5ms 21 5ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 20 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 41 5ms 27 5ms 41 5ms 371 aul Aejap uolssiwusues Zp xipueddy ew Bulsseooig JU eyeq y xIpueddy b Master station RY remote I O station output This is the time between the device of a CPU module turning on off and the output of a remote I O station turning on off Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time
384. mote device station remain off Is the read write of word data disabled failed to be read written b the number of occupied The numbers listed to the left correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 2 Problems due to cyclic data error Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item Are all RY outputs disabled D1 1 D1 2 Intelligent device station cyclic data failure Intelligent device station local station Is the read write of word data disabled Are data failed to be read written by the number of occupied stations Yes Are all RY outputs disabled Is the read write of cyclic data disabled E1 1 1 2 Intelligent device station The numbers listed to the left daonan correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 3 Problems due to f 1 I 1 l transient data error i Take corrective action with 1 l I Master station operation error I G1 1 G1 2 Does the error code return to the response status No reference to the corresponding Master station item The numbers listed to the left 1 correspond to those listed in the i Check item column in i Section 11 2 4 Problems due to operation error in the master i station 1 I 1 I 1 Is the link stop restart disabled Take corrective action with reference to
385. mpatible a terminating resistor of 110Q used Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable 4 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 30cm or longer 600m 2 5Mbps 200m Between 30cm and 59cm 3 110m 5Mbps 2m or longer 60cm or longer 150m Between 30cm and 59cm 50m 10Mbps Between 60cm and 99cm 80m 1m or longer 100m e CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 130Q used Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable 4 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 30cm or longer 600m 2 5Mbps 200m Between 30cm and 59cm 2m or longer 110m 5Mbps 60cm or longer 150m Between 70cm and 99cm 50m 10Mbps 1m or longer 80m 4 This is a station to station cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 This is a station to station cable length between a master station and a station one before after the master station a local station and a station one before after the local station or an intelligent device station and a station one before after the intelligent device station 3 When this range is applied for one section the maximum overall cable distance is the shortest station to station cable length 32 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 4 CC Link dedicated cables In a CC Link system use CC
386. ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 374 APPENDICES 3 Master station lt gt remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station RX lt remote device station RX RWr This is the time between a signal input to a remote device station and the device of a CPU module turning on off or the time until the data in the device of a CPU module is changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time m Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation value Normal value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode SM xn LS x 1 x m Rd Synchronous mode SM x t x 1 Rd Asynchronous mode SM LS x 1 x m Rd Synchronous mode SM x t x 1 Rd SM x n LS x 2 x m Max value y SM x t x 2 Rd SM LS x 2 x m Rd SM x t x 2 Rd Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and the expanded cyclic setting is Double Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per st
387. n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rio Remote I O response time Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rio SM x n LS x 1 Rio SM LS x 1 Rio SM x n LS x 1 Rio Max value SM x n LS x 2 Rio SM x n LS x 2 Rio SM LS x 2 Rio SM x n LS x 2 Rio Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote I O response time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x1 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 1 1 5 20 3 x 1 1 5 20 x 1 3 x1 1 5 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 372 APPENDICES 2 Master station lt gt remote device station Ver 1 compatible slave station a Master station RX lt remote device station RX RWr This is the time between a signal input to a remote device station and the device of a CPU module turning on off or the time until t
388. n local station intelligent device station and standby master station is stored OFF All stations normal ON A faulty station exists The faulty station number is stored in SW0080 to SW0083 It takes maximum of six seconds for Other station data link status SB0080 to turn on after a slave station connected to the master station or local station becomes faulty SB0081 5E8 b1 Other station watchdog timer error status Whether a watchdog timer error has occurred in other stations is stored OFF No error ON Error Depending on the link refresh timing SBO081 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other station watchdog timer error occurrence status SW0084 to SW0087 SB0082 5E8 b2 Other station fuse blown status Whether a fuse blown error has occurred in other stations is stored SWO0088 to SWOO8B OFF No error ON Error Depending on the link refresh timing SBO082 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other station fuse blown status SW0088 to SWO08B SB0083 5E8 b3 Other station switch change status Whether the setting of setting switches of other stations during data link has been changed is detected OFF No change ON Changed Depending on the link refresh timing SBO083 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other station switch change status
389. n 3 2 In CC Link increasing the number of occupied stations can increase the number of points per module The number of occupied stations is set for each slave station gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 118 Section 7 4 2 1 Item Description The number of points is increased by increasing the station numbers occupied per module Note that the number of slave stations that can be connected to a CC Link system is decreased because one module occupies the station Number of Occupied Stations numbers for multiple modules 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Page 97 Section 7 3 2 Page 115 Section 7 4 2 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Setting IV Set 1 Z Start IJO No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station v Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 0 Remote Input RX x1000 Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remot
390. n Data link stop SB0002 A Do not write data to the Is Data link stop instruction Check if Data link stop SB0002 j B1 6 Link stop refresh source device correctly executed is off of Data link stop SB0002 from multiple locations 282 To the next page CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Apply the voltage Power supply for Check power supplied to the goe B2 1 S Isn t a voltage low within the specified communications faulty station range Check cables connected to the faulty station Are cables and connectors When faulty stations occur Cable or other A B2 2 paris securely connected and do sequentially to one end on the Correct the wiring a ee they meet specifications transmission path check cables connected to faulty stations close to the master station Keep the transmission Data link cable away from the cannot be F reer Check if the transmission cable is power cable performed in x away from the power cable Keep a distance of the entire 100mm or more is system f recommended occasionally f Is the transmission cable free Check if the FG terminal is B2 3 Noise i from noise grounded separately from the Ground the terminals GND terminal of the power separately system ne Take noise reduction Reduce the transmission speed measures and check if the frequency of vere Reduce the
391. n Setting of the network parameter 3 Page 101 Section 7 3 2 1 Page 118 Section 7 4 2 1 134 8 2 5 Standby master function CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS If the master station goes down due to an error in a CPU module power supply or others switching the control to the standby master station a backup station for the master station continues data link This function is used not to stop the entire system even if the master station goes down 1 Types of the standby master function The standby master function can be categorized into three types as listed below O Enabled x Disabled Function When the master station goes down the standby master station operates as a master When a failed master station becomes normal again it return as a standby master When only a standby master station is started up it starts data link as a master station station to continue data link station Master station switching function O x x1 Master station duplex function O O x 1 Data link start function using a O O O standby master station 2 14 A standby master station does not start data link until the master station starts up 2 Configure the same system for the master station and standby master station same modules connected parameters and program Before using this function check the version of the master local module lt gt Page 399 Appendix 6 2 3 2 Operation of the sta
392. n an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master station Whether to stop or continue data link when a stop error occurs in the CPU module of a master station can be selected Page 130 Section 8 2 2 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station Whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station can be selected How data should be handled can be selected according to the system used Page 131 Section 8 2 3 Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP Standby master function Whether to refresh or compulsorily clear remote output RY when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP can be selected How data should be handled can be selected according to the system used If the master station goes down due to an error in a CPU module power supply or others switching the control to the standby master station a backup station for the master station continues data link This function is used not to stop the entire system even if the master station goes down Page 133 Section 8 2 4 Page 135 Section 8 2 5 Master station duplication error canceling function Even if a master station duplication error has been detected the error can be cleared without resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system Page 172 Section 8 3 10 4 Diagnostics function Function Description Reference
393. n and RXn 1 RXn 1 turns on at an abnormal end 188 The same error code as that for Completion status of the control data is stored in the error code storage device CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIRCV instruction Master station Ea 8 Target station e 4 g 3 000 e 3 am o A CPU module Master station Intelligent device station RX RY Command H ene Buffer memory Device Receive buffer ADAIN d S 76 1 Reading of data from the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 is commanded 2 The master station monitors the remote input RX specified by S2 1 3 When the remote input RX specified by S2 1 turns on the master station reads data from the buffer memory of the target station The read data is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 4 The master station turns on the remote output RY specified by S2 0 When the remote input RX specified by S2 1 turns off the remote output RY specified by S2 0 is turned off 5 The data read from the target station are stored in the devi
394. n module A1 7 CPU module identified QA User s manual for the CPU module Data link ugoy hardware design maintenance cannot be di E nd in performed in and inspection the entire Check if the sequence scan time system is within the allowable range Isn t the sequence scan time 10Mbps 50ms Set the asynchronous long in the synchronous 5Mbps 50ms mode or reduce the mode 2 5Mbps 100ms transmission speed 625kbps 400ms 156kbps 800ms Keep the transmission cable away from the Check if the transmission cable is power cable Keep a away from the power cable distance of 100mm or more is recommended A1 8 Nois Is the transmission cable free Check if the FG terminal is oise from noise grounded separately from the Ground the terminals GND terminal of the power separately system IES Take noise reduction Reduce the transmission speed measures and check if the frequency of NEA Reduce the occurrence of noise is reduced ay transmission speed Repair or replace the Failure of the Do modules on the master Replace the modules and check if A1 9 module on the master master station station normally operate the station normally operates statio ion To the next page 277 UONE S SARIS e JO UONOBUUODSIP 0 BNP SWOJA L Z LL SWAI GOld JO S SI ZL Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the station number correctly F A2 1 Station number
395. n the local station in the remote net Ver 1 mode Transient transmission cannot be performed due to an error such as a timeout error Remote device station Remote device station Local station Ver 2 mode Local station Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible Ver 1 compatible Master station Station No 1 the number Station No 2 the number Station No 3 the number Station No 4 the number Ver 2 mode of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 N 1 Ver 1 compatible f vr remote input RX Station No 1 Station No 2 All O Station No 3 lt H Station No 4 Remote output RY Ver 2 compatible remote input RX ee ee ee Se 1 1 J 1 1 1 J t 1 1 J 1 P 1 i i Remoie oun Ry y 1 1 i 1 1 j 1 j 4 Li j j L ammm mm mm m Data for the station numbers 1 and 3 in the Ver 2 compatible slave station is 0 b Differences in functions between the modes of a master local module The following table lists differences in functions between the modes of a master local module Mode of a master local module Remote net Ver 1 E Item Remote net Ver 2 Remote net additional mode remote I O mode mode net mode Ver 1 compatible station Ver 1 compatible area Storage area for RX RY RWr RWw Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 2 compatible station Ver 2 compatible area l
396. n the one O lt j registration function corresponding to the start station parameter not set number was turned on in Turn on only the bit corresponding Specification of remote device to the start station number in station to be initialized SW0014 Specification of remote device to SW0017 to instruct the station to be initialized SW0014 remote device station to SW0017 initialization procedure registration Check the communication status f n A data link error has occurred in i Corresponding station j i of other stations if a temporary B201 the corresponding station during GORA O O error during sending an error invalid station is set or if the transient transmission at corresponding station is stopped Please consult your local B202 and B203 System error tee j O O Mitsubishi representative F Too many transient requests f Transient request Wait for a while and send the B204 were sent to the corresponding O O overload error request again station F A transient request was issued to Transient target station f F B205 nee a station other than an intelligent Change the target station O O rror device station Process request error A line test request was issued Execute a line test while data link B301 Ty D O O during link stop during link stop is being performed The destination station number of the temporary error invalid A Specify a station number smaller Specified station r
397. nd RWw can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a program 1 Number of refresh points All points for the station number 1 to last station number are automatically assigned lt gt Page 46 Section 3 6 3 to Page 55 Section 3 6 6 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 L gt Page 335 Appendix 2 4 2 Buffer memory areas of the refresh sources _ gt Page 47 Section 3 6 3 2 Page 50 Section 3 6 4 3 Page 56 Section 3 6 6 3 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode or Remote I O Net Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 1 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 2 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module 3 Overlaps with other devices Set the devices without overlaps with the following Refresh parameters of modules on the network I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module e Auto refresh settings of an intelligent function module e Auto refresh using a multiple CPU shared memory 4 To set X or Y to a refresh device Set a number later than the I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module 5 Refresh timing Data a
398. ndby master function The following are the operations of the master station and standby master station of when the master station goes down The following figure shows the operation until a failed master station goes back to normal after the standby master station starts to operate as a master station and data link is continued Controlling Controlling the data link of the CC Link system Standby status Standing by in case the station controlling the data link of the CC Link system becomes faulty Data link control by the master station Master station Controlling Master station Cyclic transmission Cyclic trdygmission Remote device station Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 2 oo OOooo0000 5 Q OOOO OOOOOOOO0O Intelligent device station Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 te i 3 3 900 xe 0 OOO O00000000 Remote device station Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 2 OOOO O00000 000 nooono0000 5 Cyclic transmission Intelligent device station Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 te g g 3 00O ioo ommo OOO COOOOOCO0O
399. ng can be selected only when Ver 2 Remote Device Station or Ver 2 Intelligent Device Station is set to Station Type e Single Double Quadruple Octuple Default Single 106 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Occupied Count Select the number of occupied stations of the slave station No Setting Occupied Station 1 e Occupied Station 2 e Occupied Station 3 e Occupied Station 4 Default Occupied Station 1 Remote Station Points The number of points of remote I O RX RY occupied by the slave station is displayed The number of points can be changed for a remote I O station when Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Setting Changing the number of points can save the areas of a refresh device in a CPU module L gt Page 170 Section 8 3 9 When setting eight points to the remote I O stations set them to even numbers of the stations consecutively When setting eight points to odd numbers of the remote I O stations set 8 Points 8 Points Reserved to the last of consecutive remote I O stations Remote O station Station No 3 no of occupied stations 1 Remote O station Station No 2 no of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station No 1 no of Master station occupied stations 1 Station No 2 Station No 1 Empty Station No3 i i 7 i ae Fooro i i 8 Points i i T rot i 8 Poi
400. ng of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master station If a stop error occurs in the CPU module of the master station whether to stop or continue data link can be selected CF Page 121 Section 7 5 Point When a standby master station is set the standby master station starts to take in control without data link of the master station continued even if the setting of the data link status is set to Continue Use of the standby master function is prioritized 1 Setting method Select whether to stop or continue data link in PLC Down Select of the network parameter lt gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 130 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 3 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station Whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station can be selected How the input data should be handled can be selected according to the system used gt Page 121 Section 7 5 1 Applicable input receiving data Bit input data from other stations are cleared or held according to the setting e Remote input RX of the master station e Remote input RX of local stations e Remote output RY of local stations Word input data from other stations are held regardless of setting e Remote register RWr of the master station Remote register RWr of local stations e Remote register RWw of local stations Remote I O stati
401. ngs in Interrupt Settings of the network parameter and in Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting of the PLC parameter lt 3 Page 111 Section 7 3 2 4 Page 119 Section 7 4 2 2 8 3 3 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Automatic CC Link startup Data link can be performed with the default settings by powering on the master local module This function is used to check the operation of when a system is configured This function can be also used in a system containing a remote I O station as well as a remote device station and intelligent device station Master station Remote 1 O station Intelligent device station Remote device station 1 Default parameter settings when CC Link is automatically started up with a master local module operating as a master station When a master local module is started up with the station number O it is started up as a master station The table below lists the parameter settings of when CC Link is automatically started up by a master local module operating as a master station Item Setting details Operation Setting Mode Refer to Page 159 Section 8 3 3 1 a Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 64 Refresh devices Refer to Page 160 Section 8 3 3 1 b Retry Count 3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Standby Master Station No No setting PLC Down Select Stop When an error occurs in the CPU module of a master station data
402. nications upon module error e Since a bus topology is employed communications among normal modules continue even if a module goes down due to power off or other causes e The equipped two piece terminal block is removable enabling module change during data link Note that if a cable is disconnected data link fails among all stations Power off the module to be replaced before removal Check that settings of the module that replaces the currently mounted module are the same as those of the mounted module Master station a Terminating C Terminating resistor resistor 1 TER lon eee A a cer E E oes E Ae E Data link is continued Data link is continued b Automatic return when a disconnected station recovers When the station disconnected from a network due to a data link error recovers it automatically restarts data link The time between an error and a return can be shortened Master station Terminating O Terminating resistor resistor Recovering from the error Master station Terminating Terminating resistor resistor Point The master local module can prevent a system failure by using the following functions as well Page 128 Section 8 2 to Page 154 Section 8 3 e Even if a master station fails cyclic transmission can be continued by having the standby master station served as a master station When a module is replaced error detection can be temporarily disabled 20
403. nk In addition stop data link before turning off the remote station Failure to do so may cause an incorrect input Data link starts Data link stops During Master station execution data link status Stopped ON i i Remote station ower supply status i i p pply OFF b Upon a momentary power failure of a remote station E If a momentary power failure occurs in the power supply 24VDC of the remote station an incorrect input may occur Cause of an incorrect input due to a momentary power failure The hardware of a remote station internally converts the power supply of a module 24VDC into 5VDC If a momentary power failure occurs in a remote station the time until the 5VDC power supply in the remote station turns off becomes greater than the response time after an input module turns on and off therefore refreshing data within the time as shown in 1 below causes an incorrect input Remote station Module power supply and input external power supply Remote station Internal 5VDC Input Xn after the response time between the input module turning on and Turning off the input external power supply turns off an input Xn it turning off 72 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Countermeasure against an incorrect input Supply power to the power supply module stabilized power supply and AC input external power supply from the same power supply CPU module
404. nk configuration window CC Link Configuration lt gt Online gt Detect Now a CC Link Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Detect Now Verify j Module List a Mode Setting Ver 1Mode z TX Speed 156kbps _ Link Scan Time approx 1535 ms Select CC Link Find Module My Fave 4 P Reserved Invaid Inteligent Buffer Selecton word F E a STA Ema Auto Verson ofsTaOcapied pended emote Staton Ponts Staton speafic mode setting m E General CC Link Module 1 i Ver 1 30caupied Station Single 96 Points E Master Local Module ji Ver 1 3 Occupied Station Singe 96 Points E Input Module Screw Terminal E i sta STAME E Input Module 40 pin Connecto pra Output Module Spring Clamp 1 Output Module Sensor Connec unt 2 Total STA 6 General Re General Re mote Device mote Device Sabon Sabon H Output x 102 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS The following items are automatically reflected to the CC Link Configuration window Station No Station Type e Version e of STA Occupied Stations e Expanded Cyclic Setting 4 When slave stations are used as local stations the stations are displayed as intelligent device stations Change the station type if necessary 5 Whena standby master station exists in the sys
405. nk startup M303 Dedicated instruction r LGP RLPASET U10 D100 D110 D150 D160 D170 M304 4 G P RLPASET 2 Process at completion of the G P RLPASET instruction M304 r Turn the parameter setting LRST M303 instruction off M305 Instruct to refresh at normal AF SET SB3 J completion of the G P RLPASET instruction 5 Instruct to start the control program LSET M310 4 at normal completion of the G P RLPASET instruction Perform abnormal end process Start of the control program M310 X100 X101 X10F igi Mc NO M320 NO M320 Refresh of RX SB6E A i FROM H10 HOEO K4X1000 K6 1 Data in RX00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F Refresh of RWr SB6E Data in RWr0 to RWr3 are read to i pE FROM__ H10 H2E0 D1000 K4 4 D1000 to D1003 Station number 1 control program SW80 0 ay Station number 1 control program Station number 2 control program sws0 1 i r g Station number 2 control program Station number 3 control program SW80 2 r Station number 3 control program Refresh of RWw SB6E r Data in RWw0 to RWw3 are written r g LTO inte MIER ee i J into D2000 to D2003 Lasvdiy d 9 8 6 Refresh of RY SB6E 3 P r Data in RYOO to RY5SF are written TF TO H10 H160 K4Y1000 K6 d ar ario MCR NO J Refresh of SB SW SM400 P3 Data in SB0000 to SB001F are J L
406. not changed In addition the number of points of a slave station that has been set as a reserved station can be set to zero points Stations that will be connected in the future Local station the number of occupied stations 4 Remote station 162 Remote station Remote station Remote station the number of Master station the number of the number of eta ol the number of occupied occupied occupied occupied stations 1 stations 2 stations 1 stations 2 Reserved station Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 8 Station number 10 000000000 000000000 0000 000000000 000000000 oooy 000000000 000000000 000000000 O00000000 Point Data link cannot be performed with a station set as a reserved station 1 How to set the number of points of a reserved station to zero points When a master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode the number of points of a reserved station can be set to zero points Use a programming tool to configure the setting The setting cannot be configured using a dedicated instruction However the setting can be configured by not reading or writing data from to a reserved station when cyclic data is refreshed using an intelligent function module device Un GO or FROM TO instruc
407. ns are used Default 10 seconds Range 0 to 360 second If a value outside the range is set the monitoring time will be 360 SW0009 Monitoring time s ae x econds 6094 setting O O When SWO0O0OB is set the time until a dedicated instruction fails is as follows Number or retries 1 x monitoring time Set monitoring time between a dedicated instruction executed to the CPU module and the CPU module responding to it SWOO0A CPU monitoring Default 90 seconds x 60Ap time setting Range 0 to 3600 second O O If a value outside the range is set the monitoring time will be 3600 seconds 351 SMS s13 s1691 jeloeds yur Z E xIpueddy SMS suajsiBay jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Set the number of retries of when dedicated instructions are used Dedicated SW000B inier Default 0 No retry x instruction retr 60By oe Range 0 to 7 time O O count setting i i If a value outside the range is set the number of times will be 7 Specify a station where an initial process is performed using the information registered by the initialization procedure registration using a swo014 programming tool 614 0 Initial process not performed 1 Initial process performed Swo0015 Specification of b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO 615p remote de
408. nstruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range including a dummy device The number of points required for each data is described below Control data 8 points Slave station setting data 64 points 4101 e Reserved station specification data 4 points e Error invalid station specification data 4 points Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data 78 points Ex If D12284 is set as the start device number of the slave station setting data S2 on the condition that DO to D12287 is set to the device in the CPU module the slave station setting data S2 becomes D12284 to D12347 64 points and an error occurs due to values out of the range CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 8 1 Program example parameter setting example This section shows an example of configuring settings for a master local module in the following system configuration Master station Model name Q20UDHCPU QJ61BT11N Start O number X Y100 to X Y11F Terminating resistor Terminating resistor Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote I O station Remote
409. nt Buffer Select Word Expanded Number of Remote Station Station y 5 i Invalid Cyclic Occupied Station 5 f No Type f Station Send Receive Automatic Setting Stations Points E elec oloo NI oaJ oO AJJ N gt Oo N wo P oa a oa N OQ as foe o N o N N N N wo jooys Humes g xipueddy N EN N oa N oO N NX N foe yeeys Bunjes uonewwojul uonelS g g xIpUeddy N o w Oo wo wo N w wo wo R w oa 411 Station No Station Type Expanded Cyclic Setting Number of Occupied Stations Remote Station Points Reserve Invalid Station Select Intelligent Buffer Select Word Send Receive Automatic 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 412 APPENDICES Appendix O Checking the Function Version and Serial Number The serial number and function version of a master local module can be checked on the rating plate the front of the module and the system monitor of a programming tool 1 Checking the function version and ser
410. nt to a local station The host station is performing data link Control program using data received from the master station Program of creating data sent to the master station Write the program to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Write the program created for the master station to the CPU module in the master station Write the program created for the local station to the CPU module in the local station ZX Online gt Write to PLC qmm or power off on Set the switches on the CPU modules in the master station and local station to RUN to execute the programs Turning on X20 in the master station turns on X1000 in the local station When X1000 in the local station turns on Y30 in the local station turns on Turning on X21 in the local station turns on X1001 in the master station When X1001 in the master station turns on Y31 in the master station turns on CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 3 6 Program example to assure the integrity of cyclic data in each slave station One of the following actions assures the integrity of cyclic data in each slave station Note that data integrity is not assured across slave stations 1 Using a programming tool On the Operation Setting window check the checkbox in Block Data Assurance per Station Project window 2 gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button
411. nt value C O Decimal 144 Data register D O Decimal 044 Link register W O Hexadecimal 244 File register R O Decimal 844 Link special relay SB Oo Hexadecimal 63H Link special register SW O Hexadecimal 64H Special relay SM O Decimal 434 Special register SD O Decimal 444 Devices other than above cannot be accessed e When accessing a bit device specify it as O or multiples of 16 The extended data register of address D65536 or later and the extended link register of address W10000 or later cannot be specified 183 IMIN d 6 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIWT instruction Master station Target station 0 mmf i CPU module Master station Local station CPU module Command G P RIWT 1 2 Send buffer Buffer memory 3 Device Device 3 4 1 The data to be written to the target station is stored in the send buffer of the master station 2 The data specified by S2 is written to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 or written to the device in a CPU module 3 The target station sends the response of write completion to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns on
412. ntelligent Setting Internal device i 2 File device function module Index Constant data System user i Others register JO O device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H n1 O O O n2 O O O D O n3 O O oO Z 1 Setting data N F PE z Q Device Description Setting range Data type E Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written a Un _ 0 to FEy qo with three digits O The station number of the intelligent device station 1 to 64 n1 a Random access buffer specification FFy 16 bit binary The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent device Between 0 and parameter n2 station specified by the master station or the offset value of the random M setting value l access buffer i Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which data to be written is stored ie n Device specified device n3 Number of write points 0 to 40962 16 bit binary 4 The value that was set in the station information setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 2 No process is performed when 0 is set 201 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RITO instruction Master station 8 Target station s 3 OOO 8 200000 CPU modu
413. nts gt Yori vod _ Reserved roa f H hn j i i i 8 point output 8 point output 8 pointoutput __ module module 1 _ module ae eee eee AEP ee 1 P ere Pe bor bet eee 0 Points Reserved Station e 8 Points 8 Points 8 Points Reserved e 16 Points 32 Points Default Varies depending on the Number of Occupied Stations Reserve Invalid Station Select Select whether to set the slave station as a reserved station or an error invalid station gt Page 162 Section 8 3 4 Page 167 Section 8 3 6 No Setting e Reserved Station e Invalid Station Default No Setting Intelligent Buffer Set the size of buffer memory used to perform transient transmission with dedicated instructions This setting can be configured only for an Select Word intelligent device station coe Set the size of send buffer to send data using the G P RIWT 0 64 to 4096 instruction Note that the total buffer size of Send and Receive for all slave stations must Receive Set the size of receive buffer to receive data using the G P RIRD be 4096 or less instruction Default 64 0 128 to 4096 Set the size of automatic update buffer to communicate with an Note that the total buffer size of Automatic intelligent device station using automatic update buffer Automatic for all slave stations must Set the size required for each intelligent device station be 4096 or less Default 128
414. nts is increased in Number of Occupied Stations Expanded Cyclic Setting CC Link Ver 2 only 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 Page 115 Section 7 4 2 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules Blank No Setting VV Set 1 _ Boards i 2 Start I O No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX x1000 Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr wO Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Yer 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBO Special Register SwW swo ols 4 fa s poy pue juswubissy 9 E pow gA JOU Jow yY pye b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for othe
415. nuals B002 x B101 and B102 Please consult your local O J System error ks O B103 to B106 Mitsubishi representative x B109 A data link error occurred on Data link error in target Check the operation of the target B10A target stations during a message O x stations n remote device station transmission me Check the station No of the target The message transmission Saio ation Message transmission function was executed for the B10C f Or check if the target station O x function unsupported remote device station that does supports the message not support the function a transmission function Transient data i B110 H A line error has occurred Modify the line O O receiving disabled Transient data B111 ni A line error has occurred Modify the line O O receiving order error Transient data length f B112 io A line error has occurred Modify the line O O error A line error has occurred or a Modify the line or check the Transient data f B113 on iy momentary power failure has power supply module and power O O identification error 7 A occurred in the sending station supplied to the sending station B115 Link error A line error has occurred Modify the line O O B116 Packet error A line error has occurred Modify the line O O With the remote device station Forced termination of initialization procedure Complete all the procedures then the remote device registrat
416. nvalid station in Station Information Setting of the network parameter gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 uonounj Buas uONels pienu JOU 9 g suoloun 3y Jo suonealddy jasn 8 167 8 3 7 Temporary error invalid station setting function Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations for maintenance or for other purposes during data link Point If an error occurs in all the slave stations set as a temporary error invalid station the ERR LED turns on 1 Input and output status of a temporary error invalid station Cyclic transmission data in a station set as a temporary error invalid station are all refreshed If an error occurs in a station set as a temporary error invalid station the input is held and the output is turned off 2 Setting method Configure the setting using one of the following methods e CC Link diagnostics 3 Page 321 Section 11 4 6 e Link special relays SBs or link special registers SWs Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers Item Link special relay SB and link special register SW to be used Temporary error invalid station specification Temporary error invalid request SB0004 5E0
417. o 4 Seqeeeedegeccccsccceceeshabacadaduencecerecccoahabsorpefeceaeaaaiay e No 4 ie es E L 1 RWw 1 4 i i RWw K i RWw i D i E 0 e 1 1 ot 1 l Station j 4 is Station 1 ation No j 1 rot 1 No 3 he No 3 Range o 1 r i d 1 Range of i on sending data to i 1 i the station No 4 j on No 4 I i i _ i i sending data gt Data sent from the master station or gt Data sent from slave stations Area where data is sent to other stations 51 powu jeuoippe JOU BJOWSY FYE s poy pue juswubissy 9 E Areas in RWr and RWw are occupied for the number of points of the remote I O station in the master station and local station When areas in RWr and RWw should not be occupied use the remote net Ver 2 mode _ gt Page 48 Section 3 6 4 2 The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station Point The assignment of RX RY RWr and RWw in a Ver 1 compatible slave station is the same as that in the remote net Ver 1 mode therefore a program that has been used in the remote net Ver 1 mode can be used Buffer memory addresses where RX RY RWr and RWw are stored are Ver 1 compatible areas e A remote I O station does not have RWr or RWw However areas in RWr and RWw of the master station and a local station are occupied for the number of points of a remote I O station Inthe remote net additional mode add a Ver 2 compatibl
418. o BA21 System error re O O Mitsubishi representative The following requests including the same request were tried to be executed to the same station at the same time e Message transmission function BB01 Concurrent execution Remote device station Perform the processes one by o o error initialization procedure one registration function e G P RISEND or G P RIRCV instruction e Access from a peripheral to a remote device station The remote I O net mode is set When setting the remote I O net BBC1 Mode setting error for a station other than the station mode set the station number O x number 0 setting switches to 0 A station number is set to a number other than 0 to 64 using i Check the station number and the Station number setting the station number setting i BBC2 i number of occupied stations of O O error switches on the module or the the module last station number has exceeded 64 Please consult your local BBC3 System error ae O O Mitsubishi representative Reduce the number of master iut i stations on the same line to one ultiple master stations exist on Or when the data link starts by Multiple master the same line BBC5 turning on Master station O x stations error Or noise has been detected on s ari theii i duplication error canceling eNe en request SB0007 check the line status Please consult your local BBC7 and BBC8 System error nee O O Mitsubishi representative
419. o RX3F RX40 to RX4F tole aaa fea sane ae See RY20 to RY2F RY30 to RY3F RY40 to RY4F TE ap hs a se pat ap The number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 2 Remote I O station r 7 i Station number 3 The number of occupied stations 1 Inputs RX RWr from slave stations to the master station are stored in outputs RY RWw of the standby master station shaded areas in the figure above 137 uoun Jaysew Aqpuels Z8 Aygeiiey weysks ey Bulroidu 7g b Operation between the master station going down and the standby master station controlling data link If the master station goes down the standby master station takes over the control of data link Output from the standby master station Standby master station controlling Station number 1 0 Remote output RY Master station Remote Remote Nout RX output RY Remote input RX i i j 1 il 1 RXONQ RXOF AYOF RX00 to RXOF 1RX10 to NF RX10toRX1F RY10toRY1F fi een RX20 to RX23 Y20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F te SSSA ee 1 F 71 O RX30 to RX3 NQY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F L RX40to FMF IRN toRY4F RX40toRX4F RY40 to RY4F E ENET i LOONT Rx50f RX5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RYSF WY ____ _ ___ N fe sewed Weems i gt
420. ocal stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations nw b c A reserved station is excluded TR Transient processing time only when a transient request is issued When a master station issues a transient request 180 e When a local station issues a transient request 40 8 x number of stations that issued a transient request 366 APPENDICES ST Constant The largest value in the results of 1 to 3 below When B is 0 the result of 2 is ignored When C is 0 the result of 3 is ignored 1 800 Ax 15 2 900 B x 50 3 C lt 26 1200 C x 100 C gt 26 3700 C 26 x 25 EX Constant only when a master local module is used in the remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode 50 total numbers found as listed in the table below Expanded Number of Occupied Stations Cyclic Setting Occupied Station 1 Occupied Station 2 Occupied Station 3 Occupied Station 4 Single 0 0 0 0 Double 70 x number of stations 80 x number of stations 90 x number of stations 100 number of stations Quadruple ddt numberofstations 110 x number of 130 x number of 150 x number of stations stations stations Octuple 110 x number of 160 x number of 210 x number of 260 x number of stations stations stations stations RT Retry processing time Only the link scan with a faulty slave station where data link is being performed is added a B x number of detected faulty stations 1
421. od Select the timing of the interrupt detection for the device set to Device 2 gt Interrupt Condition Code and Device No z g Word Device Setting Set the word device value for the interrupt condition if RWr or SW is G Value set to Device Code e Channel n T o a Sa Interrupt SI No The interrupt SI No is the control number on the master local module side to issue a request for the interrupt from a master local module to a CPU module This is not the device used for an actual program Point Only one interrupt condition can be set for one interrupt program 111 Setting range If the interrupt condition is established upon the completion of a link scan the interrupt is issued If Scan Completed is set to Device Code the interrupt is issued without condition upon the completion of a link scan Word Channel Device Device ae Device No Interrupt Detection Method Interrupt Condition Code No Setting Connection SI No Value No RX 0 to 1FFFy Edge Detect ON Interrupt at rise SB 0 to O1FFy Edge Detect OFF Interrupt at fall E Level Detect ON Interrupt at ON RY 0 to 1FFFH Level Detect OFF Interrupt at OFF RWr 0 to O7FFy Edge Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched first time only l 0 to 65535 w 0to 15
422. odule Accessing a device in a CPU module on a program enables access to RX RY RWr RWw SB and SW Page 97 Section 7 3 2 Page 115 Section 7 4 2 Scan synchronization Whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan of a CPU module or not can be selected Selecting the asynchronous setting shortens input transmission delay time Selecting the synchronous setting shortens output transmission delay time Page 163 Section 8 3 5 Cyclic data assurance This function prevents read write data from being separated between new and old data Block data assurance per station This function prevents read write data per station from being separated between new and old data depending on the auto refresh timing Because the setting is configured only on a programming tool a program to prevent data separation is not required Page 150 Section 8 2 6 1 32 bit data integrity assurance This function prevents read write data in 32 bit increments from being separated between new and old data Page 153 Section 8 2 6 2 Data link stop restart Data link of the host station can be stopped or restarted using a programming tool or SB SW This function is used when data link should be temporarily stopped for maintenance or other reasons Page 169 Section 8 3 8 Page 320 Section 11 4 5 Remote I O station points setting When the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode the refresh po
423. odule device Un GL or TO instructions 133 dOLS 0138S S Ndo J9 01 U0D Bjqewwes6oJd e uo YOMS y UBYM UONe s oAe s e Bunea Ajosindwoo bulyseey 7 78 Ageiiey Weysks ey Bulroidu 7g 2 Device to be set in the refresh device setting Whether remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared varies in the refresh device setting of the network parameter as described below e When Y is set remote output RY is compulsorily cleared regardless of the parameter setting e When a device other than Y such as M and L is selected remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the setting Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Setting MM Set 1 j 0000 Start 1f0 No L Operation Setting Operation setta Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 T Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Reaister RWr Remote Register RWw RASCALS Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Wer 2 Remote Register RWw _ Special Relay SB SB0 Special Register SW 3 Setting method Swo e When Y is selected remote output RY is compulsorily cleared regardless of parameter a setting Select whether to refresh or clear output sending data to a slave station in Case of CPU STOP Setting under Operatio
424. of programmable controller CPU STOP 0 Refresh 1 Clears compulsorily ta Expanded cyclic setting 00 Single 01 Double 10 Quadruple 11 Octuple gt Block guarantee of cyclic data per station 0 Not set 1 Set a Automatic detection Of connected devices 0 Not read the model name of the slave stations 1 Read the model name of the slave stations SW0064 No of retries The set number of retries upon an error response is stored x 6644 information 1 to 7 time No of s Swo0065 The set number of automatic return stations in one link scan is stored automatic return x 6654 1 to 10 station stations SWo0066 Delay timer y The set delay time is stored x 6664 information The parameter setting used is stored Oy Parameter written to the CPU module SW0067 Parameter p i 3y Parameter setting and data link start using the dedicated instruction x 6674 information G P RLPASET Dp Default parameter automatic CC Link startup Whether the parameters have been correctly set is stored SW0068 Host parameter 0 Correct x 6684 status Values other than 0 Error code _ 3 Page 293 Section 11 3 2 354 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether unique station numbers have been assigned for modules and whet
425. offset 0000 4614 1121 Station No 1 RY size 0000 to to to 4DE 1246 Station No 64 RY offset 00004 4DFy 1247 Station No 64 RY size 0000 4E0 1248 Station No 1 RWw offset 0000 4E1y 1249 Station No 1 RWw size 0000v to to to 55E 1374 Station No 64 RWw offset 0000 5S5Fy 1375 Station No 64 RWw size 0000 5604 1376 Station No 1 RWr offset 0000 5614 1377 Station No 1 RWr size 0000 to to to SDE 1502 Station No 64 RWr offset 0000 SDFy 1503 Station No 64 RWr size 0000 335 A sealy Aiowsy Jeng z xipueddy When connecting the local station with the expanded cyclic setting and remote I O stations with the remote I O station points setting Local station station No 1 the number of occupied stations 2 expanded cyclic Master station setting octuple Remote I O station station No 4 the number of occupied stations 1 remote I O station points setting 8 points Remote O station station No 3 the number of occupied stations 1 remote I O station points setting 8 points se noooooonna oooooo o O he 1 T O0o00 o0oo0oo0000000 OOO0G oo00000000 a a a a Buffer memory area Value Description Station No 1 RX offset 4000 Start buffer memory address of RX in the sta
426. oints SB 512 points SW 512 points are refreshed to areas other than a file register Block guarantee of cyclic data Not set per station function RX RX2 RY RY2 SB KM1 KM2x E E Number of CC Link modules 1 x KM4 ms 1024 896 1024 896 512 0 28 0 00043 x 3 16 0 1 1 X 0 2 0 83728 0 84 ms 394 RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW 128 128 128 128 512 APPENDICES Appendix 5 Difference from traditional modules This appendix lists differences from traditional master local modules Appendix 5 1 Precautions when replacing an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 with a QJ61BT11N 1 Functions The following table lists the differences between an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 and QJ61BT11N Item A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Starting up method Yn6 Yn8 anda dedicated instruction are Yn6 Yn8 and the parameters of the CPU module of a master The parameters of the CPU module of a master station Yn6 and Yn8 cannot be used and a used station are used dedicated instruction are used Module reset function using a program Yes Yes No Parameter settings using the FROM TO instructions Yes Yes No Parameter settings using dedicated instructions Yes No Yes Parameter settings using a programming tool No Yes Yes Standby master function A failed master station A failed master station A failed master station cannot return cannot return
427. olumn in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item To the next page 271 Selected station information Check if the Parameter status matches with the status of the connected modules 1 Reservation setting mismatch 2 Error invalid setting mismatch gt Link error G Watchdog timer error When a CC Link system is Ii 3 Station type mismatch gt newly configured or the existing Wien ie GEk systa 4 Number of occupied stations CC Link system is changed has operated mismatc 5 Expanded cyclic setting I mismatch m i A2 4 No error i y l I I Temporary error invalid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A2 4 I I I I I I I I I gt A2 9 A4 5 I l Fuse blown error a A2 9 A4 5 l Error O The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item No error Transient error No error 4 To check error details a programming tool is required To the next page 272 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Peano A Cae When the CC Link system has operated newly configured or the existing CC Link system is changed No Yes B1 3 B1 4 L ERR flashing
428. on ON connected again Switch setting status SBOO6A turns on and the error code is stored in Switch setting status SWO06A One of the station numbers 1 to 64 is already in use Check the station number of the station connected again Whether the station number is already in use can be Flashing checked in Loading status SW0069 and Station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B Even if the station number is in use data link is performed with a normal station Point Correct the station number already in use Resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system clears error information stored in a link special register SW or others Bum s JequNN uol e S 9 83 84 3 Precautions a Detecting overlapped station numbers of the master local module An overlapped station number is detected in a master local module if a station number other than a start number is in use Local station Station Station Station Station Station No 1 no of occupied stations 4 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Same station No Ri te devi tati Stati Stati Station hea he of occupied stations 2 If a start station number is in use it is not detected The station number 0 of the master station is detected if it is in use Check whether the station number of the station where a data link error has occurred is not already used for other stations using Other station data link status SW0080
429. on Remote device station Local station Local station Master station station number 1 station number 2 station number 3 station number 4 Remote input RX Remote input RX Remote input RX Station number 1 gt Station number 1 E Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 2 tation number gt Station number 3 Station number 3 tation number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4 N Remote output RY Remote output RY Da wo ee Remote output RY tation number 1 Station number 2 tation number 1 i 1 Station number 2 iz Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Remote register Remote output RY tation number DIM A ja Remote register RWr Station number 1 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Remote register RWr Remote register Remote register RWw RWw RWw Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 k Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 J Target areas for clear hold O Areas held regardless of the setting Point If a data link error occurs in a station set as an error invalid station input data remote input RX from that station is held regardless of t
430. on duplication error canceling function 09112 or later Transmission speed test programming tool used 10032 or later 1 15R or later Transmission speed test link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs used 10032 or later Message transmission function G P RDMSG instruction 10032 or later Status logging 10112 or later 1 15R or later Status logging flash ROM storage 12032 or later 1 15R or later Module error history display 11042 or later 1 15R or later Station information setting on the CC Link configuration window 1 73B or later Automatic detection of connected devices LA iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual x Data backup restoration LA iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual x ainpoyy 207 Se e JO suonouny y BuipesbdN 9 xipueddy 399 400 4 Use a CPU module with the serial number listed below CPU module First 5 digits of the serial No Basic model QCPU 06112 or later High Performance model QCPU 05032 or later Process CPU excluding a QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU 07032 or later 2 Use a CPU module with the serial number listed below CPU module First 5 digits of the serial No High Performance model QCPU 08032 or later Process CPU Redundant CPU 09102 or later 3 Use a CPU module with a serial number first five digits of 08032 or later 4 A Process CPU with Version 8 24A or lat
431. on ends abnormally Note that CC Link is automatically started up for the master local module with the smallest start I O number instead gt Page 159 Section 8 3 3 Keep the switches 1 2 and 5 blank If any values are set the normal operation is not guaranteed 4 Click the End button to terminate the setting 5 Create the following program Refresh of SB SW SM400 Data i imi r 4 ata in SB0020 to SBO1FF are read 1 LFROM H10 H5E2 K4SB20 K30 J to B0020 to SBO1FF r Data in SW0020 to SWO1FF are LFROM TIO pero Sw20 K430 read to SW0020 to SW01FF Parameter setting SM402 SB6E al SET M300 _ Instruct to set parameters G P RLPASET instruction Control data M300 5 MOV KO DO J Clear completion status Mov K15 D1 J All setting data Valid MOV K3 D2 Total module connected 3 MOV K3 D3 J Retry count 3 times Automatic reconnection station Mov K1 D4 I ean Operation specification when CPU is MOV KO D5 J down Stop pA ANNAN rv KO D6 Scan mode setting o o o MOV KO D7 Delay time setting 0 O l UF Slave station setting data M300 R g Mov H2101 D10 q First Local station occupies 3 U 1 station station D gt number 1 4 x p Mov H102 D11 Second Remote I O station 2 4 occupies 1 station 5 Y station number 2 D Mov H103 D12 J Third Remote I O station gt occupies
432. on information B386 stations setting error parameter all the number of Set the values within 1 to 4 O x parameter occupied stations are set to 0 The delay time setting in the Delay time setting B387 network parameter of the master Set 0 for the delay time O x error parameter SME station is outside the range A value set for the station type in B388 Station type setting the station information parameter Set a value within 0 to 2 in the J error parameter is outside the range in the remote remote net Ver 1 mode O net Ver 1 mode Please consult your local B38A System error ee ee O Mitsubishi representative Remote device station More than 42 remote device B38B setting error stations are set in the station Set the value to 42 or less O x parameter information parameter 297 SI p09 JON ZELL s po9 013 Ee Error code Delectability k Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station More than 26 intelligent device Intelligent device f stations including local stations B38C station setting error ae f Set the value to 26 or less O x are set in the station information parameter parameter In the invalid station specification parameter a station number other than the start station number of the module or a station number not set in the parameter i F is set Set the
433. on the link special register number The following table lists the update timing Link special aA Link special ae Data update timing Data update timing register register SW0041 SW0071 Updated regardless of the SB status Updated regardless of the SB status Updated after each station becomes SW0045 SW0072 stable SW0060 When the SBO0060 status is changed SW0074 to SW0077 When the SB0074 status is changed Sw0061 When the SB0061 status is changed SW0078 to SW007B When the SB0075 status is changed Swo0062 SW0080 to SW0083 When the SB0080 status is changed SW0067 SW0088 to SW008B Updated regardless of the SB status Swo0068 Swo090 When the SB0090 status is changed Swo0069 SW0098 to SWO09B SWO06A Updated regardless of the SB status SWO09C to SWOO9F Updated regardless of the SB status SW006D SWO0B4 to SWO0B7 SWOO06E SWOO0B8 SWOO06F Sw0070 365 SMS s193 s1691 jeloeds yur Z xIpueddy SMS suajsiBay jeloedg yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Appendix 4 Data Link Processing Time This appendix describes data link processing time such as link scan time and transmission delay time When all the stations in a CC Link system are normally performing data link the retry processing time RT and return processing time F that are included in the formulas are not required to be added Appendix 4 1 Link scan time This section describes the
434. onal mode or remote I O net mode is selected In the remote net Ver 1 mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY gt Page 47 Section 3 6 3 3 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY in the Ver 1 compatible slave station gt Page 54 Section 3 6 5 3 In the remote I O net mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY L gt Page 56 Section 3 6 6 3 a Remote input RX f Buffer F Buffer p Buffer Buffer 7 Buffer Station N Station ON Station Memory Station TN Station EON number number number number number address address address address address E04 and E1 ia FA and FBy z7 1144 and 1154 i 12Ey and 12Fy a 1484 and 1494 224 and 225 250 and 251 276 and 277 302 and 303 328 and 329 3 E24 and E34 ae FCy and FDy Sa 1164 and 1174 a 1304 and 1314 54 14Ap and 14By 226 and 227 252 and 253 278 and 279 304 and 305 330 and 331 3 E44 and E54 46 FEy and FFy 29 118 and 1194 42 1324 and 133 55 14Cy and 14DH 228 and 229 254 and 255 280 and 281 306 and 307 332 and 333 4 E64 and E74 47 1004 and 1014 30 11Ay and 11B 43 1344 and 1354 56 14E and 14F 230 and 231 256 and 257 282 and 283 308 and 309 334 and 335 z E84 and E94 r 1024 and 1034 ss 11Cy and 11Dy a 1364 and 137 57 1504 and 1514 232 and 233 258 and 259 284 and 285 310
435. onding f due to many transient requests station B407 Please consult your local O System error rare O B409 Mitsubishi representative x The receive buffer size of the Receive buffer size i es B410 o dedicated instruction is smaller Change the receive buffer size O O error than the response data size The number of read write points B411 Data length outside the in the control data of the Change the number of points o o range dedicated instruction is outside within the range the range s The station number stored in the a Station number outside Change the station number within B412 control data of the dedicated O O the range her i the range instruction is outside the range Multiple dedicated instructions B413 Request error were executed to the same Modify the program O O station The value set to the interlock B414 Interlock signal data signal storage device of the Set the device value within the o J outside the range G P RIRCV or G P RISEND range instruction is outside the range The dedicated instruction only for B415 Execution station type the master station was executed Check if the host station type is a x o error on a station other than the master master station station Please consult your local B416 to B418 System error A O x Mitsubishi representative 301 SI p09 JON TELL s po9 JOU L Error code Delectability
436. onnected or the transmission path has been affected by noise SW0058 Detailed LED TIME ERROR Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being disconnected or the Oo O O 6584 display status transmission path being affected by noise PRM ERROR Invalid parameter value M S ERROR Multiple master stations exist on the same line SW ERROR Error in switch settings 1 LOCAL The station is operating as a local station gt S MST The station is operating as a standby master station MST The station is operating as a master station ERR Error RUN The module is operating normally Transmission speed setting status is stored 0 Cleared 1 Set b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO SW0059 Transmission o to o 0 0 0 6594 speed setting 10Mbps O 2 9 5Mbps 2 5Mbps gt 625kbps 156kbps Forced master Whether the forced master switching instruction using SB000C has been O SW005D switching normally completed is stored Standby 65D instruction 0 Normal completion master x x station result Values other than 0 Error code gt 37 Page 293 Section 11 3 2 y only Remote device station I oai DEE eae eo a Whether the initialization procedure registration instruction using SWO05F inital aon SBOOOD has been normally completed is stored sFuj Pcedure 0 Normal completion O i i registration iiistr ti n Values other than 0 Error code lt _ Page 293 Section 11 3 2 result
437. ons Data write sending received from other slave receiving stations are also stored 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Availability Name Description Read write Master Local Reference Hexadecimal Decimal N station station Remote register Master station RWr 1 Stores the data received O Master from slave stations ion P 333 736 to station For age i9 2E0 to 3DF data Read only Appendix 2 991 a Local station receiving 3 Stores the data received O e Local station from the master station For data receiving Slave station Stores the offset and size of Page 335 992 to i 3E0p to 5DF4 i503 offset size RX RY RWw RWr in each Read only O O Appendix 2 information slave station 4 Read Page 338 1504 to Link special N 5E0 to SFFy Stores the data link status write Appendix 2 1535 relay SB Data can be 5 written only O O r A P Page 339 1536 to Link special to areas with i 600 to 7FFy Stores the data link status Appendix 2 2047 register SW the first 32 i addresses 6 2048 to 800p to 9FFy System area S Z g 2559 f Page 339 2560 to Random access Stores any data and is used Read j A00p to FFFy os O O Appendix 2 4095 buffer for transient transmission write 7 Stores sending receiving data and control data when transient transmission elt communications using a Page 339 4096 to Co
438. ontinue Continue programming Holds the occurs in a remote I O tool for local receive area tati station sta lon from the setting Hold remote I O station having a communication failure Clears the receive area from the Data Link Clear remote device When a n Faulty station having a Holds the communication Station communication receive area failure such as fail from the Setting of a P sd Pa ailure i power off Indefinite Indefinite Indefinite Indefinite Continue remote device Continue j programming Holds the i occurs in a tool for local station having a remote device aion rece arga communication station from the failure setting Hold remote device station having a communication failure Clears the receive area i from the local Data Link Clear i When a Faulty station having a Holds the communication Station communication receive area fail h Setting of failure from the local l alure sucijas TNO gt Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue E Si Continue power off programming Holds the station having a occurs in a tool for local receive area communication local station station from the local failure Hold setting station having a communication failure 123 10113 ue je UONe S 3ABJS e pue uoges Ja Sep e UGEMJEg UYI SNIS FZ 124 1 2 If parameter settings have been configured using dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter
439. or a local station local station local station local station local station Remote 1 station f register 4 points 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points occupied RWw Number of Remote link points register 4 points 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points by the RWr number of ee 64 points 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points emote occupied RX RY 62 points for a 62 points for a 94 points for a 190 points fora 382 points for a stations i local station local station local station local station local station 2 Remote stations register 8 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points occupied RWw Remote register 8 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points RWr 25 suonedijineds avuewlo d ZE CC Link Ver 2 Item CC Link Ver 1 Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple 96 points 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Remote I O f RX RY 94 points for a 94 points for a 158 points fora 318 points fora 638 points for a local station local station local station local station local station 3 Remote stations register 12 points 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points occupied RWw Number of Remote link points register 12 points 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points by the RWr number of Remoteli 128 points 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points emo occupied RX RY 126 points f
440. or conforming to NECA4202 and IEC947 5 2 or equivalent product is recommended NECA Nippon Electric Control Equipment Industries Association Do not remove the jacket of the cables on the branch line if possible 80 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Item Specifications Remark Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible terminating resistors of 110Q used Cable length Cable length between a master local station Lp ae Mazimun Distance between remote and the station one before after the e E between I O stations or master local station or an intelligent device Maximum length of the main P ee T branches remote Sovice station and the station pelt the inesdistance beween T stations intelligent device station 3 branches and station to 625kbps toom ma 30cm or longer 1m or longer 2m or longer 2 station cable length 156kbps 500m restriction wa This applies to a system configured with a remote I O station and remote device station only 2 This applies to a system configuration including a local station and intelligent device station 3 4 Refer to the following figure Maximum length of the main line not including the branch line length Distance between T branches Terminating Terminatin p a E n ran resistor resistor 3 3 Ae m pore R R Branch line length 8m or sh
441. ora 126 points fora 222 points fora 446 points fora 894 points for a stations local station local station local station local station local station 4 Remote stations register 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points occupied RWw Remote register 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points RWr 26 3 2 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Maximum number of connected modules A CC Link system can be configured with the number of modules meeting the following conditions 1 Maximum of 26 modules 1 station in each system 4 A Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode A Local station Maximum of 64 modules m Remote I O station CC Link dedicated cable S Intelligent device station 64 modules in total The table below lists the maximum number of connected modules of when a system is configured only with Ver 1 compatible slave stations For the modes refer to Page 43 Section 3 6 2 64 modules of a remote I O station remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station can be connected in total for one master station Note however that the following conditions must be satisfied Item Number of modules Condition 1 1 x a 2 x b 3 x c 4 x d lt 64 Number of modules occupying one station Number of modules occupying two stations Number of modules occupying three stations
442. ork Parameter gt CC Link gt CC Link Configuration Setting button 2 Select modules in Module List and drag and drop them to List of stations Slave stations are added to List of stations The added modules are displayed in the device map area as well 3 When completing the setting close the CC Link configuration window CC Link Configuration gt Close with Reflecting the Setting CC Link Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Detect Now Verify Module List x Mode Setting er iMode v xSpeed 156kbps _y Unk Scan Time Approx 15 88 ms Select CC Link Find Module My Favorites I pe peanae aaa lt 1 General CC Link Module 2 t CC Link Module Mitsubishi Electric Corporation lz 3 Master Local Module EB RJ618T11 Master Local Module QJ61BT11N Master Local Module E L26CPU BT Master Local Station Function Built in CPU Module E 126CPU PBT Master Local Station Function Built in CPU Module 618711 Master Local Module E Input Module Screw Terminal Block Type Input Module Screw 2 piece Terminal Block Type Tjgpt Module Screw 2 piece Terminal Block Dustproof Type I Igqut Module Spring Clamp Terminal Block Type B Iput Module Sensor Connector Type e CON a 1 1 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 2 4 __ AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Remote Device Station Ver 1 30ccupied Station Single 96 Points No Setting Remote Dev
443. orter 3 RI Represents a remote I O station or a remote device station Represents a local station or an intelligent device station Bul zZ 9 Branch line length 8m or shorter uo o uuo s YOUeIG Z 9 81 6 3 Station Number Setting This section describes how to set the station numbers for CC Link and a master local module 1 Station number setting for CC Link For CC Link follow the rules below to set the station numbers Set the station numbers not used for other stations If a station number already in use is set an error occurs Set consecutive station numbers for stations in the same system To set empty station numbers for future use set the stations as reserved stations Setting the stations as reserved stations prevents the stations from being detected as a faulty station Set reserved stations in the master station using the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 162 Section 8 3 4 When the number of occupied stations in a module is two or more set the start station number Ex Station number setting in modules when the number of occupied stations is two or more Slave station Slave station Master station Number of occupied stations 3 Number of occupied stations 2 Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 4 Station No 5 Station numbers set for
444. ory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station or within the send buffer area setting range set by a parameter 3 To write device data to the CPU module of the target station other than the QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode LCPU QnACPU or AnUCPU the setting range must be 1 to 10 words b Access code and attribute code When accessing to the buffer memory in the CC Link Attribute Buffer memory contents Access code code Buffer in the intelligent device station 00 Random access buffer 204 Remote input 214 Remote output 224 044 Buffers in a master station and a local station Remote register 244 Link special relay 63H Link special register 644 182 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Access code and attribute code When accessing to the device in a CPU module Device contents Name Rerin DB Unit Access code AEE Bit Word code Input relay X O Hexadecimal 014 Output relay Y Hexadecimal 024 Internal relay M O Decimal 03H Latch relay L 8 Decimal 834 Link relay B O Hexadecimal 234 Timer contact T O Decimal 09H Timer coil T O Decimal OAH Timer present value T Oo Decimal OCH Retentive timer contact ST Oo Decimal 89H Retentive timer coil ST O Decimal 8Ay Retentive timer present value ST O Decimal 8Cy 054 Counter contact Cc O Decimal 11H Counter coil C O Decimal 124 Counter prese
445. ous mode Nomalvaie SM x n LS x 1 x m 1 SM x t x 2 SL x SM LS x 1 x m 1 SM x t x 2 SL x k 1 k 1 SL Max value OM M ILS 2 m 1 SM x t x 3 SL x SM LS x 2 x m 1 SM xp x3 SL x k 1 k 1 SL When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms the expanded cyclic setting is Double and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 20 x 1 3 x 1 x 3 1 Normal value 10 x 1 1 52ms 20 x 1 x 2 10 x 20 3 x 1 x 3 1 10 1 1 60ms 42ms oul Aejap uolssiuusues Zp xipueddy awl Bulsseooig U1 eyeq y xIpueddy 20 x 1 x 2 40ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 x 3 1 Max value 10 x 1 1 61ms 20 x 1 x 3 10 x 20 3 x 2 x 3 1 10 1 1 80ms 51ms 20 x 1 x 3 60ms 379 b Master station RY local station RX master station RWw local station RWr This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a master station and the data stored into t
446. ovides sheets to be used when the parameters of CC Link are set Copy the sheets for use Appendix 8 1 Assignment sheet 1 Remote I O RX RY assignment sheet For an example of using the assignment sheet refer to Page 59 Section 4 1 or Page 228 CHAPTER 10 Master station local CPU module Slave station station Device Buffer memory address Station No Module name Remote I O RX RY to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to Page oO Oo to to gs 2a to to x amp to to gt o gt 2 to to g 5 a a to to 538 33 to to 32 n to to 2 2 to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to 407 2 Remote register RWr RWw assignment sheet For an example of using the assignment sheet refer to Page 59 Section 4 1 or Page 228 CHAPTER 10 Master station local CPU module Slave station station Remote register Device Buffer memory address Station No Module name RWr RWw 408 Appendix 8 2 APPENDICES Network parameter setting sheet
447. ow of a programming tool indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added APPENDICES Appendix 10 Cc Link Versions There are Ver 1 and Ver 2 for CC Link versions 1 2 3 Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 Ver 1 10 is a standard where restrictions of station to station cable lengths in Ver 1 00 have been cleared and the length of all station to station cables is 20cm or longer Ver 1 00 is a traditional standard For the maximum overall cable distance of Ver 1 10 refer to Page 29 Section 3 2 2 The following are conditions where all station to station cables have a length of 20cm or longer All the modules in a CC Link system are Ver 1 10 compatible All the cables are Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables Ver 2 Ver 2 compatible module is a module that supports the cyclic points expansion The specifications of a cable are the same as those of Ver 1 10 Point In a system where a Ver 1 00 compatible module is included the maximum overall cable distance and station to station cable length need to meet the specifications of Ver 1 00 For the maximum overall cable distance and station to station cable length of Ver 1 00 refer to Page 30 Section 3 2 3 How to check the version On a Ver 1 10 compatible module the rating plate has a logo CC Link On a Ver 2 compatible module the rating plate has a logo V2 CC Link lA
448. pecial function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified ido When the number of write points n3 is set beyond the setting range When the station number specified by n1 does not exist 203 OLIH d 16 9 7 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to write 10 word data from the area starting from DO in the master station to the offset value 1004 of automatic update buffer or later 4004 or later in the intelligent device station when XO is turned on in the following system configuration e Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F e Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RITO request source Host station ml Automatic i to iupdate buffer memory eee Dedicated instruction 1 AF LGP RITO U4 K1 H100 DO K10 execution END 204 9 8 G P RLPASET CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS The G P RLPASET instruction sets the network parameters to the master station and starts up the data link Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RLPASET H
449. pendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 x 1 13 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 7271 x 1 13 O 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5x 12 1 x 1 13 0 66 15 66 2ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES b Local station gt master station The time between a local station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from the master station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt e G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 72 1 13 SM WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU QO2CPU 1ms A QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO2CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps SM Master station sequence scan time Apply 0 when buffer memory data in CC Link is read WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 _ 3 Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan t
450. ple CPU shared memory 4 To set X or Y to a refresh device Set a number later than the I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module 5 Refresh timing Data are refreshed in the END process of a CPU module Blank or the following range e Device X M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range e Device M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range e Device M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank 116 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw When Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode
451. ppendix 11 External Dimension Diagram 00 0 00 ccc cent ene eee 416 INDEX 417 REVISIONS fat ct ee ae ac ease Cees ean RNa ede cine fe A Oe oe ooh aha Se Me od 421 WARRANTY coe sees eka ea ee ye ee el ee oe epee a ee ele cee ae omy te ee 423 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation HAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTIN 7 3 Parameter Settings for a Master Station is used for window This chapter describes the parameter settings when a master iocal module is used as a master station names and items 7 3 1 Setting met od Network Parameter vindow from a programming tool The chapter of 1 shows operating the current page is shown procedures Open th W shows mouse operations is used for items in the menu bar and the project window 2 Check the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window at the top of the window for GX Works2 only 3 Input settings to the Network Parameter window Item Description Select the number of master iocal modules number of modules to be mounted on one base unit that are set using Number of Modules a programming tool Do not include the number of master local modules that are set using the dedicated instruction G P
452. quence scan time Rounded up to the nearest integer x 4 e For link scan time use the maximum value after master switching after system switching when the Redundant CPU is used when only one of the two systems is down e For sequence scan time use the minimum value after master switching after system switching when the Redundant CPU is used when only one of the two systems is down CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs related to the standby master function Link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs related to the standby master function are listed below a Link special relays SBs Link special relays SBs related to the standby master function are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers e Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB0001 5E0 b1 Forced master switching SBOOOC 5E0 b12 e Refresh instruction acknowledgement status at standby master switching SB0042 5E4 b2 e Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching SB0043 5E4 b3 e Forced master switching executable status SB0046 5E4y b6 e Master switching request acknowledgement SB005A 5E5y b10 e Master switching request complete SB005B 5E5y b11 e Forced master switching request acknowledgement SBO05C 5E5 b12 Forced master switching request complete SB005D 5E5y b13 Host standby master
453. quired to be always on d Turning on Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SB005F When Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 is selected Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SB005F does not turn on until the procedure registration is normally completed in all the stations If a faulty station exists turn off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D depending on the completion status of other stations e Initialization procedure registration for a standby master station The initial setting cannot be configured in a standby master station When replacing a remote device station while a standby master station is operating as a master station configure the initial setting on a program f When the instruction is not required The initialization procedure registration instruction may not be required under some situations such as when the remote input RX is set as a condition device 156 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs related to the remote device station initialization procedure registration a Link special relays SBs Link special relays SBs related to the remote device station initialization procedure registration are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers e Remote device station initialization
454. r ar O O Mitsubishi representative A The logs were deleted during Status logging flash Stop the data link then delete the B322 shee data link with RAM Flash O O ROM deletion invalid logs ROM selected Although the logs had been set to be deleted with RAM Flash SAE Status logging flash Delete the logs again with RAM B323 i ROM selected logging was O ROM deletion failed Flash ROM selected started while the logs have not yet been deleted Delete the logs with RAM Flash f Logs were tried to be stored on Status logging flash ROM selected then start logging B324 the flash ROM although the flash O O ROM storage error or start logging with RAM ROM was not ready for storage selected The cumulative number of times Start logging with RAM selected B325 Status logging flash that logs are stored on the flash To execute logging with RAM ROM error ROM has exceeded 100 000 Flash ROM selected replace the O O times module In the station information Sa b E parameter a number other than B384 ation number seng 41 to 404 is set for the station Set the number within 14 to 40y O x error parameter i number including the station numbers of occupied stations The total number of occupied Total number of stations set in the station B385 stations error d Set the value to 64 or less x information parameter has parameter exceeded 64 Number of occupied In the stati
455. r 1 M when the Nit standby master 4 h 1 y master oma z 1 station is 1 Control program when the standby master operation is operating I operating local station operation j Local station operatin SM400 x i peranna RST M10 a MCR N1 END 148 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 After saving the link devices wait a fixed number of scans and execute the processing that sets the link devices saved at master switching and Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB0001 For details refer to Page 143 Section 8 2 5 5 e When the right of controlling data link is compulsorily transferred from the standby master station to the master station In the program example in Page 148 Section 8 2 5 7 d change the sections in the dotted lines and as follows Program M10 z 1 H i Control program when the master station is operating ontrol start relay when the master station is operating M200 SB46 H SET SBOC J Forced Forced Forced master master master switching switching switching request executable status MCR NO Program i Control program when the standby master station is operating c as a local station ontrol start relay when the standby master station is operating SB5D 1 RST SB0C Forced For
456. r of the station selected in the station list area another station Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information Station No Number of Occupied Stations 2 Station Type Local Station or Intelligent Device Station Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Connecting Module PLC Comment 1 2 Intell ST Selected Station Error Information Displays error information of the station selected in the station list area Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information By double clicking each error shown below the details and corrective actions can be displayed lt lt lt _ _ _ __ _ Related Functions gt gt Displays or hides the related function icons For details on the related functions refer to the following Loop Test Page 86 Section 6 5 1 1 Page 90 Section 6 5 2 1 Status Logging gt Page 315 Section 11 4 3 e Create Check Sheet gt Page 318 Section 11 4 4 e Start Data Link Stop Data Link _ gt Page 320 Section 11 4 5 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Item Description Displays the explanation of icons on the diagnostics window r Station Type A Master station or standby master station ER Remote device station or remote I O station iLocal station or intelligent device station et i Remote device station bridge
457. r n d edie dale es eae hls nd eal Seana wet ae teats 86 6 5 2 Transmission speed test 2 2 2 0002 c teen eee eee 90 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 93 7 4 Parameter Setting Method 0 0 cc ccc ccc 93 7 2 Parameter Setting List 0 0 0 cnet nents 94 7 3 Parameter Settings for a Master Station naasar aneen cece eee eee 96 TSt Setting method 2 4 ecad csaihe eStore Se hae vee Sn ted wedi de dt hae erat 96 3 2 Setting detailsci esanhhn dk Sees Be iana e ee dah ods Be Plat AG oh Sede Bs Daas 97 7 4 Parameter Settings for a Local Station and Standby Master Station 114 TAA Setting Method sos ok oc a ae Orie deat ene Mat ike beled Pa CARE a 114 4 2 Setting details n ieia nee ee Se Sia bee ae ed eh ae dit oh tes taal 115 7 5 Status Difference Between a Master Station and a Slave Station at an Error 121 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 125 8 1 Basic Applications of the Functions 0 000 eens 125 8 1 1 Periodic communications cyclic transmission 000 0000 cece eee eee 125 8 1 2 Non periodic communications transient transmission 000000e ee eeee 127 8 2 Improving the System Reliability onnon ananuna aaan eee teen es 128 8 2 1 Slave station cut off and automatic return 2 2 eee 128 8 2 2 Setting of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master Station be a Ae ah belt ehh oe baal a otadbtanetadaiead 130
458. r purposes Address Hexadecimal Item Reference Decimal 4000 to 41FF4 16384 to 16895 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX Page 341 Appendix 2 4200 to 43FFy 16896 to 17407 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY 10 4400y to 4BFFy 17408 to 19455 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw Page 342 Appendix 2 4C00 to 53FFy 19456 to 21503 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr 11 49 50 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 L gt Page 335 Appendix 2 4 Point Local station Data stored in RX RY RWr and RWw in the local station side are stored in a remote net Ver 1 mode area when the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode and the local station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode Page 47 Section 3 6 3 2 Four points are occupied per station for RWr and RWr in a remote I O station Buffer memory areas do not move over 4 Precautions a When changed from the remote net Ver 1 mode In the remote net Ver 2 mode zero points are assigned to RWr and RWw in a remote I O station Buffer memory areas move over The assignment of the station numbers for stations after the remote I O
459. r station G P RLPASET data link Section 9 8 Performs a message transmission to a remote device station Remote device f Page 221 G P RDMSG Available for remote device stations that support the message j station ee Section 9 9 transmission function Point Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed 173 SuOI Nedelg pue s d ajqeorddy suononssu pelesipeg Jo 1s 16 2 Applicable devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal device Bit Word X Y M L F V B T ST C D W R ZR K H File register Constant a Bit specification of word device can be performed as bit data Bit specification of word device can be performed by specifying Word device Bit No Bit No must be specified in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is specified as DO A Note that the bit specification cannot be performed for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C 3 Precautions a Use of Monitoring time setting SW0009 and Dedicated instruction retry count setting SW000B If dedicated instructions are abnormally ended due to noise increase the monitoring time and retry count to avoid it Configure the settings using Monitoring time setting SWO0009
460. ransmission M B701 to B704 fail Transient transmission failed If the same error persists after O O ailure taking the above action please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Please consult your local B705 and B706 System error ee O Oo Mitsubishi representative Too many transient requests Wait for a while and send the Transient request B771 were sent to the corresponding request again overload due to O O overload error station many transient requests Please consult your local B772 and B773 System error P O O Mitsubishi representative The target station was not an Check if the target station is an B774 Transient request error f j O O intelligent device station intelligent device station Unsupported transient data was Check the application of the B775 to B777 Transient type error O O received request source A response has not been Check modules and cables at the B778 Response timeout received from the request ie O O asic request destination destination Please consult your local B779 System error oe O Oo Mitsubishi representative Transient transmission was Module mode setting performed although the I O mode Set the intelligent mode for the B780 O O error had been set for the target target station station Please consult your local B781 System error O O Mitsubishi representative 302 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
461. re refreshed in the END process of a CPU module Blank or the following range e Device X M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote O station e Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range e Device M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range e Device M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station e Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw When Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw Ver 2 compatible area of a master local module are transferred 1 Number of refresh points All points for the start station number to last station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station are automatically assigned
462. remote I O station Default Blank Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting The settings are not required when a master local module is used as a local station or standby master station Except when Master Station Duplex Function is selected for Type Interrupt Settings Set the conditions used to issue a request for the interrupt to a CPU module L gt Page 119 Section 7 4 2 2 4 The operations when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP vary depending on whether Y or the devices other than Y is set to Remote Output RY _ gt Page 133 Section 8 2 4 117 sjieyep Bunjes Zy uonels Jejsey Aqpueis pue uonejs e907 104 sbunjes sejoweleg YZ 1 Operation setting Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter 2 gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button Operation ing Parameter Name m Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Staton 1 v Data Link Faulty Station Setting Expanded Cydic Setting Single z I Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station Clears Compulsorily Enable Setting Cancel Item Description Setting range Parameter Name Set the name of the setting if needed This item is
463. rm for the QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V and Q24DHCCPU LS A generic term for the QO3UDVCPU QO3UDECPU QO04UDVCPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDVCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU A generic term for the Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Gere Universal model QCPU QnACPU A generic term for the following CPU modules Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU RAS The abbreviation for Reliability Availability and Serviceability This term refers to usability of automated equipment Remote input RX Bit data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction Remote output RY Bit data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction Remote register RWr Word data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction Remote register RWw Word data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction Link special relay SB Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of modules on the master and loca
464. ruple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Quadruple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying four stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Quadruple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying one station with the expanded cyclic setting of Octuple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying two stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Octuple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Octuple Number of Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying four stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Octuple Condition 4 16 x A 54 x B 88 x C lt 2304 QO 8 Number of remote 1 0 stations lt 64 Number of remote device stations lt 42 Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 28 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 10 This section describes how transmission speed and a cable length are related when a system is configured with products of CC Link Ver 1 10 or later and Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables Configure a CC Link system that satisfies the following conditions
465. s Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal A station station While the standby master station was operating as a master station by the master station Undo the network parameter B3A4 Parameter mismatch O x duplex function the network setting of the master station parameter setting of the faulty master station was changed The mode set in the control data of the G P RLPASET instruction Invalid mode f Correct the control data or the B3A5 differs from that set using the l O x parameter i f switch 3 setting switch 3 of the intelligent function module switch setting Please consult your local B3F1 to B3F3 System error m a O x Mitsubishi representative The parameter setting was Change the parameter after all Parameter setting B401 changed during transient transient requests are completed O O change error a request or before the request is issued Increase the monitoring time A response is not received from value B404 Response error the request destination station If the error persists check the O O within the monitoring time modules and cables at the destination A transient request was issued to f Set a local station or an intelligent a remote I O station or a remote device station as the target device station A B405 Transient request error f station Or wait for a while and O O Or too many transient requests send the request again overload were sent to the corresp
466. s In Module Setting select CC Link Then select the module number what number module or I O Address start I O number of the module to be monitored Network Test Stops and restarts data link gt Page 405 Appendix 7 6 402 APPENDICES 2 Other stations monitoring How to monitor the status of a slave station is described below 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window XW Diagnostics gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master local module to be monitored in Module No or I O Address Click the Start Monitoring button Click the Monitoring other station button to monitor the status of the slave station Aa amp CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For current cursor station Start Horitering Stop Monitoring Close sonsouBbelp jurT 09 Z xipueddy Jedojaaeq X9 Bulsn u yM z xipueddy 403 3 Line test Whether a CC Link dedicated cable is properly connected and data link can be performed with slave stations can be checked 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window W Diagnostics gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master station to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Start Monitoring button 4 Click the Loop Test b
467. s are removed or mounted without turning off the power normal data transmission is not guaranteed 15 6 2 Wiring This section describes how to connect a CC Link dedicated cable to the master local module 6 2 1 Preparation before wiring Before wiring check the cables and terminating resistors to be used 1 Cables that can be used The following cables can be used e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable e CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible e CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible These cables cannot be used together If used normal data transmission is not guaranteed 2 The order of connecting the cables The cables do not have to be connected in the order of station number 3 Terminating resistors to be used Connect the terminating resistors included with the modules at both ends of the modules in the CC Link system The terminating resistors to be used vary depending on the cable Cable type Terminating resistor to be used Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible 110Q 1 2W Brown Brown Brown CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 1309 1 2W Brown Orange Brown compatible When the A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is used as a master station in a T branch system configuration the terminating resistors included with the master local module cannot be used gt Page 79 Section 6 2 3 1
468. s not support this function 3 This function cannot be used when a module is mounted on the main base unit of a Redundant CPU 4 A QOOJCPU and QOOUJCPU do not support a multiple CPU system 398 APPENDICES 2 Availability of added functions of a CPU module master local module and programming tool depending on the version x Not supported Not subject to the version First 5 digits of the serial No Applicable programming tool version GX Works2 Added function of a master local module GX Developer Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode mA Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPU is set to STOP Remote I O station points setting Number of connectable modules 5 to 8 2 1 15R or later 8 03D or later 4 8 03D or later 8 03D or later 8 32J or later Redundant CPU 06052 or later 1 87R or later 8 18U or later Mounting a module on the extension base unit of a Redundant CPU Standby master station data link start function using a standby master station 06052 or later 07112 or later 1 87R or later 8 45X or later Block data assurance per station 08032 or later 1 15R or later 8 32J or later Specification of remote device station to be initialized Retry count setting when dedicated instructions are used 08032 or later 08102 or later Master stati
469. s stopped in the entire system 1 Operation method Data link can be stopped or restarted using one of the following methods e CC Link diagnostics gt Page 320 Section 11 4 5 e Link special relays SBs or link special registers SWs Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers Item Link special relay SB and link special register SW to be used Data link stop SB0002 5E0 b2 Data link stop acceptance SB0044 5E4 b4 e Data link stop complete SB0045 5E4 b5 Data link stop result SW0045 6454 Data link stop Data link restart SBO000 5E0 b0 Data link restart acceptance SB0040 5E4 b0 Data link restart complete SB0041 5E4 b1 Data link restart result SW0041 6414 Data link restart ye sex dojs yul eed ges suoljoun 3y Jo suonealddy jasn 8 169 8 3 9 Remote I O station points setting remote net Ver 2 mode only When the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode the number of refresh points with a remote I O station can be selected from 8 points 16 points and 32 points Changing the number of points can save the areas of the refresh devices in a CPU module In modes other than the remote net Ver 2 mode only 32 points per station can be selected The remote I O station points setting is Remote I O station Station No 2 the number of occupied stations 1 Y07 to YOO Remote I O station Station
470. s the time between the device of a CPU module turning on off and the output of a remote device station turning on off or between data set in the device of a CPU module and the data in a remote device station changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rd SM x n LS x 1 Rd SM LS x 1 Rd SM x n LS x 1 Rd Max value SM x n LS x 2 Rd SM x n LS x 2 Rd SM LS x 2 Rd SM x n LS x 2 Rd Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote device station processing time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 1 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 1 1 5 20 3 x 1 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 1 1 5 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 Max value 27 5
471. served station is stored SW0074 0 A station other than a reserved station 674p 1 Reserved station sw0075 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi b SW0074 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 6754 Reserved SW0075 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 station specified Oo x swo076 status SW0076 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 676p SW0077 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW0077 Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 6774 The station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted 355 SMS s13 s1691 jeloeds yur Z E xIpueddy SMS suajsiBey jeloeds Ju 7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a station has been set as an error invalid station is stored SW0078 0 A station other than an error invalid station 678p 1 Error invalid station swo079 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 bO Swo078 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 6794 Error invalid station specified Swo079 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 oO O SW007A status SWOO7A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 67Ay SWO007B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW007B Only the bit corresponding to the start station number t
472. setting do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 and 603 to 607p ZSHOM XO Buist sosoubelq 4UIT DO Y uOH e S pijeau Joa Aesoduwa e Buljsoues pue Hues 97 321 1 1 4 7 Hardware information The operating status and setting status of the master local module are displayed 1 Operating procedure 1 Open the System Monitor window XW Diagnostics gt System Monitor 2 Select a master local module in the System Monitor window 3 Click the LHW Information button H W Information 2 Display contents a Product Information The function version and serial number of the module are displayed as shown below 100320000000000 B Function version B Serial No First 5 digits 322 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING b H W LED Information The following table lists data link status displayed under H W LED Information Item Description RUN 1 Operating normally 0 A hardware failure or a watchdog timer error has occurred ERR 1 A communication failure has occurred in all stations Changes between 0 and 1 A communication failure has occurred in a station MST 1 The master local module is operating as a master station S MST 1 The master local module is operating as a standby master station in standby status LOCAL 1 The master local module is operating as a local station
473. setting the CPU module or powering off and on the system reflects the settings e When the settings are configured using dedicated instructions executing the dedicated instructions reflects the settings Note that the master station sends data only to a station where data link has been started The master station does not send data to a station where data link is not being performed 126 8 1 2 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Non periodic communications transient transmission In transient transmission data can be communicated when a request is issued unlike periodic communications cyclic transmission Direct access to the buffer memory and device in other stations can be performed in transient transmission CPU module Command H Hinstucion Device 1234H Master station 1 Communication method Write request Bu Local station CPU module Device 1234H The dedicated instructions of the master local module are used for communications gt Page 173 CHAPTER 9 127 UOISSIWSUEJ JUSISULJ SUOIEDIUNWWOD DIPOIed UON Z S suo ouny au Jo suoneoyddy siseg 1 98 8 2 Improving the System Reliability This section describes how to improve the CC Link system reliability using the functions 8 2 1 Slave station cut off and automatic return The slave station cut off function disconnects a slave station that cannot perform data link due to
474. settings have been configured using a programming tool the data is cleared when Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set When Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY in the local station that has stopped only the remote output RY in the stopped local station is cleared The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set Data link is continued for the other local stations CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 8 Functions 8 1 Basic Applications of the Functions 8 1 1 Periodic communications cyclic transmission A master local module communicates with other stations periodically using RX RY RWr and RWw For example controlling the input and output in the CPU module of a master station controls the input and output in a slave station 1 Overview of communications In CC Link communications are performed between the master station and slave stations using RX RY RWr and RWw Data in RX RY RWr and RWw of the master local module are stored in the buffer memory For assignment and a flow of input output data refer to Page 41 Section 3 6 Remote I O station 1 CPU Master Remote device station CPU Intelligent device station Station No 1 1 Station No 2 a Buffer a memory Device RX RWr namahnnnnnnnnnnnp Station No 1
475. sing to the device in a CPU module Device contents Name Rerin DB Unit Access code AEE Bit Word code Input relay X O Hexadecimal 014 Output relay Y Hexadecimal 024 Internal relay M O Decimal 03H Latch relay L 8 Decimal 834 Link relay B O Hexadecimal 234 Timer contact T O Decimal 09H Timer coil T O Decimal OAH Timer present value T Oo Decimal OCH Retentive timer contact ST Oo Decimal 89H Retentive timer coil ST O Decimal 8Ay Retentive timer present value ST O Decimal 8Cy 054 Counter contact Cc O Decimal 11H Counter coil C O Decimal 124 Counter present value C O Decimal 144 Data register D O Decimal 044 Link register W O Hexadecimal 244 File register R O Decimal 844 Link special relay SB Oo Hexadecimal 63H Link special register SW O Hexadecimal 64H Special relay SM O Decimal 434 Special register SD O Decimal 444 Devices other than above cannot be accessed e When accessing a bit device specify it as O or multiples of 16 e The extended data register of address D65536 or later and the extended link register of address W10000 or later cannot be specified 177 auyly d S 76 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIRD instruction Master station Target station
476. specified S ON Specified The set station number is stored in a SB0075 Error invalid station SW0078 to SW007B 2 5E7y b5 specified status 9 a o Depending on the link refresh timing SB0075 may be T updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Error invalid station specified status SW0078 to SW007B 347 Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a temporary error invalid station has been set is stored OFF Not set Temporary ettor ON Set The set station number is stored in SW007C to SB0076 i SWO07F 5E7y b6 ae Station setting O O x information P Depending on the link refresh timing SB0076 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Temporary error invalid status SW007C to SW007F Whether parameters have been received from the master SB0077 Parameter receive station is stored 7 5E7y 67 status OFF Received O ON Not received Whether the setting of setting switches of the host station SB0078 Host station switch during data link has been changed is detected 5E7 b8 change detection OFF No change O O ON Changed Whether Master Station or Master Station Duplex SB0079 Master station return Function has been set in Type in the network 5E7y b9 specification parameter Window is stored O x x information OFF M
477. splay Format eS Displays the description of the error code HEX Reduce the number of master stations on the same line to one selected under Error History and the Alternatively check the line status pec corrective action for the error The error history is gt an old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor 290 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Checking in the Error History window This window lists errors including those that have occurred in other modules and the error logs can be output in a CSV file Even after the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off and on error codes and date and time of errors can be displayed O Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt System Error History button Error History Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection Lis8 System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below None Error History List Clear Refine Criteria _ Enter Refine Criteria Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 10 10 Error Code Notation pec HEX Model Name QJ61BT11N No Error Code Model Name 20 5 QU618T11N 0640 QOZUCPU 0640 2011 10 18 1 QozucPU B404 2011 10 18 14 12 02 QJS1BT11N 0640 2011 10 18 14 11 39 QozucPu 0640 2011 10 18 14 09 02 QozucPu 0640 2011 10 18 14 08 49 QOZUCPU 0640 2011 10 18 14 07 58 QozuCPU 0640 2011 10 18 14 03 51 QozucPu 0640
478. ss the correct buffer Note that the number of f memory area in the points of 8 point or 16 point Is the correct buffer memory Lo corresponding station I O modules per station is 32 area read written RX RY Set the devices so that they points fixed except the SB and SW do not overlap with ones case when the remote I O i kay used in programs and in station points setting is f other networks configured Check if the bit Isn t a station to which a corresponding to the faulty Parameter reading writing cannot be ab Cancel the reserved station C1 2 tsi station is not 1 in Reserved setting performed specified as a p setting station specified status reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 Is Refresh instruction when Check if Refresh instruction Turn on Refresh instruction Data cannot be f o tutfon C21 Refresh changing parameters by the when changing parameters when changing parameters utput fr p instruction dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction RY SB0003 on SB0003 is on SB0003 284 2 Problems due to cyclic data error in a remote device station CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action F Set the devices so that they Has the auto refresh been Check if no device overlaps do not overlap with ones correctly set
479. st five digits of serial No must be 10032 or later This instruction is available for remote device stations that support the message transmission function Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RDMSG G RDMSG Un S1 S2 D1 D2 Command GP RDMSG errowsc un 69 62 03 Ho Applicable device r Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device e i 2 File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO unco Bit Word Bit Word K H S1 O S2 O D1 O D2 O 1 Setting data gt 3 Device Description Setting range Data type py Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written Pe Ky Un o 0 to FE 16 bit binary 9 with three digits oo Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored z n specified device x Within the range of the S2 2 Start number of the device that stores data to be sent E Device name specified device P Within the range of the D1 2 Start number of the device that stores received data specified device D2 Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of reading Within the range of the Bit i D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 4 The local device and the file register of
480. st station SB0002 ipa g oi if does aa to the master station x SEO b2 ata link stop e entire system will stop O O OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Refresh instruction Refresh cyclic data after parameter setting is changed by SB0003 when changing the G P RLPASET instruction x 5E0p b3 parameters by the OFF Not instructed refresh stopped O O dedicated instruction ON Instructed refresh started continued Determine the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 SB0004 Temporary error as a temporary error invalid station E E 5E0p b4 invalid request OFF Not requested O ON Requested Cancel the temporary error invalid station setting SB0005 Temporary error configured for the stations specified by SW0003 to SEO b5 invalid canceling Swo007 O x x request OFF Not requested ON Requested 343 sqs sAejai jeloads yu Le xipueddy SMS suajsiBay jeloeds yul7 pue sgs shejey elseds yu xIpueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station SB0007 j n kami Peg duplication error 7 x x 5E0 b7 up ica ion error Not instructe O canceling request ON Instructed SB0008 Execute a line test to the station specified by SW0008 5E0 b8 Line test request OFF Not requested O x x ON Requested Execute a transmission speed test SB000B Transmission speed es aa i i nee vee P i Not reque 5E04
481. station changes therefore change the program if required 3 6 5 Remote net additional mode CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This mode is selected when a Ver 2 compatible slave station is added to an existing Ver 1 system and cyclic points are expanded Unlike the remote net Ver 2 mode RX RY RWr and RWw in a Ver 1 compatible slave station are stored into buffer memory for the Ver 1 same buffer memory addresses therefore a program in the remote net Ver 1 mode can be used Master station Remote net additional mode Remote device station Intelligent device station Ver 1 compatible Remote I O station Ver 1 compatible Remote device station Intelligent device station Ver 2 compatible Local station Remote net additional mode ert tc cee eee 2m i 2m 2m Taan F Station No 0 y Station No 1 4 1 Station No 2 1 Station No 3 q Station No 4 1 Ver 1 compatible RX 1 i RX i I RX Ver 1 compatible i area i Ra geof 1 d i i area 1 Station oad the station E EEAEIE E CELEEECEELEEIE ELLE Ste tee ee eens i 1 Station No 1 1 No 1 l i r l 1 No 1 i gt sending data Range of d q 1 i No 2 2 No 2 i e ei No 2 i 1 i i 1 cule K a e1 RY d 1 RY 1 1 RY i 1 I 1 to 1 Range of the master q i
482. station setting information SB0062 5E6y b2 Master station information SB0070 5E7y bO Standby master station information SB0071 5E7 b1 Master station return specification information SB0079 5E74 b9 Host master standby master operation status SBO07B 5E7 b11 b Link special registers SWs Link special registers SWs related to the standby master function are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses e Refresh instruction at standby master switching result SW0043 6434 e Forced master switching instruction result SWO05D 65D e Standby master station number SW0073 6731 uonouny saysew Aqpueys S Z g Aygeiiey wejsks y Bulroidu 7g 145 146 c ON OFF timing of link special relays SBs related to the standby master function The following figure shows the ON OFF timing of link special relays SBs related to the standby master function ON Master station information sB0070 OFF ON Host master standby master operation status SB007B Master switching request acknowledgement SBOO5A OFF OFF ON ON Master switching request complete SB005B _OFF Refresh instruction at standby master switching ON Program operation SB0001 Refresh instruction acknowledgement status ON at standby master switching B0042 OFF Refresh instruction complete status ON at standby master switching SB0043 4 When turning on Master switching request acknowled
483. stations 1 expanded cyclic setting single Local station Station No 2 the number of occupied stations 1 expanded Master station cyclic setting quadruple Address Remote register RWw Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Address 4400 i Rwo Ni i Rwo Nii RWwo 4C00H For station 4401H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 4C01H For station No 1 44024 l RWww2 io Rww2 ooN 4 RWr2 sid 4CO2H No 1 4403H sd Rw3 od st RWw3 6o ci dy RW 3 o 4C03H 4404 Rwy Poe E RWr4 e 4C04H i 4405H l RW 5 ff RWr5 e 4C05H 4406H l RWw 6 E E RWr 4C06H 4407H RWw 7 RWr 7 4C07H 4408H l RWw 8 ff d RWr8 4C08H 44091 RWw9 ff E RWrQ 4CO9H 440AH Rwa fp RWrA 4COAH i For station 440BH RWw B RWr B ACOBH _ For station No 2 440CH RWwC ff E RW C 4COCH No 2 440DH RWD tf 8 8 E RWrD 4CODH 440EH l RW E O f aaa RWrE e 4COEH 440FH RWw F RWr F 4COFH 4410n l RWD ff 8 SE RWr10 4C10H 44H RWwtt ff RWr11 4C11H i 4442 RWw12 E RW12 O 4C12H 4413H RWw 13 RWr 13 4C13H to to to to 4BFCH 1 RWw7FC _RWr7FC O 53FCH 4BFDH RWw7FD __ RWr7FD 53FDH 4BFEH RWw 7FE RWr 7FE 53FEH 4BFFH l RWw7FF RW7FF O 53FFH 342 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Link Special Relays SBs and Link Special Registers SWs Data link status is indicated by bit data link special relays SBs and word data link special regist
484. ster station is off 222 005 269 TX Speed ace keel abet e ba Rhea 104 TYPE aala 3 AeA aiaa E A arate TR 98 Types of the standby master function 135 Universal model QCPU 200005 14 Upgrading the functions 397 V Solderless terminal aaa 78 Upon a momentary power failure of a remote station 72 Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 76 Ver 1 compatible slave station 13 Ver 2 Remote Input RX 220005 99 Ver 2 Remote Output RY 20005 99 Ver 2 Remote Register RWr 0 99 Ver 2 Remote Register RWw 99 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX 341 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY 341 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr 342 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw 342 Ver 2 compatible slave station 13 Versi n sse Rieck ld Ravens MEW ohh Aia 105 399 Ww Weight sacd siete Hotes GMa oe Oo Sen dea 25 WINGS beck chee Ser arias Sad ged edo bees 76 Wiring diagram 0 0c ee eee ee 77 Wiring procedure 0 eee eee 77 420 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date May 2003 SH NA 080394E A First edition May 2004 SH NA 080394E B Addition Appendix 6 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Chapter 4 S
485. switch are enabled by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system 23 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications functions I O signals buffer memory remote I O RX and RY and remote register RWr and RWw of the master local module 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the master local module refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection 3 2 Performance Specifications Item Specifications Transmission speed Selected from 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps and 10Mbps Maximum number of connected modules master station 64 Page 27 Section 3 2 1 Number of occupied stations local station 1 to 4 stations The number of stations can be changed using a programming tool e Remote I O RX RY 2048 points e Remote register RWw 256 points master station gt remote device station local CC Link Ver 1 station intelligent device station standby master station e Remote register RWr 256 points remote device station local station intelligent device Maximum number of station standby master station master station link points per system e Remote I O RX RY 8192 points Remote register RWw 2048 points master station gt remote device station local CC Link Ver 2 station intelligent device station standby master station e
486. t local station and specification error transmission software version PERN Set a value within 1 to 100 for Number of data points The number of data points is ne B805 writing or within 1 to 160 for O error outside the range reading The start device number is Set the start device number within outside the range Or the address the range Or set the address in B807 Device number error S O O was not multiples of 16 when the multiples of 16 when the bit bit device was accessed device is accessed Please consult your local B80A System error ae f O O Mitsubishi representative The set combination of the Set the number of points to be address and the number of points ae B80D Setting range error processed within the device O O has exceeded the processable range range Please consult your local B80F to B812 System error A a O O Mitsubishi representative File register capacity The file register capacity is not B814 Set the capacity O O setting error set Transient transmission was Module mode setting performed although the I O mode Set the intelligent mode for the B815 O O error had been set for the target target station station B817 Please consult your local ____________ System error ae O O B821 and B822 Mitsubishi representative Remote control mode The mode setting of the remote A B823 ae Check the setting O O error control is incorrect B824 Please consult your local
487. ta such as setting values and monitored values for communication with a CPU module Buffer memory address An address that indicates the storage location of data assigned to the buffer memory in an intelligent function module Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer Process CPU A generic term for the QOD2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Basic model QCPU A generic term for the QOOJCPU QOOCPU and Q01CPU Master local module The abbreviation for the QJ61BT11N CC Link system master local module Master station A station that controls the entire system This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with all stations Only one master station can be used in a system Message transmission A function to communicate data between a master station and slave stations when the model names of slave stations are read the data are backed up restored or the dedicated instructions are requested 13 Term Description Universal model QCPU A generic term for the following CPU modules QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO02UCPU QO03UDCPU QO3UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDHCPU QO6UDVCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU High speed Universal model QCPU A generic term for the QO3UDVCPU QO4UDVCPU QO6U
488. ta link Data link error in all i B307 epee error has occurred in all stations returns to normal then issue the O O ati Data link restart SB0000 request again e Data link stop SBO002 Station number setting f A slave station number is outside oa B308 error installation Set the number within 1 to 64 O x of 1 to 64 status The station number of the connected module is already in B309 Station number use including the station Check the station number of the o E already in use error numbers of occupied stations corresponding modules and excluding the start station number The station type differs between the mounted modules and parameter settings Connected Parameter Correct the parameter module setting Mismatch between the Remote Remote I O connected module device B30A Remote I O O status and parameter Intelligent tti device Remote serng device The mode setting is invalid in the master station local station or Set the parameter of the master standby master station station local station or standby The mode of the master station master station again and reset differs from that of the standby the CPU module master station Mismatch between the F The network parameter setting connected module B30B does not match with the Match them O x status and parameter i connected module status setting A The master station switching was Standby master station f Set the standby master station B30C a
489. ta sent from slave stations The table below lists the differences of link scan time from other modes Rough indication When transmission speed is 10Mbps pow jou O BJowWsY 9 9 E sepoy pue juswubissy 9 E Remote net Ver 1 mode Number of stations Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode 8 0 61ms 1 20ms 16 0 94ms 1 57ms 32 1 61ms 2 32ms 64 2 94ms 3 81ms 55 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications lt gt Page 24 Section 3 2 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module gt Page 97 Section 7 3 2 i Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules fr gt Boards Blank No Setting M Set 1 4 Start I O No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station X Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Mode Remote I O Net Mode X Total Module Connected 1 ee Remote Input Rx 1000 Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output R Ver 2 Remote Register RWr V
490. tal size of the automatic update buffer must be within 1000 4096 word CEy CFy 206 207 eo prohibited asoni The station number of the remote I O station where eight head io points have been set in the remote I O station points setting is remote re DO to D34 208 to 211 stored 2 station Default 0 Not set setting Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on 329 seaiy Aioway yng Z xipueddy Address Item Description Hexadecimal Decimal eae The station number of the remote I O station where 16 points paint have been set in the remote I O station points setting is remote I O eed D44 to D74 212 to 215 stored 1 station Default 0 Not set setting Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on 0 point The station number of the reserved station where 0 points reserved i 1 D8 to DB 216 to 219 i have been set is stored station Default 0 Not set setting Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on Use DC to DFy 220 to 223 sa gt prohibited 330 i This buffer memory area is used in the remote net Ver 2 mode 2 When 8 Points 8 Points Reserved has been set the station number is stored in both eight point remote I O station setting and 16 point remote I O station setting 2 Remote input RX and remote output RY APPENDICES This area is used when the remote net Ver 1 mode remote net additi
491. tartup and Maintenance Precautions A WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODU
492. tation No 2 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 Station E g gt No 2 sending data No 2 So a RS erm ge StationNo 1 StationNo 2 i q I Ver 1 compatible 1 i RX area Range of 1 eecueeduen the station T 1 Station i No 1 No 1 1 sending data Range of i R eee the station Station 1 1 1 Station m No 3 RY Station No 1 1 i L Petey ecccccucneccccinn i 1 1 i L i PO RA PRA Station No 2 S a O Range of the station No 1 sending data Station Station Station No 3 RWw RWw Station Station No 1 No 1 Station No 2 Range of the station No 3 sending data p gt Data sent from the master station Area where data 15 sent to other stations gt Data sent from slave stations The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station 2 A remote I O station does not have RWr or RWw However areas in RWr and RWw of the master station and a local station are occupied for the number of points of a remote I O station When areas in RWr and RWw should not be occupied use the remote net Ver 2 mode 3 Page 48 Section 3 6 4 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications lt gt Page 24 Sectio
493. tation Station number 1 0 g Intelligent device station Controlling Remote device station Station number 4 Station number 2 _ The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 2 T Ne c o aor g ooo 9 mnnn EEE O00 000000000 Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic tra nission The standby master station in the normal state returns to the system operation gt The standby master station is on standby in case of the master station failure Standby master station Station number 1 Master station Intelligent device station The number of occupied stations 1 Controlling Remote device station Station number 4 Standby status Station number 2 _ The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 2 sararem o ooo onnon zg OOOO O00000 000 OOO OOQO0000000 Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission 2 When the master station returns as a standby master station the station number of the master station becomes the number set in Standby Master Station No of the ne
494. tatus of the host station Host station operation status SBOOG6E has the same functionality Use either of Xn1 or SBOOGE for programming Note that the on off conditions of Xn1 are the opposite to those of SBOOGE The conditions of Xn1 are as follows OFF Data link stopped ON During data link Other station data link status Xn3 This signal indicates the data link status of other stations remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Other station data link status SB0080 has the same functionality Use either of Xn3 or SB0080 for programming OFF All stations normal ON A faulty station exists The status of the faulty station is stored in SW0080 to SW0083 Point It takes maximum of six seconds for Other station data link status Xn3 to turn on after a slave station connected to the master station or local station becomes faulty The time until this signal turns on differs depending on the system configuration and error status APPENDICES 4 Module ready XnF This signal indicates whether the module is ready for operation When the module becomes ready this signal turns on This signal turns off under either condition An error has been detected in the switch setting of the module e Module error XnO turns on Power on Module ready XnF Module error Xn0 sjeubls O I JO uonduos q xIpueddy 327 Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Areas This
495. te I O Automatic Reconnection Station Count oO x Net Mode is set to Mode 94 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Necessity of a setting Local station Item f Remark Master station standby master station e It is automatically input when the standby master station is set in the CC Link Standby Master Station No A x configuration window e The setting is not required when Remote I O Net Mode is set to Mode PLC Down Select O x Scan Mode Setting O x Delay Time Setting O The settings are not required when Remote I O Station Information Setting O x Net Mode is set to Mode oo aes Select it when graphically configuring Station Set the station information in the CC Link i f A x Information Setting by referring to the network configuration window map display area for GX Works2 only 7 The setting is not required when Remote I O Remote Device Station Initial Setting A x Net Mode is set to Mode Interrupt Settings A A 95 s17 Bunjeg Jojowereg ZZ 7 3 Parameter Settings for a Master Station This chapter describes the parameter settings when a master local module is used as a master station 7 3 1 Setting method 1 Open the Network Parameter window from a programming tool Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt CC Link 1 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 _ Boar
496. ted is stored 6494 specification 0 Normal completion O x result Values other than 0 Error code gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 Temporary error Whether the temporary error invalid station setting has been normally SW004B invalid station canceled is stored x x 64By specification 0 Normal completion O cancel result Values other than 0 Error code lt _ 3 Page 293 Section 11 3 2 The result of a line test is stored Sw004D 64D Line test result 0 Normal o 7 x H Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 352 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station The result of system configuration check when a station has been added SWO Automatic CC to a system and the system has started using the automatic CC Link Link startup startup is stored o x 6524 l execution result 0 Normal Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 Whether a master station duplication error canceling request has been SW0057 Master stanon normally completed is stored 65714 duplication error 0 Normal completion O i i canceling result Values other than 0 Error code lt _ 3 Page 293 Section 11 3 2 The details of the LED display status are stored 0 OFF 1 ON b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 LINE ERROR A cable is disc
497. telligent device station single 6H 0 to Fy m Ver 2 compatible remote device station double 84 Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station double 94 Ver 2 compatible remote device station quadruple Bu Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station quadruple Cy Ver 2 compatible remote device station octuple Eu Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station octuple Fy 4 Configure settings as many number as the one set for the total module connected of the control data 2 Select the intelligent device station for a local station or standby master station 3 Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end 207 c Reserved station specification data Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Specify reserved stations 2 0 Not specified 1 Specified 3 0 Specification of b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO o 1 to 64 S3 0 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 eee S3 3 stations i S3 1 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 S3 2 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 S3 3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Default value is 0 Not specified for all stations A Configure settings for station numbers up to the largest one set for the slave station setting data 2 Set the start station number of the module only for a slave station that occupies two or more stations
498. tely from noise system aA Take noise reduction Reduce the transmission speed f measures and check if the frequency of Re Reduce the occurrence of noise is reduced eSa transmission speed Start the faulty station Check if the faulty station Has the faulty station started f in the procedure A4 4 Startup normally starts in a different in the correct procedure described in the procedure manual for the station Repair or replace the Failure of a slave Do slave stations normally Replace modules on the faulty A4 5 module on the faulty station operate station and check for operation station Check if the standby master a Reboot the system so Isn t the standby master station is not set as a station Standby master f that the master station A4 6 station controlling the data controlling the data link by the station link CC Link diagnostics of the master station will control the data link 281 UONE S SARIS e JO UONOBUUODSIP 0 Np SWA GOld L Z LL SWI GOld JO SSI ZL 2 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station when the CC Link system has already operated Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Remove the error I User s manual Check the error code of the CPU for the CPU module module used hardware design maintenance and inspection Take corrective action Does the CPU modul
499. tem configuration the standby master station is set to the last station number Change the number corresponding to the actual system configuration 6 When the setting is completed close the CC Link configuration window CC Link Configuration gt Close with Reflecting the Setting Point When the station number is empty the following items are displayed as Station Type Remote I O Station e Version Ver 1 Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station 1 Expanded Cyclic Setting Single e Remote Station Points 32Points e Reserve Invalid Station Select Reserved The automatic detection of connected devices cannot be executed on the station that has switched from a standby master station to a master station To execute the automatic detection of connected devices follow the procedure below 1 Turn off a master station and standby master station 2 Turn on the standby master station then turn on the master station 3 Execute the automatic detection of connected devices To execute the automatic detection of connected devices after a system has been changed for example addition or modification of stations turn on the slave stations then the master station 103 sjieyep Bunjes ZE uonels 19 SeW e 104 Shunjas JoyoWeIeY Ey Select modules in Module List and drag and drop them to List of stations 1 Open the CC Link configuration window WO Project window gt Parameter lt gt Netw
500. ter selecting the item I Read Model Name of Slave Station am eee xSpeed 156kbps v Link Scan Time Approx 15 98 ms Remote Station Reserved Err Invalid Ses women ACNE cyaeseting Points STA mAr aA Se Master Station 1 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Remote Device Station Ver 1 3Occupied Station Single No Setting Remote Device Station Ver 1 3Occupied Station Single uoleys Jajsew e 10 SUYOS Z ZOL uOHe S 29149 9J0W Y e pue UONEIS 13 se e uaam g SUOHedIUNWWOD Jo ajdwexy ZOL 243 3 Open the Remote Device Station Initial Setting window to configure the setting as follows D Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Initial Setting button Initial setti ng for the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADVN Target Station No No of Registered Procedures Target Station No No of Registered Procedures 1 O Regist Procedure 9 4 O Regist Procedure 10 Regist Procedure 11 Regist Procedure _ 12 Regist Procedure 13 Regist Procedure _ 14 Regist Procedure 15 Regist Procedure 16 Initial setting for the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN el alofalalolr Clear Check End Cancel 4 Click the ameen button to open the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration window 5 Select
501. ter station check the RX RY RWr and RWw assignment of the module using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 Before turning on or off the output using a device test ensure the safety of the external device Failure to do so may break the external device or cause an accident 16 When the connection status is normal create a control program lt gt Page 228 CHAPTER 10 Write the program to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 CC Link System Configuration A CC Link system is configured with a master station remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station and local station Master station Remote I O station Buoy Terminating resistor Local station The CC Link version and the number of slave stations that can be connected vary depending on the mode of the master local module lt _ gt Page 27 Section 3 2 1 Page 43 Section 3 6 2 Master local modules of other series can be also used in a CC Link system uoneinByuod was S YUIT OD V S 69 5 2 Configuration of the System Where a Master Local Module is Mounted This section describes the MELSEC Q series system where a master local module is mounted 5 2 1 Connectable modules and the number of connectable modules 1 Connecting a master local module to a CPU module For the CPU
502. the corresponding item faulty stations disabled or does it take time G3 1 G4 1 274 2 Troubleshooting by the status logging Register the logs to the flash ROM No Delete the flash ROM data and NG CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING execute logging Is the system No in data link Yes Vv Stop data link y v Select RAM Flash ROM y Select RAM Flash ROM y Clear the logs y Restart data link Clear the logs i y Select RAM Select RAM Flash ROM gt y Start the logging y Stop the logging No There is a faulty station Check the cables and noise around the faulty station gt Check items B2 2 and B2 3 in Page 282 Section 11 2 1 2 275 Joo B5urwwebod e Buisn BupooysajqnoIl ZL LL sweyomo Buyjooysejqnos LLL 11 2 11 2 1 Lists of Problems Problems due to disconnection of a slave station 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station when a CC Link system is newly configured or the existing CC Link system is changed Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the station number correctly A1 1 Station number Check the station number setting Correct the setting set for the faulty station Are the transmission speed Tr
503. the input power supply voltage Check that the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP Check that the switch on the CPU module is not set to RESET Switch setting Use the switches on the master local module to set the station number transmission speed and mode Page 82 Section 6 3 Set the station number and transmission speed for the slave station as well Page 85 Section 6 4 gt gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 v To the next page 57 58 Powering on the system Power on the system Parameter setting Set the parameters on the master local module 1 Write the parameter settings to the CPU module Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Page 93 CHAPTER 7 Checking operation with the LED display When data link is performed normally the L RUN LED is turned on and the ERR LED is turned off L gt Page 228 CHAPTER 10 Create a control program Write the program to the CPU module Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system 4 The parameters can be set using dedicated instructions gt Page 205 Section 9 8 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 4 1 Operation Example This section describes an example of the operation until starting up the system using the procedure described in Page 57 CHAPTER 4 1 Design a system configuration The following system is used for explanation purpose Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Model name Q20UDHCPU QJ6
504. the target station is stored in the send buffer of the master station 3 Data are written to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 4 The master station turns on the remote output RY specified by S3 0 5 The station specified by S1 1 performs the process for the remote output RY 6 Upon completion of the process for the remote output RY the station specified by S1 1 turns on the remote input RX specified by S3 1 and the remote output RY specified by S3 0 is turned off Also the response indicating write completion to the master station is returned 7 The device specified by D turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RISEND instruction The G P RISEND instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D turns on CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RISEND instruction Completion device D an
505. time Apply 0 when buffer memory data in CC Link is read WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SW000B gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 1671 x 1 067 O 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms awl Bulsseoojg U1 eyeq y xIpueddy SUONONISU PeyedIpep JO aw Hulssed01g Ey xIpueddy 4 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried 381 382 e G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU QO02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO02CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 A 2 SL Local station sequence scan time Apply 0 when data is written to buffer memory in CC Link WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 gt Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB Page 351 Ap
506. tin 3 mode 2 5Mbps 100ms transmission speed 625kbps 400ms 156kbps 800ms Is the power on and is the Check power supplied to the Apply the voltage Power supply for x ae ar ya A3 3 ee applied voltage within the master station and all slave within the specified communications a specified range stations range Keep the transmission cable away from the Check if the transmission cable is power cable away from the power cable Keep a distance of 100mm or more is recommended Is the transmission cable free Check if the FG terminal is A3 4 Noise from noise grounded separately from the Ground the terminals GND terminal of the power separately system na Take noise reduction Reduce the transmission speed measures and check if the frequency of A Reduce the occurrence of noise is reduced S transmission speed F Repair or replace the Failure of the Do modules on the master Replace the modules and check if A3 5 f module on the master master station station normally operate the station normally operates sition ion Do not turn on Data link stop SB0002 S Do not write data to the Is Data link stop instruction Check if Data link stop SB0002 A3 6 Link stop refresh source device correctly executed is off of Data link stop SB0002 from multiple locations 280 To the next page CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check it
507. ting error invalid station Check Temporary error cannot be G2 1 Cancel the temporary error invalid status SW007C to i i detected invalid station setting SW007F Are station numbers Are station numbers Check the station number f Correct the station number unique unique setting Check transmission speed Set the transmission speed of the faulty station same as the master station Check if the cables are 2 Correct the wiring Can a faulty station properly wired be identified using Can a faulty station be Check if the cables are A station Other station data identified using Other grounded by the shielded Ground the shielded part becomes faulty link status SW0080 station data link status part at a certain G3 1 to SW0083 SW0080 to SW0083 transmission speed Do communications normal at a slower transmission speed e g 156kbps Do communications normal at a slower transmission speed e g 156kbps Are terminating resistors connected to the both ends in a CC Link system Check if a station with built in terminating resistor is connected other than at both ends in the CC Link system Connect terminating resistors to the both ends in the CC Link system 288 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action When multiple remote stations are simultaneously powered off at a speed of 156kbps t
508. tion SD on RD on No I I I y I l A1 1 A1 3 I I I A1 7 1 Master station Yes ERR on No Master station B1 3 B1 4 L ERR flashing Yes A1 1 A1 5 A1 8 A3 1 A3 4 No A1 1 A1 2 A1 3 A1 4 1 A1 7 1 A1 9 A3 2 1 A3 3 A3 5 A3 6 B1 1 1 B1 2 B1 5 Master station Yes ERR flashing lll All slave stations No L RUN on I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I I I A4 1 A4 2 I I l I I I I I l I I l I I I I I I I I I I I l I I 1 1 I t 1 I N N p Slave station o i A2 5 A2 6 A210 RD flashing T i i B2 1 B2 2 B2 4 Yes i I Slave station l L ERR on T A2 1 A2 2 1 1 L ERR fashing el _A25 A27 A4 3 B2 2 B2 3 1 I l Slave station I A2 3 A2 4 1 A2 9 SD flashing l A2 10 A4 4 A4 5 b4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Troubleshoot using a programming tool lt gt Page 271 Section 11 1 2 The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item 4 To check error details a programming tool is required 268 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Troubleshooting when the RUN LED on the master station is off No is power being supplied to the power supply module
509. tion ignored and the initial process is performed in all the remote device stations set in the network parameter e In a remote device station where a module has been replaced due to failure the initial process is completed Remote device station e The initial process may not be completed in a remote device station that is normally operating If the initial process is not completed check Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SW011F 157 uonounj uonesjsibes ainpeooid uoHezielul uones BOIASP BJOWSY Eg suoljouny y jo suoneoddy jnjesn g 8 3 2 Event issuance for the interrupt program 158 A request for the interrupt to a CPU module is issued when the conditions that have been set using a programming tool are satisfied and the interrupt program can be executed This function is used to stop the control and execute an interrupt program upon an error or for other purposes Because the conditions are set using a programming tool the number of steps in a program is reduced shortening the scan time An event can be issued to all stations 1 Conditions for event issuance Up to 16 conditions for event issuance can be set The following conditions can be set for interruption When RX RY or SB is turned on or off e Match mismatch of data in RWr and SW e When a link scan is completed 2 How to configure the interrupt settings Configure the setti
510. tion number 1 Station No 1 RX size 24 1814 384 number of points of RX 16 24 words Station No 2 RX offset 40001 Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RX size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RX offset 40184 Start buffer memory address of RX in the station number 3 The lower eight bits of the area buffer memory address 4018p are the Station No 3 RX size 1 14 corresponding size of RX in the station number 3 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 4 RX offset 40184 Start buffer memory address of RX in the station number 4 The upper eight bits of the area buffer memory address 4018p are the Station No 4 RX size 1 1H corresponding size of RX in the station number 4 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 1 RY offset 4200 Start buffer memory address of RY in the station number 1 Station No 1 RY size 24 1814 384 number of points of RY 16 24 words Station No 2 RY offset 42004 Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RY size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RY offset 42184 Start buffer memory address of RY in the station number 3 The lower eight bits of t
511. tion type of the slave station actually Varies depending on the module that Station Type connected was set 104 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Version Select CC Link version of the slave station Select the mode of the master local module if the slave station is a master local module gt Page 43 Section 3 6 2 Page 51 Section 3 6 5 Select the same CC Link version as the version of the slave station actually connected If not data link cannot be performed Varies depending on the module that was set of STA Occupied Select the number of occupied stations of the slave station Varies depending on the module that was set Expanded Cyclic Setting Select the expanded cyclic setting for the slave station The setting can be selected only when Ver 2 or Add is set to Version Varies depending on the module that was set Remote Station Points The number of points of remote I O RX RY occupied by the slave station is displayed The number of points can be changed for a remote I O station when Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Setting Changing the number of points can save the areas of a refresh device in a CPU module _ gt Page 170 Section 8 3 9 When setting eight points to the remote I O stations set them to even numbers of the stations consecutively When setting eight points to odd numbers of the remote I O stations set
512. tions 2 Setting method Set a reserved station in Station Information Setting of the network parameter lt gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 2 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 5 Scan synchronization specification Whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan of a CPU module or not can be selected Selecting the asynchronous mode shortens input transmission delay time Selecting the synchronous mode shortens output transmission delay time 1 Difference between the asynchronous and synchronous modes Item Description A link scan is performed asynchronously with the sequence scan of a CPU module Select this Asynchronous mode mode to shorten input transmission delay time when a sequence scan takes much longer than a link scan Note however that the output transmission delay time is shortened Data link is performed with a scan synchronizing a program The sequence scan and link scan start simultaneously Select this mode to shorten output transmission delay time Note however that the input Synchronous mode transmission delay time becomes longer if a sequence scan takes much longer than a link scan Because a link scan synchronizes a sequence scan extended sequence scan time increases link scan time Point When a module is operated in the synchronous mode the L RUN LED may turn on dimly 2 Precautions a Sequence scan time when the synchronous mode is used Do not exceed
513. to Troubleshooting when the RUN LED on the master station is off c Page 269 Section 11 1 1 1 diagnostics window has been started without When a CC Link system iS__ when the CC LNK system newly configured or the existing has operated CC Link system is changed gt A2 10 A4 6 A station other than the master station The connected station is Master station Host station data link status A1 1 A1 2 A1 4 Initial process A1 7 A1 9 A3 5 Timeout error detection A1 5 A1 8 A1 9 A3 1 A3 2 A3 4 A3 5 B1 3 B1 4 B1 5 Abort error detection ees B1 3 B1 4 B1 5 A3 1 A3 4 A3 5 A1 2 A1 3 Setting error detection Other error detections A1 5 A1 7 A1 8 B1 1 B1 3 B1 4 l gt During data link 4 eel ana I Data link stop is A3 6 B1 6 l Line test in execution I i Parameter test l 1 i in execution l gt A1 3 I Automatic return in process i f LI I a Disconnected l I au ila Host station l i F 3 data link status i i So Transmission path 1 oe error detection l 22 gt 1 Ei e 2 Parameter error detection 2 A1 4 l 2 T i l c o i 1 55 CRC error detection gt A1 5 A1 8 A3 1 B1 2 B1 3 B1 4 os A3 3 A3 4 a 1 1 So l 3 I Q gt I 3 1 3 l Fa fia g I l l l l ly l l The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item c
514. to SW0083 Ex A local station station number 1 with the number of occupied stations of 4 and a remote device station station number 1 with the number of occupied stations of 2 In the following case the overlapped station number is not detected Correct station numbers of the remote device station iocaistatio Station Station Station Station Station Station No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 __No 5 _ __No 6 Same station No Remote device Station station No 1 No 2 Incorrect station numbers of the remote device station CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 4 Transmission Speed Setting This section describes the transmission speed setting in CC Link 1 Conditions for transmission speed Set the same transmission speed in all the stations in the CC Link system Data link cannot be performed with a slave station where the different transmission speed from the master station is set The transmission speed that can be set varies depending on the overall distance gt Page 29 Section 3 2 2 Page 30 Section 3 2 3 Point Whether the transmission speed of the slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked by executing a transmission speed test gt Page 90 Section 6 5 2 2 How to set the transmission speed 1 Set the transmission speed using the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master local
515. to transient data error 0 6 eee eens 287 11 2 4 Problems due to operation error in the master station 0000 ce eens 288 T13 HErornGodesyy cbse n ek Si LD et alike EE te td aa A A hs UL Ao 290 11 3 1 How to check error CodeS cerent ireen cece e teen ee 290 1433 2 JE PORCOUE StS 0c sts atah ard Redes Aaa Me ata eraadae eet aie Lave Da teR died teee dee ek 293 11 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using GX Works2 saasaa sanean enerne 311 11 4 1 Monitoring the host station other stations 000000 c eects 311 11 4 2 Executing the line test obtaining the transmission speed setting 314 11 4 3 Statusilogging ace k ocees Valais tae Ate aa ied ob ts dP 315 414 4 Creating a check sheet astetan enh Biante caesar al peel et bie eet 318 11 4 5 Stopping and restarting data link 2 02 6 ee 320 11 4 6 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station 0 00020000 eee 321 11 4 7 Hardware informatio aasa 2 95 6 anan maea sinks aS aw ad cares A pvr e eae A ee pe ela ls 322 14 5 gt Hardware Teste 2s ct eNO oe EE tN Ea de E le sh 324 APPENDICES 326 Appendix 1 Description of I O Signals 00000 0c ct tenes 326 Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Areas 0 0 0 000 ccc tenets 328 Appendix 3 Link Special Relays SBs and Link Special Registers SWs 343 Appendix 3 1 Link special relays SBS 0 000 000 cette eee ee eee 343 Appendix 3 2 Link specia
516. trictions apply to the version of aMELSECNET H remote I O station depending on the functions of the master local module used Check the version of the MELSECNET H remote I O station in the appendix of this manual gt Page 397 Appendix 6 3 Using a multiple CPU system Before using a master local module in a multiple CPU system refer to the following Manual for the CPU module used multiple CPU system 70 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 2 Applicable programming tools The following two programming tools support a master local module e GX Works2 GX Developer The version of a programming tool that can be used varies depending on the CPU module used For the applicable versions refer to the following 7 User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection Some restrictions apply to the version of a programming tool depending on the functions of the master local module used Refer to Upgrading the Functions of a Master Local Module in this manual gt Page 397 Appendix 6 s oo Bburwwepod ajqeayddy ZZS pelunoy SI JNPOW jeooqjelseyy e 2124M WAS S y Jo UONeINByUOD Z S 71 5 3 Precautions for the System Configuration 1 When using the remote station This section describes notes to be paid attention upon system design to prevent an incorrect input from a remote station a When turning on and off the power Power on the remote station then start data li
517. trol start relay when the Initial device SET M10 master station is operating Be Control start relay when the X SET M11 station master station is local station is operating a xo x1 XOF SB7B 3 4 hH mce no owo O NO MO T Set scan waiting completion to MO OFF scan waiting incomplete ht RST M103 after saving the link devices at master switching mov Ko DO 1 Clear the number of scans after saving the link devices at master SB5A M103 switching INC DO 2 z If r g 5 After saving the link devices gt at master switching wait a gt Do 4 SET mo F fixed number of scans SB5A 7 el BMOVP K4x1000 W1000 K8 J BMOVP K4Y1000 W1100 K8 Save RX RY RWr RWw E a data to W device BMOVP WO w1500 K16 Control ladder BMOVP w100 w1600 K16 when the z j master station i SB5B M103 is operating BMOVP W1000 K4Y1000 K8 2 UO BMOVP W1100 G224 K8 Set the saved data to RY RX RWw RWr BMOVP W1500 W100 K16 7 UO i BMOVP W1600 G736 K16 I SB5A SB5B M103 _ Refresh change instruction H H LSET SB1 Jrequest ON Set scan waiting completion to RST mio3 JOFF scan waiting incomplete 7 jafter saving the link devices at SB42 SB43 g i master switching H RST SB1 Refresh change instruction request OFF KO sw43 __ SET M10 POMIQ O aaa NM i I i Control program when the master station is operating i 1 MCR NO a xo x1 XOF SB7B J r i mc oN M1 Control ladde
518. ttribute code b15 to b8 b7 to bO b and C Access code Attribute code S 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory or the start number 4 ies r or device number of the device 1 to 4802 S 4 Number of read points Specify the number of read data in word units re User 1 to 32 4 For details refer to the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station from which data are read When specifying the random access buffer specify the start address of the random access buffer as 0 2 The value indicates the maximum number of read data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station or within the receive buffer area setting range set by a parameter 3 To read device data from the CPU module of the target station other than the QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode LCPU QnACPU or AnUCPU the setting range must be 1 to 32 words b Access code and attribute code When accessing to the buffer memory in the CC Link Attribute Buffer memory contents Access code code Buffer in the intelligent device station 00 Random access buffer 204 Remote input 214 Remote output 224 044 Buffers in a master station and a local station Remote register 244 Link special relay 63H Link special register 644 176 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Access code and attribute code When acces
519. twork parameter 136 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Overview of data transmission of when the standby master function is used The following is an overview of data transmission of when the standby master function is used a When data link is controlled by the master station Output from the master station Standby master station standby status Master station controlling Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote output RY RY00 to RYOF RY10 to RY1F RY20 to RY2F RY30 to RY3F RY40 to RY4F RY50 to RYSF Master station controlling Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station r 7 Remote I O station Station number 3 Occupies 1 station r 7 Outputs RY RWw from the master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the standby master station shaded areas in the figure above Input of the master station Standby master station standby status Station number 1 The number of occupied stations 1 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote Remote input RX output RY i RX00 to RXOF RY00 to RYOF l RX10to RX1F IRVTHeRY 4 RX20 to RX2F _ RY20 to RY2F RX30 to RX3F RY3To RYE RX40 to RX4F RX00 to RXOF RX10 to R RY00 to RYOF RY10 to RY1F RX20 to RX2F RX30 t
520. unctions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause fo
521. und not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 423 Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 424 SH NA 080394E N SH NA 080394E N 1503 MEE MODEL QUJ61BT11N U SY E MODEL CODE 13JR64 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manua
522. uring a debugging session the master local module does not receive data from other stations and does not send data of the host station 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master local module to be monitored in Module No or I O Address A 3 Click the Start Monitoring button 4 Click the SipDaalink button or StatDataLrk button CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Line Monitor Host station Module Setting Link Scan Time 7 Host Station Master Station Ver 2 mode eo CC Link F Max 2 Data Link Status Start Data linking DR Module No v 1 i 2 Action Status Noma Minimum ms E A Switching Status Master Station Curent 2 ms r 7 Using Loop emo 5 CH O Line status Noma SSS aes S Network Test CH 1 Line status SS Loop Test L Loop Type Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station Eaa tar g P san be set as EEPROM F fers Close Point When stopping or restarting data link do not write data to the buffer memory area buffer memory address 5E0 sonsouBbelp yuI 909 Z xipueddy Jedojaaeq X9 Bulsn u yM z xipueddy 405 7 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station 406 Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station
523. urns on 67By Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether a station is in the temporary error invalid status is stored SWO007C 0 Normal 67Cy 1 Temporary error invalid status SW007D b15 b14 b13 b12 e3 gt ae 67Dp 2 Temporary error 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 oO O 7 76 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SWO007F The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations 67Fy Error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Data link status of each station is stored 0 Normal 1 Data link error SW0080 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO 6804 swo080 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 SW0081 a SW0082 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 i Other station SW0083 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 5 o 7 swo082 data link status 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 6824 The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations e It takes maximum of six seconds for this register to turn on after a SW0083 slave station connected to the master station or local station becomes 6834 faulty The time until this register turns on differs depending on the system configuration and error status Temporary error invalid stations error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted 356 APPENDICES
524. urs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES 3 Master station lt gt intelligent device station a Master station intelligent device station The time between the master station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from an intelligent device station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt e G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 WT x RT x 1000 ms A OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU QO2CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO2CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time gt Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 Page 351 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB _ 3 Page 351 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a Q06HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms 4 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried ew Bulsseoojg yu eyeq y xIpueddy SUONONJISU PS eoIpap JO aul Hulssedo0ig E y xIpue
525. us station number 4 X20 Initial setting change of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X21 Initial setting change of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X22 Digital value setting of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Bae X23 Analog output enable of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X25 Error reset of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X26 Error reset of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y30 Data link error flag station number 1 Y31 Data link error flag station number 4 pee M100 Communication condition established flag X1000 to X105F Remote input RX0 to RX5F Y1000 to Y105F Remote output RYO to RY5F WO to WB Remote register RWr0 to RWrB AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W100 to W10B Remote register RWw0 to RWwB Page 233 Section 10 2 1 2 D500 to D501 CH 1 digital output value CH 2 digital output value D508 Error code X1060 to X10BF Remote input RX0 to RX5F Y1060 to Y10BF Remote output RYO to RY5F WC to W17 Remote register RWr0 to RWrB AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W10C to W117 Remote register RWw0 to RWwB Page 233 Section 10 2 1 2 D510 to D511 CH 1 check code CH 2 check code D518 Error code 248 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Program example 1 Create the following program on a programming tool Confirmation of the data link status xo XOF X1 SW80 0 R E AF 1 1 H i Mc NO M100 J Data link is normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN ae AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN SW80 0 z Data link error v30 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN
526. ut a slave station to be connected to a CC Link system For a slave station set the station number of the slave station Manual for the slave station used This chapter describes how to set the parameters for a master local module 7 1 Parameter Setting Method Parameters for a master local module can be set by using a programming tool or a dedicated instruction Select the setting method depending on the application Item Application Reference Use a programming tool for the following cases Parameter settings by using a e To set parameters on a window in a simply way without creating program Page 96 Section 7 3 programming tool e To transfer data automatically from RX RY RWr RWw SB and SWina Page 114 Section 7 4 master local module to a device in a CPU module Use the dedicated instruction for the following cases Parameter settings by using e To connect nine or more master local modules to one programmable the dedicated instruction Page 205 Section 9 8 controller system G P RLPASET instruction To change the parameter settings while a CPU module is set to RUN poya Buyjes sejowesed p 93 7 2 Parameter Setting List This section lists the parameter setting items for a master local module and whether the settings are required for each station O The setting is required A The setting is required as the occasion demands x The setting is not required Ne
527. utton The Loop test window appears Loop test m Operation state of all stations ibs Normal a Illegal i Reserved fa Invalid fe Unused m Loop test Target station All stations 1 64 Selected station No 5 Specify the station where a line test is executed in Target station Then click the Execute Test button To execute a test in all the stations Select All stations 1 64 To execute a test in a specified station Select Selected station and enter the station number 6 The test result is displayed in Operation state of all stations Point Ifthe Loop Test button cannot be clicked check that the master station has been selected in Module Setting Do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 and 6084 during line test Do not execute a line test using a program and other peripherals at the same time The line test may not be normally executed 4 Transmission speed test A transmission speed test cannot be executed on the CC Link diagnostics of GX Developer Execute a test using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs _ gt Page 91 Section 6 5 2 2 5 Status logging The status logging cannot be performed on the CC Link diagnostics of GX Developer Use GX Works2 to perform it 404 APPENDICES 6 Data link stop restart How to stop and restart data link of a master local module is described below D
528. vice stations other than a specified station continue to operate This applies to a master local module with a serial number first five digits of 08032 or later Ex To specify the remote device station station number 3 2 Remote device station 9090 fosceces 0d station number 1 O00000000 D m Replace 9000 o00000000d Station number 3 Initial process using Specification of remote device station to be Initial procedure registered station numbers 1 3 5 7 initialized 2905 00000000 Remote device station station number 3 Programming Master station tool Ip e Remote device station Stes station number 5 Remote device station 9990 900000000 station number 7 a Replace the failed remote device station station number 3 2 Use Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 to specify the station number 3 Turn on the applicable bit only the bit of the start station number in SW0014 to SW0017 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO SW0014 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SW0015 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 SW0016 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 SW0017 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
529. vice to 4 3 2 1 O x x swo016 station to be 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 eten ates ras ar 48 45 6 35 94 98 Swo0017 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 617 The stations need not be set by the number of occupied stations Error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted The status of communications between the master local module and CPU module is stored SW0020 620 Module status 0 Normal completion O O oO H Values other than 0 Error code of the CPU module User s manual for the CPU module used Whether the data link restart instruction using SB0000 has been normally SW0041 Data link restart completed is stored 6414 result 0 Normal completion O O j Values other than 0 Error code gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 Refresh Whether the refresh instruction at standby master switching has been SW0043 instruction at normally completed is stored 6434 standby master 0 Normal completion O x x switching result Values other than 0 Error code _3 Page 293 Section 11 3 2 Whether the data link stop instruction using SB0002 has been normally SW0045 Data link stop completed is stored 645p result 0 Normal completion O O Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 293 Section 11 3 2 Temporary error Whether the temporary error invalid station specification has been SW0049 invalid station normally comple
530. w 90 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 Using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs A transmission speed test is performed in the master station 1 Before the transmission speed test check the following e If the switch on the CPU module is set at STOP e If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET e If all the stations are connected with CC Link dedicated cables Universal model High Performance model RESET RUN STOP RUN CO STOP CD 2 Set the station number setting switches on the master station to 0 QU61BT11N RUN MST sD ERR STATION No 3 Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master station from 0 to 4 When setting the switch from 0 to 4 set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation CF Page 21 CHAPTER 2 QJ61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST sD ERR LERR STATION No BULLI J YY S L G9 S8 peeds uolssiwsuel z7S 9 4 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system 5 Turn on Data link stop SB0002 to stop data link 6 Turn on Transmission speed test request SB000B to start a transmission speed test When the transmission speed test is started Transmission speed test accept status SB0185 turns on The transmission speed test is completed in about 10 seconds 7 When the transmission speed test is completed Transmission speed test completion status SB0186 turns on
531. w 2 44004 to 17408 to Master Local station face ne ion endix 4BFFy 19455 station For Stores the send data to the pp data sending master station and other Read 11 e Local station salve stations Data write For data received from other slave sending stations are also stored receiving Ver 2 Master station compatible Stores the data received O remote register from slave stations RWr 2 4C00 to 19456 to Master a had ae A station For ead only ppendix 53FFy 21503 Local station data 11 a Stores the data received receiving from the master station e Local station For data receiving 21504 to 5400 to 7FFFy System area 5 32767 4 This buffer memory area is used when the remote net Ver 1 mode and remote net additional mode are selected 2 This buffer memory area is used when the remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode are selected Point Do not write data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction in the programmable controller system 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 Assignment and Modes For a master local module the mode can be selected according to the system used For example there is a mode to configure a new system or a mode to add a Ver 2 compatible slave station to a Ver 1 compatible slave station Depending on the mode the addresses of buffer memory areas to store RX RY RWr and RWw vary 3 6 1 Assignment In
532. wing errors has occurred e The error on all the stations was detected The value outside the range is set for the station number setting switches or transmission speed mode ON setting switch of the master local module Two or more master stations are connected on the same line e Settings are incorrect e A cable is disconnected Or a transmission path is affected by noise 1 A A data link faulty station was detected Flashing TEN Or the station number set for a remote station is already in use OFF Operating normally L ERR LED Indicates the error status of a data link ON A data link error has occurred at the host station Flashing at Soular The settings of the switches 2 and 3 were changed when the power was on Note that the change of the regula 3 switch may not be detected at the time of error on all the stations intervals Flashing at The communications are unstable due to the following reasons irregular A terminating resistor is not connected intervals The communications are affected by noise OFF Operating normally Sets the station number of the master local module Default 0 Set the station numbers not used for other stations lt Setting range gt Station number 2 e Master station 0 setting switch e Local station 1 to 64 e Standby master station 1 to 64 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set the ERR LED turns on 22 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES
533. x 1 x 1 10 x 1 1 40ms 20 3 x 1 x 3 1 10 42ms 20 x 1 x 1 10 30ms Max value 20 x 1 3 x 2 x 3 1 10 x 1 1 61ms 20 x 1 x 2 10 x 1 1 60ms 20 3 x 2 x 3 1 10 51ms 20 x 1 x 2 10 50ms 6 Master station lt gt intelligent device station Transmission delay time between a master station and an intelligent device station varies depending on the intelligent device station Refer to the user s manual for the intelligent device module used 380 APPENDICES Appendix 4 3 Processing time of dedicated instructions This section describes the processing time of dedicated instructions time between an instruction issued and a response received 1 Master station lt local station a Master station local station The time between the master station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from a local station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt e G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 1671 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and QO2CPU 0 5ms LS Link scan time 3 Page 366 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 SL Local station sequence scan
534. y and 1BDy 444 and 445 60 1D6y and 1D7 470 and 471 1704 and 1714 368 and 369 22 18A and 18B 394 and 395 35 1A4y and 1A5 420 and 421 48 1BE and 1BF 446 and 447 61 1D84 and 1D9 472 and 473 10 1724 and 173p 870 and 371 23 18Cy and 18Dp 396 and 397 36 1A6 and 1A7p 422 and 423 49 1COy and 1C1 448 and 449 62 1DAy and 1DBy 474 and 475 11 1744 and 175p 872 and 373 24 18E and 18F4 398 and 399 37 1A8 and 1A9 424 and 425 50 1C2y and 1C3 450 and 451 63 1DCy and 1DD 476 and 477 12 1764 and 177 374 and 375 25 1904 and 1914 400 and 401 38 1AA and 1AB 426 and 427 51 1C4 and 1C5 452 and 453 64 1DE and 1DF 478 and 479 13 1784 and 1794 876 and 377 26 1924 and 1934 402 and 403 39 1AC and 1ADp 428 and 429 52 1C6 and 1C7 454 and 455 332 3 Remote register RWw and remote register RWr This area is used when the remote net Ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected APPENDICES e In the remote net Ver 1 mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw L gt Page 47 Section 3 6 3 3 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw in a Ver 1 compatible slave station gt Page 54 Section 3 6 5 3 a Remot
535. ystem Setting whether to refresh or compulsorily clear a reliability slave station when the switch on a programmable O O O controller CPU is set to STOP Standby master function O O x Data link start function using a standby master O O ss station Block data assurance per station oO x x 397 ainpoyy 207 Se e JO SUOH OUN y HulpeiBdp 9 xipueddy QCPU QJ72LP25 25 F excluding a Basic model QJ72LP25G Function Basic model QCPU QJ72LP25GE QCPU QJ72BR15 Remote device station initialization procedure O O O registration function Event issuance for the interrupt program O oO x Automatic CC Link startup o O O Remote net mode O O O Remote I O net mode 0 3 O x Reserved station function O O O Error invalid station setting function O O O Synchronous mode O O x eee Scan synchronization Useful applications Asynchronous mode O O O Temporary error invalid station setting function O O O Data link stop restart O O O Station number overlap checking function O O O Supporting a multiple CPU system 0 e x Remote O station points setting O O O Remote net Ver 2 mode O O Remote net additional mode oO O x Master station duplication error canceling function O O O Performing transient F alee Transient transmission O Q O transmission 1 A module after a Basic model QCPU with the function Ver B supports this function 2 A Redundant CPU doe

MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents